You are on page 1of 2533

Before beginning

Page 1

General conditions for the software


usage license
1/ Purpose
Metrologic Group develops software applications and proposes them to its customers. These applications are
standard software packages that may be complemented by options and/or special add-ons.
The list of software that Metrologic Group proposes is given on the front side of this contract. The programs
are identified by their references, and are called the "software" in the rest of this contract.

2/ Propriety / Right of Usage


2.1 The software is an intellectual work protected in France by the law of 11 March 1957 concerning artistic
and literary propriety and modified by the law of 3 July 1985. According to this law, the customer has only a
right to use the software personally, unalienable and without exclusivity.
2.2 The site where the software is installed and the number of licenses are indicated on the purchase
contract. This contract needs to be amended before the software can be installed in a different site. Moreover,
the number of licenses for a given software delimits the number of users that may execute the software at the
same time. At any time, the customer may take new licenses for the use of the software by signing a new
contract.
2.3 In consequence, the user agrees not to:
a) pass an agreement or convention, whatever the terms, that will have for effect the use of the software by or
for a third party, even without charge;
b) uncompile or unassemble all or part of the software;
c) make a partial or complete copy of the software or its documentation in any form whatsoever. The only
copy allowed is a backup or archive copy made by the customer. Such copies are submitted to the same
clause as the original software described in this contract.
2.4 Installation of the software(s) requires the use of an access code, a hardware key (dongle) or any system
delivered by Metrologic Group in order to control the use of the software license.
Important : in the case the hardware key (dongle), is lost, the replacement cost will be equivalent to the
license and its options price.

3/ Delivery
3.1 The software is supplied on a computer support such as CD-ROM or any other support that may be read
by the machine. The software reproduces the original version as it exists at Metrologic Group. The software is
supplied with documentation in one exemplar.
3.2 The software delivery address and the schedule for delivery are mentioned on the front side of this
contract.
3.3 The customer installs the software by following the instructions given in the documents. However, if the
customer wants Metrologic Group to do this installation, the customer will be charged for the resulting
additional costs. All operations in relation to the Metrologic Group hardware or electronics as well as the
Metrologic Group machine compensation files shall be performed by Metrologic Group personnel, or by
personnel expressly agreed by Metrologic Group.

4/ Guaranty
Metrologic Group guaranties to the customer that the supplied software version comprises all the functions
described in the user documents supplied to the customer. State of the art and technical limitations make it

Page 2

impossible to assert that the software is free of defects of conception or operation. Thus, for all the software
mentioned in the contract, Metrologic Group accords a follow-up period of 3 months free of charge. The
content and modalities of this service are described below.
4.1 Content: In the scope of this guaranty, Metrologic Group will fix any reproducible functional
non-conformities that might appear when running the software. The term "non-conformity" means operation
that is not in conformity with the specifications as described in the user documents supplied along with the
software.
4.2 Modalities of execution: Metrologic Group, its Dealers or OEM's reselling the product will reply to
telephone calls for any such non-conformities from 9 to 17 hours, Monday to Friday, exclusive of holidays and
other days not worked. If there is an immediate solution, the appropriate procedure will be communicated to
the customer by telephone. If there is no immediate solution, Metrologic Group will do its best to identify and
qualify the non-conformity as soon as possible after receiving the telephone call, and to provide the customer
with a solution allowing the customer to obtain the desired result. The customer must give a written
description of the non-conformity as noted in using the software, and this either by mail or fax. Any additional
expenses for intervention of Metrologic Group on the customer's site, and having for origin bad-handling or
error in using the software, will be
charged to the customer according to the conditions in application at Metrologic Group the day of the
intervention.
It will be the same for intervention of Metrologic Group due to a customer's error in handling the equipment
and/or associated software, whether or not these were sold by Metrologic Group and whether or not they are
maintained by Metrologic Group.
4.3 Limits of guaranty: The software maintenance service is ensured only if the software is used appropriately
according to its destination and on adapted equipment. In no case will Metrologic Group' guaranty apply to
software that has been modified without its consent or used on equipment and/or basic software that is not
adapted. It is the same if the customer decides to use the software on a different site and/or with a
configuration different from that initially foreseen.
4.4 In the framework of a maintenance contract, according to the guaranty, the customer may continue to
use the technical assistance by telephone for correction of the non-conformities described in 4.2

5/ Duration
5.1 The license(s) for use of the software, the object of this contract, are granted for an unlimited period.
However, in case on nonpayment or of partial payment of the licenses for using the software, or in case of the
customer's non-respect of any of the other obligations for the right to use the software, non-withstanding any
legal action for damage and interest, Metrologic Group may revoke the customer's right to use the software
without any prior notice. Such a revocation results in the obligation for the customer to stop using the
software immediately, and to return the software with all its supports, including documentation and any partial
or total copies the customer may have made.

6/ Price / Payment
6.1 The right to use the software that is the purpose of this contract is granted to the customer in exchange
of the payment of its price in a time period indicated on the front side of this contract.

7/ Responsibility
7.1 The customer acknowledges that he has been fully informed of the software's technical specifications and
operating conditions, and he uses it under his entire responsibility. It is his responsibility to implement the
appropriate operating methods and to avoid any damageable consequences that might result from use of the
software.
7.2 Metrologic Group is in no way responsible for direct or indirect damage that may result from the use of
the software included in this contract. In particular, the parties agree that in no case will Metrologic Group be
liable to reparation for financial or commercial loss the customer suffer.

Page 3

7.3 However, if for any reason whatsoever Metrologic Group' responsibility is engaged for the execution of this
contract, the possible corresponding reparation at its charge cannot exceed the reimbursement of the usage
license(s) that are the purpose of this contract.

8/Disagreement
8.1 The present contract is submitted to French laws by explicit agreement and this contract represents the
totality of the obligations agreed upon by Metrologic Group and the customer concerning maintenance of the
software that is the purpose of this contract.
For any disagreement concerning the interpretation of this contract, the parties agree to concert to find a
amicable solution before engaging any legal action. If no amicable solution can be found, the Grenoble courts
have explicit jurisdiction, even if there are more than one defenders or appeal of guaranty.

9/ Special conditions
9.1 The present contract may not be ceded. It annuls, replaces if relevant, any other letter or prior agreement
relative to the same purpose. It can be modified only by an additional agreement.
9.2 The present set of clauses replace any others that may be mentioned on the customer's commands for
the purpose of the present contract.
9.3 In the case that one clause in the present contract is declared contrary to the law, or in any other way
made unexecutable, then this clause will be modified or deleted without annulling the entire contract.

Page 4

How to use this guide

Page 5

User Guide
Overview

This guide is intended to help beginner users starting out with the software and to answer advanced
users' specific questions.
This documentation is available in .pdf format, thus allowing all or part of the guide to be printed.
The Online help may also be accessed while using the software, either via the ? menu or by pressing
the F1 key to obtain a description of the current function.

Composition
The Online help window contains two tabs:
The Search tab, allowing you to perform a search using key words and displays all sections in the guide
containing the relevant term.
The Contents tab, showing all sections in the guide. These are as follows:

Before beginning, containing:


- A presentation of the license contract, the present User Guide, and the software (windows and
menus)
- A description of the software installation/update/uninstallation and configuration procedures
Menus, detailing the menus in the order in which they are displayed in the software user window.
This makes navigation between the guide and the application simpler.
Special features, describing certain hardware, laser system and poly-articulated arm features for
example.
Appendices, containing a detailed description of how certain options function.

Page 6

Typographical conventions
Boldface
>

...

Software menus, submenus, and function titles are shown in boldface.


Example: Menu File > New Working Session
This symbol indicates the following step in a path.
Example: Start > Programs > Metrolog XG
Steps in a procedure.

Underlined in Indicates a hypertext link. Hypertext links take the user to the page in the
blue
manual on which the relevant function is described.
Indicates a note.
Indicates an example.
Indicates a warning.
Indicates an explanation of how a function is used in program mode.
When the mouse cursor takes this form when rolled over an image, this
indicates a clickable area. Clicking in this area takes the user to the section
in which the selected field is described.

Page 7

Software: introduction
There are a number of software variants depending on the version installed and options purchased: Simplified
geometry, Geometry with 3D View, Surface, Full. If certain features cannot be accessed, check the options
purchased in the menu ? > About this Program.

Page 8

Windows: introduction
Feature Bar

Result Window

Menu Bar

3D View

Toolbar

Status Bar

Feature Database

DRO

Page 9

Menus

Page 10

File

New Working Session to open a new session.


Open Working Session to open a previously saved session.
Open Previous Working Session to open the last session used.
Save Working Session to save the changes made to an existing session.
Save Working Session As to name and save a new session.
Delete Working Session to delete a session and the corresponding files.
Import to import data in formats other than the software.
Export to save the data for an inspection (control) performed -in different file formats.
Data Import Wizard to create specific import formats to match user file formats.
Edit Informations used to enter information about the work session, traceability information for example.
Import informations to import file information from a *.DAT file.
Print Report to print work session information for checking/control (in text, graphic or customized mode).
Wizard report offers a Wizard to help you create reports.

Page 11

Statistics for statistical processing of a series of measurements.


The sub-menu allows you to select Current Control or Statistical Results mode.
Archive Current Control allows the current control to be included in the statistical results.
Recall an Archived Control used to select one of the controls used for statistical processing.
Export Archived Controls to create a text file of the selected controls.
Delete All Measured Values used to delete all measured feature values while conserving their theoretical
values.
Results used to assign certain characteristics to results before printing the inspection (control) report. For
example, reverse the deviation sign of features whose nominal X, Y, Z or angular dimension is negative.
Recover Automated Backup used to recover a session if the system is subject to a power cut or software
crash.
Send to used to send a working session by e-mail in HTML format.
Publish to publish a session on a Web site.
Quit to exit the software.

Page 12

Preferences

This menu is used to mage the software display settings.


Open used to open a previously saved desktop configuration.
Open Previous to open the last configuration used.
Save to save the changes made to an existing configuration.
Save As to name and save a new configuration.
Change User to change user during a session.
Edit Users to manage existing users and create new users.
Change Password to change the current user's password.
Edit Rules to program (in Visual Basic) feature measurement, definition or construction rules that will then be
associated with a user.
Lock Windows prevents windows being moved or window size changed.

Page 13

Enable Sound Effects used to enable/disable sound effects for system events, for example during probing.
Enable Highlighting, used to identify the current feature by a specific highlighting color (default yellow).
Automated Backup to select backup frequency for the current working session.
Units to manage the units used for the current session:
Millimeters, Inches, Decimal Degrees, Degrees DMS, Grads are the units of
measurement (linear dimensions and angles) used when working in the software.
Celsius / Fahrenheit to select the units in which temperatures are expressed.
Pressure used to choose the unit of pressure in the event of connection with a laser.
Form Fault / Standard Deviation to select between form fault type or standard deviation
type display in the results window.
I J K / Projected Angle to select between display of unitary i, j, k vectors or projected
angles on the alignment axes (for the plane, cone, cylinder, and line features), in the results
window.
ISO, ASME/ANSI to select the Standard to be applied for geometrical tolerance evaluation.
Precision to define the number of decimal places (digits after the decimal point) (1 to 6) for
linear dimensions and angles.
Statistical Units to select the value to be used in statistics, Standard Deviation or
Variance.
Material Position Symbols used to specify deviation direction. These replace the + or sign of the deviation.
Advanced Parameters used to modify the software setup parameters.
Language to select the language used in the current work session.

Page 14

CMM

Set-up CNC Parameters used to configure the speed parameters (probing, high and low) and distance
parameters (approach, search, and retract) of the CNC.
Reset Scales used to reset the scales and/or set reference marks.
High Speed This feature allows switchover between high and low speed modes. In program mode, a line
showing the new speed is added. The symbol in front of the function (menu item) indicates that high speed
mode is enabled.
Positioning/Probing used to move the CMM to a given position.
Gasket scan used to freely determine the probing path for scanning, in particular to scan a gasket.
Use Joysticks in PCS used to move the CMM in accordance with the active alignment axes.
Clearance Planes used to configure the function allowing clearance points and/or adjustable head positions
to be automatically generated in automatic feature measurement mode to create a program.
Expansion/Shrinking used to assign an expansion or shrinking parameter to the measurement (molding).
Leapfrog Realignment used to continue workpiece measurement when the workpiece or measuring
equipment has been moved.
Workpiece Temperature Compensation used to set the compensation of the workpiece to be inspected

Page 15

according to the material used and room temperature.


Rotary Table
Move to change rotary table orientation.
Calibrate Rotary Table to calibrate a rotary table by taking measurements at different angular
positions.
Activate to render a rotary table operational.
Set-up to adjust the speed of rotation of a rotary table according to its maximum speed.
Probe/Stylus Changers
Activate changer activates the changer(s) and allows specific commands to be sent.
Set-up Calibration used to select tool or stylus changer calibration and enter certain settings.
Define Slot to assign a slot to a probes file.
Store Probe in Slot to place the current probe in its slot.
Edit information to modify current probe slot information.
Compensation File Information allows you to view the information contained in the file MT23.dat for
23-parameter compensation.
Build / Inspect allows real-time display of the deviation between the probe and a list of features and/or a list
of CAD entities (Laser system).
Station Management used to manage the different stations used in a work session (Laser system).

Page 16

Probes

New File of Probes to create a new set of probes.


Open to open a previously saved probes file.
Open Previous to open the last probes file used.
Save to save the changes made to an existing probes file.
Save As to name and save a new probes file.
Export Probes List to export the list of probes in the current file and also its characteristics.
Edit Informations to add information, traceability information for example, on the current set of probes.
Print Probes List to print the list of probes in the current file and also its characteristics.
DefineProbe to assign a name and adjustable head position to the probe.
Select to select an existing probe as current probe.
Calibrate to initialize the current probe on the calibration sphere.
Calibrate Cylindrical to calibrate the probe cylinder/shaft.
Qualify Probe Head to initialize automatic calibration.

Page 17

Quick Qualification of the Motorized Head for faster initialization of automatic calibration.
Add head to display the adjustable head settings in the 3D View.
Automated Calibration to perform automated calibration of several preselected adjustable head positions.
Unlock / Lock head to unlock then lock again of the measurement head.
Locate Calibration Sphere to define a new reference sphere.
Locate probes to locate a probes file on a reference sphere. This means that the offsets of the probes in this
file are matched to the machine's reference sphere(s).
Memorize MASTER sphere used to position the Master sphere with respect to the machine's reference
marks/CMM scales to allow compensation to be used correctly.
Browse Probes Database to open the database in the Probes tab.

Page 18

CAD

Browse CAD Database used to open the CAD file management window.
New CAD file to create a new CAD file in the software format.
Open CAD File or Open Previous CAD File to display the part drawing defined in a CAD file that has
already been converted to the software format.
Import CAD Files used to convert one or more standard format (VDA, SET, UNI) or native format (Catia, UG
Parasolid, ) CAD files to the software format.
Close CAD File to close all CAD files opened during the session.
Delete CAD Files used to delete CAD files in the software format and the associated files.
Show Surfaces to display surface type CAD features in the graphic view.
Show Curves to display curve type CAD features in the graphic view.
Show Points to display point type CAD features in the graphic view.
Show Tolerances to display geometrical and dimensional tolerances and reference features in the graphic
view.
Show Alignments to display alignment type CAD features in the graphic view.
Show Meshes to display meshes type CAD features in the graphic view.
Orientation mode to display the direction of CAD normals in the open CAD file(s).
Advanced Parameters used to modify tolerance character font in the graphic view.

Page 19

Features

Define Feature to enter the nominal values of the features to be measured. These features will be shown
on-screen.
Measure Feature to probe the features, either automatically or manually.
Construct Feature used, on the basis of probed and/or constructed features, to build constructions such as
intersections, parallel items, etc.
Evaluate used to calculate angles, distances, geometrical tolerances and obtain alignment information.
Duplicate to copy information from one feature to another.
Reverse Orientation to change feature orientation.
Filter to filter measurement points according to specific criteria.
Extract Nominal used to search for the coordinates of points in a CAD file and use these to define features.
Apply boundaries used to apply boundaries to a feature using one or more planes. This applies to the line,
cylinder, cone, and plane features.
Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points used to recalculate all surface points by automatically re-evaluating
them on all the CAD surfaces according to orientation and proximity criteria.
Update Features Nominals to correct a feature's nominal values in accordance with the changes made to
the CAD file.
Send to TWIN System allows the features measured to be transmitted from one machine to another in Twin
mode.

Page 20

Receive from TWIN System allows the features measured to be received from a machine by another in
Twin mode.
Color Coding used to give additional visual information (color) on feature deviation with respect to its
tolerance zone.
Set-Up Default Parameters used, for each type of feature, to configure: printing, the minimum number of
probing operations required to measure the feature, the default tolerance values, etc.
Feature Calculation Mode used to determine surface point N.D. sign display rule.
Browse Features Database to manage a list of all the features used in the work session.
Manual measurement assistant enables making measurements/acquisitions, one after the other, on the
features defined beforehand in the work session.

Page 21

Cloud of points ("Point cloud")

Import allows clouds of points in different formats to be imported.


Acquisition allows a cloud of points to be acquired.
Export allows a cloud of points or its mesh to be exported in different formats.
Filtering allows clouds of points to be edited and modified.
Delete all used to delete all clouds of points in the working session.
Mesh used to construct a mesh based on the clouds of points.
Auto-fit used to automatically create an alignment on the cloud of points so as to have the cloud match the
associated CAD model.
Quick-Fit used to create an alignment on the cloud of points so as to have the cloud match the associated
CAD model by using a small number of points.
Best-Fit allows best positioning (best-fit) of a cloud of points on the CAD model.
Fit on retrieved features allows best-fit of the current alignment using the features retrieved from the cloud
of points.
Evaluate Surface Mapping allows the deviations between clouds of points and the corresponding CAD
surfaces to be viewed by applying colors to them.

For more information, see Points cloud.

Page 22

Alignment

This menu is used to create/manage the different types of alignment. The software offers eight types of
alignment :One point, Model, Geometrical, On 3 Center Points, On Plane & 2 points, On 6 Surface
Points, On Reference Features, and Best Fit.

Open used to retrieve a previously saved alignment.


Open Previous to retrieve the alignment opened when the software was last used.
Save to save the changes made to an existing alignment.
Delete to delete one or more alignments from the work session.
Activate to select one of the existing alignments.
Associate To CAD Alignment to associate/dissociate the CAD alignment with the active alignment.
Properties displays the properties of all the alignments used in the work session.
One point used to create an alignment orientated in accordance with the existing alignment and centered on
the current probe position or on a probing point.
Model Consists in probing 6 points on the reference surfaces to create an isostatic reference.
Geometrical Consists in using previously measured features to perform the alignment calculation.

Page 23

On 3 Center Points Consists in using three features corresponding to three points (spheres, circles or
points, etc.), whose theoretical positions are known, to create an alignment.
On Plane & 2 points used to create an alignment from a plane and two points.
On 6 Surface Points used to create an alignment by probing six pre-selected points in the CAD file.
On Reference Features used to create an alignment by using reference features that block one or more
degrees of freedom. The software matches the theoretical coordinates and the real coordinates.
Best Fit used to create an alignment with minimum RMS deviation of the selected features. Degrees of
freedom may also be set for use in the calculation.
Station Orientation used to express the positions of the different stations with respect to a reference station
(Laser system).
Delete Station Orientation used to cancel station orientation with respect to one another (Laser system).
Send to TWIN System allows an alignment to be transmitted from one machine to another in Twin mode.
Receive from TWIN System allows an alignment to be received from a machine by another in Twin mode.
Browse Alignment Database used to open the database in the Alignment tab.

Page 24

Program

This menu is used to create the measurement programs.


New to create a new program in the software language or DMIS language.
Open and Open Previous to edit an existing program.
Close to close the current program.
Save and Save As to save the program in Teach-in mode.
Delete to delete a program.
Import to create programs from groups of points.
Export to create programs to the DMIS standard and in ASCII format.
Edit Informations used to enter program-specific information.
Print to print the commands saved in the program.
Insert opens the following sub-menu:

Page 25

Activate Manual Mode to switch CMM movement mode to manual during program
execution.
Activate CNC Mode to switch CMM movement mode to automatic during program
execution.
Activate Low/High Speed to add a command line indicating a speed change.
Synchro. with TWIN System to synchronize execution of programs on two CMMs in Twin
mode.
Subcall Program used to execute a program in another program.
If-Then-Else Statement to insert a condition in a program that allows different command
lines to be executed depending on the result previously obtained in the program.
Insert operator instructions used to insert a text or graphic message to help the operator
with program execution.
Program Mode opens the following sub-menu:
Run to launch the program.
Stop and Restart are used to stop the program running and then restart it from the same
place.
Teach-In to switch to program Teach-in mode.
Insert Off-Line allows Teach-in mode to be used without the CMM being moved.
Options opens the following sub-menu:
Reduce Window to minimize the programming window (displayed in icon form).
Enable Path Display allows movement paths to be viewed in the 3D View.
Lock Manual Mode prevents switchover to automatic mode in a program.
Automated Probe Selection allows the software probes and probes defined in DMIS
language to be matched.
Prepare Limited CAD File allows the software to select, from the CAD file, the only part to
be used by the program.
DMIS v4.0 / DMIS v5.0 used to select the DMIS standard.
Add auto retract instruction used to add via points before and after each point measured.
DMIS refresh parameters used to configure the quick refresh button.
Remote Control used to open and run a program from another station ( Twin mode).
Mirror Entire Program used to automatically create a mirror program of the current program.
Recover Automated Backup used to recover a program if the system is subject to a power cut or software
crash.
Convert hit-points to geometrical points converts hit-points for a feature into definition and/or
measurement lines.
List used probes displays a list of the probes used in a program and the number of times they have been
activated.
Program Wizard to open the program creation wizard.

Page 26

Modules

Assembly optimization used for optimum positioning of at least two assemblies with dynamic tolerance
zone constraints.
Distance/Angle Quick Evaluation used to calculate a distance or angle without using measured features,
by clicking the CAD file
Section Tools used to manipulate sections once they have been measured. It is thus possible to
compensate for ball radius when scanning, prolong a section using another section, or even trim sections to a
precise dimension.
Real time export enables the last feature measured to be exported on completing each measurement.

Page 27

3D View

Display Options used to configure the types of features shown and set their display parameters.
Color mapping allows a color gradient showing deviation to be displayed.
Stickers used to configure and display stickers.
Grids to display alignment grids.

Page 28

View to create and display views.


Predefined View to display standard views (Right, Top, etc.).
Zoom to recenter the view on a selected area.
Mouse mode enables the actions associated with mouse buttons to be set up by selecting a mode from
Default, Fixed Z axis, CimStation or CAD.
Rendering to configure object display in the 3D View (Solid, Wireframe, Colors, etc.).
Maximize/Restore View to display the 3D View full-page or restore it to its previous size.
Maximize or Restore Active Split View in split 3D View mode, allows the active sub-view to be maximized
or the split view to be restored.
Split opens the following sub-menu:
Split divides the graphic view into 4 parts, the split point is selected with the cursor.
Split Automatically splits the graphic view into 4 equal parts.
Split Vertically vertically divides the graphic view into 2 equal parts.
Split Horizontally horizontally divides the graphic view into 2 equal parts.
Delete Split switches the active sub-view to be the only view.
Apply Display Options to All Views allows, when the 3D View is split, to apply all modified
display options to the non-active sub-views (feature names, family color, etc.).
Manual Probing Assistance used to enable visual and/or audio assistance in finding the features to be
probed.
Detail Feature to create a detailed view of the current feature and display additional visual information.
Create BMP, WMF, Jpeg File to create a graphic file from the 3D View, this graphic can then be included in
a document.

Page 29

Windows

This menu is used to select the windows and toolbars to be displayed on screen. A window is selected when
the button symbol at the start of the line is depressed.
3D View this is the graphic view. It enables workpieces, measurements, probe movements, etc. to be
viewed.
Alignment view used to view CAD file alignment orientation, even if this is not displayed in the the 3D View
due to a zoom operation or the position of the workpiece.
DRO window showing current probe position or the results for the last feature measured.
Histogram allows distribution of feature measurements with respect to the required tolerances to be viewed.
Results shows the result or statistics for a feature and allows certain parameters to be modified.
Toolbar used to show or hide the Toolbar.
Create a New Toolbar allows different user-specific customized toolbars to be created.
Feature Bar used to show or hide the Feature Bar.
Status Bar used to show or hide the Status Bar.
DRO Settings used to configure DRO window display.
Show/Hide Windows used to select whether the DRO, Results and 3D View windows are to be displayed
or not.
Arrange Windows arranges open windows so that thay are all displayed in the software window.
Docking Parameter Preferences to configure window docking on the left or right and whether or not blank
bars are to be displayed.
Switch the 3D view from/to Metrolog XG (Silma XG) switches the 3D View between two window
positions stored in the software.

Page 30

Help

Index to access the content summary of the Online help.


Search to search the Online help by key-word.
Receive All Product Informations allows online registration (see Installation) to receive regular product
update information.
Report a Software Problem to send an e-mail message containing information on a problem encountered
to the Hotline.
About this Program to view software information: version, serial number, configuration, etc.

Page 31

Reference standards
The following reference standards are used by the software for calculation and tolerancing.
NF EN 20286-1 and ISO 286-1 /(December 93) /classification index: E 02-100-1: this standard describes the
tolerance and adjustment (limits and fits) system and gives the calculated values of the fundamental
tolerances and corresponding fundamental deviations.
NF EN 20286-2 and ISO 286-2 /(December 93) /classification index: E 02-100-2: this standard describes the
tolerance and adjustment (limits and fits) system for holes and shafts.
NF EN 22768-1 and ISO 2768-1 /(November 93) /classification index: E 02-350-1: This standard describes the
tolerance system for linear and angular dimensions without individual tolerance indications.
NF EN 22768-2 and ISO 2768-2 /(November 93) /classification index: E 02-350-2: This standard describes the
tolerance system for features without individual tolerance indications.
ISO 1101: This standard gives the principles for symbols and indications in technical drawings for tolerancing
of form, orientation, location and run-out and sets the required geometrical definitions.
ISO 5458: This standard completes standard ISO 1101 on location (positional) tolerancing.
ISO 2692: This standard completes standard ISO 1101 on the maximum material principle.
ISO 2692 amendment 1: This standard completes standard ISO 1101 on the minimum material principle.
NF ISO 1660 /(May 89)/classification index E 04-556: This standard covers dimensioning and tolerancing of
profiles.
DIN 16 901 /(1982): This standard deals with the tolerances and acceptance conditions of linear dimensions
for plastic moldings.
ASME Y14.5M (1994) : geometrical tolerancing american standard.

Page 32

Installing the software


- Open the Windows Explorer.
- Insert the software installation CD-ROM in the drive.
- Using the Windows Explorer, select the drive containing the CD-ROM.
- Start installation by selecting the file Setup.exe.
- Follow the instructions given by the InstallShield Wizard installation wizard
When the installation procedure is launched, the first window displayed allows installation language to be
selected:

- Select the desired language and click Next.


When the InstallShield installation wizard is ready, the software license agreement is displayed. It is
possible to print then using Print button :

Page 33

- To continue installation, you must accept terms of the license agreement, otherwise the Next button will
remain grayed out.
A window allowing the different operations that may be performed to be selected is then displayed:

The following different windows will then be displayed according to the operations selected:

Page 34

Install files

- In this window, specify the destination folder in which installation is to be performed. By default, installation
will be performed to the folder C:\Program Files\Metrologic Group\Metrolog XG.
- To modify this, click Browse and select a Windows folder from the window displayed.
- When the desired destination folder has been selected, click Next to continue installation.
- In the following window, select the different components to be installed. A detailed description of the
component to be installed may be obtained in the right part of the window by selecting the line (the line is
then highlighted) corresponding to the component to be installed.

Page 35

- Confirm your choices by clicking Next.

You are then asked to enter the software administrator name and password (if any). By default, the initial
user is assigned administrator status, thus granting him/her subsequent user management access. Once the
software has been installed, administrators may be added and/or passwords modified. Click Next to continue
installation.

Page 36

Enter licensing information (install license code)

Complete the different fields in the Identification window and click OK. The Security.exe window is then
displayed with the following message:

The information contained in this window cannot be modified. It simply allows the user to make sure that the
key (dongle) and license numbers are correct.

Page 37

Click OK. The following message is displayed:

Click OK to continue installation.

Installation then starts, a progress bar shows status:

Page 38

When installation is complete, the following window is displayed:

- If you choose to register to receive documentation, the following form must be completed:

Page 39

Installation is now complete. The software is ready to be used. For simpler access, shortcuts are
automatically created on the desktop and in the Windows Start menu.

Note: Installing a key code


At initial installation, the software protection key must be programmed. To do this, first install the driver so
that the software can access the key.
These drivers are available in the Drivers sub-directory of the software installation directory.
HASP key: The driver (hdd32.exe) is located in the directory HASP version 4.98. If the key was not detected
with this driver (-1 error at software startup), install the driver provided in the directory Hasp version 4.95.
RAINBOW key: The driver (SSD5411-32bit.exe) is located in the directory NT-Sentinel.
Select the Windows Start menu > Programs > Metrolog XG (or Silma XG) > Protection, click WebRead
to display the programming code, then click Program. The key is now programmed and ready for use with
the software.

Page 40

Updating an existing version


An existing version of the software may be updated. To do this, run installation:

Select the desired language and click Next.


The Wizard will detect any version of the software already installed on the workstation.
It then offers to update this version or to install the update in a different folder:

Page 41

If you choose to update the selected product, the following page offers several options:

If you select Modify, existing components may be added and/or removed and updated from this window:

Page 42

If Repair is selected, setup will update (reinstall) all files currently installed on the workstation. The update
(reinstall) process is shown by the progress bar displayed in the following window:

When the update is complete, the following window is displayed:

Page 43

For more information on the options available in this window, refer to the Installation and Setup Assistant
pages.
If Remove is selected, all currently installed components are removed.
Uninstallation process status is shown by the progress bar displayed in the following window:

Page 44

If you choose to install a new copy, the standard installation procedure is followed.

Page 45

Uninstalling the software


There are two possible methods of uninstalling the software:
- Run software installation, select product update, then select Remove.
The uninstallation process is shown by the following progress bar:

- In the Windows Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel > Add/Remove programs.
The following window is displayed:

Page 46

Click Modify/Remove, the InstallShield Wizard opens:

Page 47

To uninstall, click Remove.


Uninstallation process status is shown by the following progress bar:

Page 48

Launch options
Run a program from a command line
A program may be run from a DOS command line or a shortcut.
This function is available in Silma XG and in Metrolog XG. The software execution files are:

Metrolog XG -> MtXG.exe


Silma XG -> SilmaXG.exe

Convention: In the remainder of this explanation, the applications are named *XG.exe.
The syntax is as follows:

Installation directory\*XG.exe Program directory\Program_name.extension

If the program name includes spaces, the syntax is:

Installation directory\*XG.exe "Program directory\Program name.extension"

Program name may be:

an XG program: extension *.gm2


a DMIS program: extension *.dmi or *.dms

If the file extension is not recognized, the software starts in standard mode.
When the file specified in the command line does not exist, the following error is displayed in the software:

When the program is located in the same directory as the application, it is not necessary to specify the
name of the directory.

Example: The MtXG.exe software application and the demogeom.gm2 program are located in the
default installation directory:
The line inserted in the DOS command is:

Example: The SilmaXG.exe software application and the Demo_dmis.dmi program are located in two
different directories.
The line inserted in the shortcut is:

Page 49

Notes:

When the program is run, the following dialog boxes are not displayed:

- Execution start window


- Probe statistics window
- Window to save the constellation (set) of modified probes
- Window to save the modified working session
- Execution end window

When program execution is finished, the software closes. If an error occurred during execution, the
software remains open.

Page 50

Operator mode
Operator mode is a simplified software mode. By default, it contains the main software functions and is
partially configurable.
To access this mode, an administrator must have created an operator profile. The operator then accesses
this by logging on with the appropriate ID and password.

Note: There are two ways of configuring the operator interface.

Via the Preferences > Edit Users menu in the software.

See Edit Users.

Via the Setup Assistant

See Setup Assistant.

The user interface is shown below:

.
The functions linked with the F1 to F6 keys of the keyboard are fixed. The six actions determined by these
keys are:

Page 51

F1: This function allows the user interface to be exited. The following confirmation message is
displayed:

F2: Thus function allows reference marks to be taken.


F3: This function is used to load a probes file. The following window is displayed:

It is opened at the directory specified in the operator mode preferences.

F4: This function is used to automatically calibrate the probe.

Note: The probe may be calibrated manually. To do this, simply modify a parameter in the
XG_CONFIG.ini configuration file, located in the software installation directory.
In the [USER] section:
MODEOPERATEURCALIBAUTO=1: default value, the F4 key performs the automatic calibration command.
MODEOPERATEURCALIBAUTO=0: the F4 key first opens the probe activation window. Once the desired
probe has been activated, the manual calibration window is displayed. When the calibration is complete, the
operator interface is re-displayed.

F5: This function runs the active program. In the bottom part of the operator interface, the folder is
open at the directory specified in the operator mode preferences.

Double-click the desired program to run it.


After the program is interrupted, certain functions become available: Run, Run step by step, Start from and
Close in the program toolbar.

The Close command, represented by the

icon, returns the user to the operator interface.

F6: This function is used to change user. It is only accessible if the operator mode preferences were
selected via the menu Preferences > Edit Users and not from the Setup Assistant.

The functions of keys F7 to F12 on the keyboard may be configured in the operator mode preferences.

Customizing operator mode

Page 52

There are several parameters that may be modified to customize operator mode.

Modify the title

In the file XG_USER.ini, section [USER]:


MODEOPERATEURTITRE=title: allows a title (name) to be assigned to operator mode. The software logo is
then displayed in a smaller size on the left. The specified title must fit on one line.

Assign customized icons

a different icon may be assigned to each program. To do this, place a BMP type icon (preferably 32x32
pixels) with the same name as the desired program in the same directory as the program.

Example: Customizing the operator interface:

Title changed to Probes Calibration


The icon corresponding to the Demogeom.gm2 program has been changed.

Summary of the functions available in the menus when accessed in standard mode:
Menu 3D View > Predefined View > Right, Front, Top, Bottom, Back, Left, Iso.
Menu 3D View > Zoom > Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Full View, Zoom On Probe.

Page 53

Files to be saved to restore a


configuration
Given below is the list of files to be saved to restore a configuration known by the software.
File

Description

*.ini

Parameter files

MT23.dat

Compensation file

twin.mat

File: Twin alignment

getstyl.dat

File: Stylus changer

putstyl.dat

File: Stylus changer

refstyl.dat

File: Stylus changer

getprob.dat

File: Probe changer

putprob.dat

File: Probe changer

casier.dat

File: Slot changer

license.dat
material.dat
Usertol.dat

Flexlm local licence


Temperature coefficients
Customized tolerances

*.xte

Generic accessories

users.usr
*.cfg

User management
Machine configuration

Location
Installation directory
Installation directory /USERS/
LOCALDIR
Installation directory
LOCALDIR
Installation directory
LOCALDIR
Installation directory
LOCALDIR
Installation directory
LOCALDIR
Installation directory
LOCALDIR
Installation directory
LOCALDIR
Installation directory
LOCALDIR
Installation directory
LOCALDIR
Customized user directory
Installation directory
Installation directory
Installation directory /DATA/
(created by the user)
Installation directory
Installation directory

Page 54

Setup Assistant
When installation is complete, you are asked if you want to open the Setup Assistant. This may also be
accessed via the file MTXGcfg.exe in the software installation folder, or via the menu Start > Programs >
Metrolog XG > Setup Assistant.
The Setup Assistant allows you to set up the connection with the CMM, specify tools and peripheral devices,
select geometrical compensation mode, and select the graphic engine.

Password entry and configuration import

This window allows you to enter user name and password. This is required to view or modify the software
configuration.

Note: Only users having administrator privileges are allowed to modify the set-up parameters.
If the Read only mode box is checked, any user can view the set-up parameters but any modifications
made will not be saved.

enables several connections using Metrolog XG to be set up (e.g. for multi-tracker


operation).

Page 55

Notes:

If this box is checked when launching Metrolog, a window will appear, enabling the user to select the
connections he/she wishes to see available.
If a user no longer wishes to work in Multiple connections mode and unchecks the box, this will
cause the following message to be displayed:

An OK response will display the Setup assistant in the conventional manner.


When installing a new version of the software in a new folder, the configuration of a previous version may be
imported directly.
To do this, enter user name and password in the Setup Assistant in order to display the
button.
When this button is clicked, a Windows Explorer window allowing the installation folder for the previous
version of the software to be specified is displayed. All set-up parameters that can be modified in the Setup
Assistant are then copied from the old version to the new version. This means you do not need to go through
the Setup Assistant entering the settings manually. The settings may, however, be viewed or modified in the
following pages.

Choice of type of user interface and graphic engine

Page 56

This page is used to configure the type of interface that the user connected will have when using the software:
Standard interface: starts in user mode and gives access to all software features.
Operator interface: starts the software without user mode and gives restricted access that allows
calibration to performed and programs executed from selected files.
For more information on this window, see the explanation on operator mode preferences in Edit users.
This page is also used to select one of two graphic engines. Click one of the following two buttons to select
the DIRECTX or OpenGL graphic engine:

Multiple connections
If this box is checked, the following page will be displayed:

Page 57

By right-clicking the window, the connections desired by the user can be added in this
context menu.

Right-clicking an existing connection will display this context menu enabling the selected
connection to be renamed or deleted.

Once the various connections have been created, click Next to set up the selected connection.
Starting Metrolog with the Multiple connections mode active will display a specific window:

Page 58

by checking or unchecking the boxes, selects which connections will be accessible in


Metrolog once it has started.

selects the default connection to be used on start-up.


stops the choice of connection from being displayed when Metrolog
starts up. To restore it, Mterolog needs to be started up while holding down the

button.

confirms the window and starts Metrolog.

Hardware connection

Page 59

This window allows you to select the different hardware components of machine installation.
The first part is used to select the type of controller and type of link used for communication with the
controller.
The following part is used to select the type of head used and the type of link used to communicate with this
head. If the controller allows, communication with a console may be selected.
See CMM Detector.

If this box is unchecked (deselected), default operation is enabled, i.e. The software
will only require scales to be reset at CNC startup if necessary (for example at initial CMM startup).
If this box is checked (selected), the software will obligatorily require the scales to be reset at each startup,
whatever the configuration.
When this box is checked, Off-line mode is enabled but the communication parameter
settings are not lost.
When this box is checked, it is possible to add an optical sensor.
is displayed when the CMM selected is:

Leica laser tracker


Laser API III
Laser API via driver DI
Laser FARO

Page 60

It is used to enable the workpiece temperature sensor.

Connection to an optical sensor

Select the optical sensor type in the drop-down list.


Then, select the TCPIP Address, the Port number and the calibration file location according to the sensor
type selected.

Connection to another computer

Page 61

This window is used to configure a connection (Twin or Perceval) with another computer.

CMM and measuring head axis orientation

Page 62

This window is used to select the CMM and head orientation axes.

Controller properties

Page 63

It is possible to chose to display a warning message before the head starts moving.
The tool and stylus changer settings are available from this window.
The other options available in this window are enabled only when the measurement system selected allows:
- The following temperature sensor for parts to be configured:

B3CLC and Leitz


LK Driver 4.2
Mitutoyo direct
Zeiss C98
Zeiss C99
Zeiss C98 UDP HSS
Generic CMM

- The following rotary table to be managed:

B3CLC and Leitz


Tutor
SIP
Wenzel WPC2010
Zeiss C98
Zeiss C99
Zeiss C98 UDP HSS
Generic CMM

To access the options for the temperature compensation via the unit, check the last option of this window.

Page 64

External temperature compensation via box

This window is used to set the temperature acquisition unit and specify the temperature compensation of the
workpiece.
It is possible to add, change or delete sensors in the list from the list context menu.

Compensation settings

Page 65

This window is used to select the type of compensation applied on the CMM.

Notes:

Graphical engine choice

The graphical engine choice depends on the PC's hardware configuration (such as the graphics card) and on
the CAD models that have to be processed by the software. To determine the most suitable processor to
use:
- Choose one of the two graphical engines from the setup assistant.
- Run the software.
- Open a typical CAD file that you would usually use.
- Select the rendering display mode generally used (solid or wireframe).
- Hold down the keys
+
simultaneously and click on zoom
in the 3D View
toolbar. The workpiece will begin to revolve on the screen.
- As the workpiece stop revolving, the software displays the selected graphical engine refresh per second:

Page 66

- Repeat this procedure with the second graphical engine without changing the 3D View size.
- Compare the results and choose the graphical engine that gives the best results (DirectX in the example
above).

Features name are always displayed in white in teh 3DView when using DirectX graphical engine,
eventhought it is modified.

In Multiple connections mode, the


to the connection identification window.

button is replaced by

which reverts

Page 67

Multiplex
Using the Setup Assistant, the Multiplex function allowing several machines to be simultaneously controlled
via a TCP-IP connection may be configured in the software.
To do this, configure the stations in Twin mode with TCP-IP connection, select one station to act as the
Localhost on which Twinserver.exe will be run, the other stations being connected to the Twinserver.

Note: During configuration in Twin mode (two machines only), the following procedure must be followed
(for stations 1 and 2 only).

Example:
Localhost on station 1

Station 2 connected to the Twinserver on station 1

Station 3 connected to the Twinserver on station 1

Start Twinserver.exe on the Localhost station, then start the software on all the other stations.
The following message is then displayed:

Page 68

This message shows the number of stations connected to the Twinserver and thus the number of Multiplex
stations (three in this example).

On each of the stations connected to the multiplex connection, an additional drop-down list is displayed in
the Toolbar:

Add the names of the CNCs of all the stations that may receive items in this list on the different stations that
are to transmit data:

The CNC selected from the drop-down list will be the CMM to which the data from this station will be sent.

A CNC name must have been previously assigned to each of the stations that is to receive data via the menu
CMM > Set-up CNC Parameters :

Page 69

In program: An additional line is displayed for the station to which the features are sent:

In a DMIS program, the names of the machines entered in the CNC Settings window are the names that will
be used for the CRSLCT/CR() command. This is used to define the machine on which the program will be run.

Page 70

Using CMM Detector


This function allows automatic CMM detection to be performed. It is accessed via the Setup Assistant:

Click the
button. The window displayed allows automatic CMM detection to be performed on the
different computer ports:

used to perform automatic detection with the default detection parameters.


used to exit CMM Detector without saving the parameters detected.

Page 71

used to preset the type of CMM connected to the computer. The following window is displayed:

Click

to preset the CMM-computer connection parameters. The following window is displayed:

Page 72

Once the parameters have been selected, click this button to close the window and save the
communication parameters.
Click this button to cancel any changes made and close the window.
On return to the main window, the
button is no longer grayed out and allows the CMM to be
detected while taking the preset parameters into account.
When the CMM is detected, the
button is no longer grayed out. This button allows the
parameters of the connection with the CMM to be saved and CMM Detector to be closed.

Notes: CMM Detector does not detect the type of head installed on the CMM or the console. These
must be defined in the Setup Assistant.

Page 73

Environment variables in Metrolog XG


and Silma XG

There are two types of environment variables in Metrolog XG and Silma XG:

System environment variables


User environment variables

Page 74

System environment variable


Creation and modification of the variables
Open the System Properties windows (Right click on My computer > Properties), then click on the tab :
Advanced:

Click on this button to open the modification window:

Page 75

Click on this button to add a new variable, then enter its name and file's path in the variable
value box:

Click on this button to modify a variable, then change its name and file's path.

Click on this button to apply all the modification.

Page 76

User environment variable


Variables for all .Ini files
The following variables can be configured by the user.

Note: All along this documentation the parameter MT2 is used, if you use SILMA XG in stead of
Metrolog XG just replace this parameter with a new one : SILMA (i.e : MT2_LOCALDIR becomes
MT2_SILMADIR when using Silma XG). If you use Metrolog XG and Silma XG on the same computer both
parameters could be used without any problems.

Three environment variables are available to change the files localisation:


MT2_LOCALDIR : specify all the .ini files and Casier.dat, getstyl.dat, putstyl.dat, getprob.dat, putprob.dat,
Refstyl.dat file s path if both following variables are not defined.
MT2_USERDIR : specify the users .ini file s path (user.ini, userUI.ini, metropass.ini and metropassUI.ini).
MT2_CFGDIR : specify the configuration file s path.ini : XG_CONFIG.ini, XG_DME.ini, MT23.dat,Casier.dat,
getstyl.dat, putstyl.dat, getprob.dat, putprob.dat, Material.dat, Twin.dat, ME532.cfg, Sharpe.ini, Cosdat1.bin.
If these files are not in this specific folder Metrolog XG will try to find it in the main folder.

The following files are not concerned by the environment variables, they have always to be in the Metrolog XG
installation folder : user.usr, usertol.dat, getstyl.dat, putstyl.dat, getprob.dat, putprob.dat.

Rules of Priorities :
MT2_USERDIR and MT2_CFGDIR have the priorities on MT2_LOCALDIR.

If only MT2_LOCALDIR is specified :

XG_CONFIG and XG_DME will be written directly in the MT2_LOCALDIR folder. The Users .ini will be located
in MT2_LOCALDIR\USERS\.

If MT2_LOCALDIR and MT2_USERDIR are specified :

XG_CONFIG and XG_DME will be written directly in the MT2_LOCALDIR folder. The .ini will be located in
MT2_USERDIR.

If MT2_LOCALDIR and MT2_CFGDIR are specified :

XG_CONFIG and XG_DME will be written directly in the MT2_CFGDIR folder. The configuration .ini will be
located in MT2_LOCALDIR\USERS\.

If the three are specified :

XG_CONFIG and XG_DME will be written directly in the MT2_CFGDIR folder. The Users .ini will be located in
MT2_USERDIR.

If no variable is specified

XG_CONFIG and XG_DME will be written directly in the Metrolog XG installation folder. The Users .ini will be
located in the same folder than the mt2xg.exe file \USERS\ .

Page 77

General variables

MT2_Macro

This variable defines the program file s path called when you try to import a working session from
xx.txt,.Prd,.Fra files. Metrolog XG will load, if necessary, some predefine program from the specific folder
of the environment variable.

MT2_Temp

This variable defines the automatic backup file s path if no file s path is specified these files : $$AUTO.elt,
$$AUTO.plp, $$AUTO.rep, $$AUTO.vue, $$AUTO.wif, $$AUTO.wk2 will be written in the Metrologic
installation folder. This variable defines the files path for the CAD temp too. If the CAD is opened from a
server, and that in the XG_config.ini the line : use_cache=1 is added in the [systeme] part, Metrolog XG will
create a subdirectory called \CACHE in the directory specified by the variable.

MT2_Usertype

- If this variable value is : OP the operator level is activated.


- If this variable value is : PGM the conceptor level is activated.
- If this value is not defined the classic mode is activated.
In order to take into account this parameter, it is necessary to edit the XG_CONFIG.INI file and to modify it as
bellow:
- Open XG_CONFIG.INI.
- In the section [SYSTEME].
- Add the following line Os_User=1.
- Close and save.
- Restart Metrolog XG.
If the MT2_Usertype operator variable is equal to OP, Metrolog XG starts on operator mode. If it is equal to
PGM, Metrolog XG starts on programmer mode. And then, if it doesn't exist, Metrolog XG starts on standard
mode.

SILMA_Datadir

This variable defines the file s path of the DATA folder, used with Silma XG, if no file s path is specified these
files will be called from the subdirectory \DATA\ in the Silma XG installation folder.

Note: For Debug mode, a path is defined in the XG_CONFIG ini file, SYSTEM section: DEBUG_PATH
= C:\TEMP.
To modify this path, an environment variable named DEBUG_PATH may be created and the desired path
assigned to it. When this environment variable exists, the debug file uses the specified path and not the path
defined in the ini file.

Page 78

Menus

Page 79

File
A working session contains all the information about the aspects of the control performed: nominal data,
probing points, associating elements to families, creating view and labelling angles, etc... Thus, a working
session in the software format (*.wk2) is linked to 5 or 7 other files, the extensions of which are listed below:
In control mode, 5 files are created:
*.wk2
*.elt
*.rep
*.vue
*.wif

Saving work; contains the path of the CAD


Database of elements used while carrying out the work
List and parameters of alignments used while carrying out the work
List of views (orientation, associated labels)
Informations on traceability contained in "Edit information"

In statistics mode, an additional 2 files are added:


*.xst

Index of the different statistical controls

*.sta

Saving of statistical controls

Page 80

New working session


This function of the File menu allows you to start a new working session. All user features, alignments and
views will then be eliminated and the CAD files will be closed. The current probe file remains active and the
machine settings remain unchanged.
However, the program will detect whether the working session has been modified since it was last saved
(additional features or less features, etc...) and a dialogue box will appear to allow you to save your current
working session.

allows you to archive the working session for a statistical control at a later stage.
Click on this button, so that the changes of the working session previously opened will be saved
in this working session. If the working session has not been saved before, the Save a Working Session
window will appear.
By clicking on this button, your changes will be lost and a new working session will become
available.
When clicking on this button, the New working session will be cancelled.

In program: This function can be learned in a program.


The following line appears:

Page 81

Open, Open previous


This function allows you to open an existing working session previously saved with the Save As function.
The following window will appear:

When the working session is open, the current alignment from your last saving of this working session will
then be activated.
If the work contains surface features and the CAD file of the controlled item is not in the same folder as that
of the working session, or if the working session has not been saved with the CAD file open, the following
message will appear:

Page 82

By clicking on this button, you can open the necessary CAD file. You are then well advised to
save your working session again. The CAD file will then be associated to the working session.
By clicking on this button, the working session will be open, but you can make no changes to
any surface points, since the CAD file is not open.

Note: Associativity
When a feature of a working session has been associated to a CAD and that CAD has then been modified,
the following message will appear when re-opening the working session:

Click on this button, so that the definitions of the relevant feature(s) will be updated
according to the changes to the CAD file.
Click on this button to preserve the definitions of the features before any changes of the
CAD file.

Click on this button to open the working session file selected.


Click on this button to quit the window, without modifications taken into account.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 83

Save, Save as
These functions allow you to save the current working session. Features, views and associated alignments
are captured when the document is saved and the paths of the CAD files used are memorised.

Save
This function is accessible:
- via the File menu
-

via the toolbar, by clicking on this button.

The function Save allows you to save the current working session by allocating a name and a folder to it if
the work is saved for the first time or to save the changes made in this file.
The 'Save a Working Session' window looks like this:

Select the folder to which the working session should be saved and choose a filename. The file will be a
*.wk2-file.

Page 84

Save as
The function Save as allows you to save the current working session under another name.
Then the Save window will pop up as above, allowing you to modify the name and the path of the current file.

Note: When saving a work session, if the CAD files are found either in the same directory or in a
sub-directory of the work session, the paths of these files are saved as relative paths. When a work session
is re-opened, the CAD files are automatically loaded, and the relative paths automatically converted into
absolute paths.
This mode of operation can be disabled from the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, Config tab,
section CAD_FILE:
RELATIVE_PATH=1; the paths are saved as relative paths, under the conditions specified above.
RELATIVE_PATH=0; the paths are saved as absolute paths, under the conditions specified above.

Click on this button to save the working session.


Click on this button to quit the window, without saving the current working session.

In program: This function can be learned in a program.


The following line appears:

Page 85

Delete
This function allows you to delete a working session that you have previously saved as well as all the files
related to that session.
The following window will appear:

Select the file that should be deleted from the list.


Click on this button to delete the selected file.
Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.

Page 86

Importing files
This function allows you to convert a file into the software format.
These are normally text files created in measuring software, digitizing, CAD or optical systems.

In program:
Certain imports can be learned in a program. Each import matches with a different line of program:

For more information on an error occurring during program execution, see Error management.

Note: It is possible to force the normal on the X-axis of the geometric points if the normal is null. To do
this, it is required to enable the following parameter in the CPREFERPARAM section of the USER tab, in
Tools > Advanced parameters: FORCENORMALZIFNULL.
A summary of the different formats available with the features of each of them is given in the table below.
Import format
PNT

Actual values
Geometrical points and surface
points

PRD
OVE
SOL
CSV
INS
DMO
DES, DAT, OUT,
SET
Point files: TXT,
ASC, XYZ

Nominal values
-

Specific to Renault
Geometrical points

Geometrical points
Specific to BMW

All features
Specific to Skoda

All features
Geometrical points and surface
points
Geometrical points and surface
points

All features
-

Page 87

Import from PNT file format (*.pnt)

This function allows you to convert a PNT points file into the software format.
This type of file is generally created by measuring software, digitising or C.A.D. tools. These are text files
which may contain several groups of points.
*.pnt-files containing points are presented as follows:

In the File menu click on Import. The following window will appear:

Page 88

In the "Types of files" line choose *.pnt-format and select the .pnt-file to be imported.
The following window will appear:

Page 89

This window allows you to select those points which should be imported. These points can be converted into
geometrical points or surface points. Their conversion into surface points is only possible if a CAD file is
open.
At conversion to geometrical points, the information on ball diameter and the probing retraction coordinates
are not used. Only the point ball center coordinates are imported. Hence, the defined part of the point is not
created.

Example: The following file is imported:

Conversion is performed into geometrical points, so only the part shown in a red box is used to create point
PNT1:

If the selected points are to be converted to surface points, the projection feature can be specified from
among all the surface point types available in the software:

A material thickness can be specified for each type of surface point.

and/or an offset

Page 90

or a gap

or an angle

or a radius

allows you to rename the points before importing them.


You can then rename the points either one by one:

or to rename a selection of points.

Page 91

allows you to access the Tolerancing Selection window of the points to be imported. The tick boxes
indicate which component of the feature should be toleranced and, if applicable, the tolerance value:

allows you to select the alignment in which the conversion is to be made. The default
alignment is the alignment which is active in the working session.

allows you to specify, if necessary, the name of the family in which the conversion is to
be made. The default family is that of the feature which is active in the working session if that session is not
empty.

Page 92

allows you to change the path of the file without having to teach the program line in again when
importing a *.pnt-file into a program.

Once the selection has been made and the parameters have been set, click on this button
and the points will appear in the working session.

allows you to close the window. The file will not be imported.

Page 93

Import from Text format (*.txt ; *.prd ; *.fra)

Text-files in *.prd-format, which have a particular syntax, have been specifically developed for Renault.
Importing *.prd-files enables you to generate a program with a specific structure quickly.

Page 94

Import from BMWMess format (*.sol)

This text-file format, which contains a particular syntax, has been developed for BMW.
Importing in this format is done in conjunction with another BMW-specific software tool.

Page 95

Import from CSV (*.csv) and INS (*.ins) formats

In the file File menu click on Import. The following window will pop up:

Choose *.csv or *.ins format in the "Files of type" line and select the file you wish to import.
Once imported, these features are defined and can be used directly in the software.
The list of imported features appears in the database, with the names of those contained in the file.

Import CSV
This format allows you to import the names of features as well as their characteristics into an editable file via
Excel.
Here is an example of a file in CSV-format:

Page 96

Import INS
This text-file format, which contains a particular syntax, has been developed by SKODA.
This format allows you to import goemetrical points to measure and distances to evaluate, with comments
and tolerances associated.
Here is an example of a file in INS-format:

Page 97

In program: It is also possible to define all the features of these files directly in a program.
To do this, you only need to open a new software program. All the features of the working session will
automatically be there:

Page 98

Page 99

Import from DMIS format ( *.dmo)

This fonction enables users to convert a DMO file into a software file.
This conversion can handle most of the DMIS 4 instructions.
The picture below shows a typical *.dmo file:

In the File menu, click on Import. The following window pops up:

Page 100

Choose *.dmo extension for the file type, and select the *.dmo file to import.
Click on Open, and then features from the DMO file are converted into the software format.
These features are then recorded in the Feature database.

Page 101

Page 102

Import from DAT, DES, SET and OUT format

The purpose of this function is to allow a set of points in *.dat, *.des, *.set or *.out format to be imported.
These file types are in a document format that can be edited in Notepad. They contain the name of the point
features and their characteristics (X,Y,Z coordinates).
Example of a file that can be imported :

Such imports allow geometrical and surface points to be defined.


This function is accessed via the menu File > Import. Select the file to be imported and file format in the
following window :

Page 103

Once the file has been selected, the following window is displayed :

The following information must be entered in this window :

used to enter the ball diameter of the probe used to measure the imported points. This
diameter will be used for the compensation calculation. The drop-down menu is used to retrieve a previously
entered ball diameter.
to enable use of material orientation for compensation calculation.

Page 104

this section is used to enter reference point coordinates.


This point will allow a pseudo probing vector to be created, enabling compensation to be calculated with the
desired orientation.
used to reverse the orientation of the vector created between the reference point and the imported
point. This reversal will change compensation orientation.

Note: If the
case is not checked (selected), the items allowing
compensation to be configured will be grayed out (shaded).

This button is used to cancel all changes and to cancel file import.
When all the settings have been entered, click

. The PNT import window is displayed :

Page 105

Page 106

Import from point files (*.txt, *.asc, *.xyz)

This function is used to convert a point file *.txt, *.asc or *.xyz in the software format.
The *.txt files containing the points are as follows:
Coordinates in XYZ

Name of the point

IJK normal

Four different formats can be detected and imported as follows:

XYZ: each point is assigned a name by default (1, 2, 3, ...) and a normal of coordinates I=0, J=0 and
K=1.
XYZ IJK: each point is assigned a name by default (1, 2, 3, ...).
Name XYZ: each point is assigned a normal of coordinates I=0, J=0, K=1.
Name XYZ IJK: all data is entered (see example above).

The separator may be a space, a comma, a semilcolon or a tab.


In the File menu click on Import. The following window will appear:

Page 107

In the "Types of files" line choose *.txt, *.asc, *.xyz format and select the .pnt-file to be imported.
The following window will appear:

Page 108

This window allows you to select those points which should be imported. See Importing PNT files (*.pnt) for
the description of this window.

Page 109

Export
This function allows you to export printable features from the current working session to formats that can be
used in different software programs.
The following window will appear:

The Format field allows you to select the preferred export format from the pull-down list.

For further details, please refer to the section describing the different formats.

allows you to enter the path and the name of the file to
be exported.

allows you to choose from the tree structure the folder in which the file you want to export should be

Page 110

saved.

allows you to add a comment at the beginning of the


file.
This header can be anything: either a simple comment or the name of a variable entered in the Edit
information window accessed from the File menu.
In this case, the variable must be written as follows: $?variable?, in order to obtain the value allocated to the
variable in the header. In the example, it should be $?PART? in order to get 25A135 in the header of the
exported file:

In addition, there are special commands which allow you:


$D to indicate the current date
$T to indicate the current time

Note: It is possible to prevent the $$ characters at the start of the header lines in the export file from
being displayed. To do this, add the syntax $> in front of the comment or the variable called in the Header
field of the export file. For example, if the comment $>$?PART? is entered in the header, the header of the
export file will be 25A135 instead of $$ 25A135.

Once the work in the file has been exported, you can automatically run an external program. This function is
generally used for reprocessing the exported file and for transferring it to an external system for statistical
analysis.
The name of the program must be entered in this field:

Page 111

If parameters for running the program are required, these should be indicated in this field:
.

used to export only printable features.


used to display advanced export configuration. The export window is then as
shown below:

This mode allows the features to be exported to be selected, whether they are printable or not.
Used to remove a feature from the list of features to be exported.
Used to open the Feature Database to select the features to be exported.
Allows the selected features to be moved to obtain a specific export order (sequence).

Page 112

Opens the Properties window for the selected features and enables the dimension to be exported to be
chosen:

The only results that can be exported are: DIM1, DIM2, E.F., X (XoY), Y (YoZ), Z (ZoX). The other fields in this
window are grayed out.
Used to modify the expression alignment. The name of the expression alignment then appears in the
list of features, in the proper column.
Restores the original properties of the selected features.

Note: The elements whose properties have been changed are shown in blue on the list of features in
the Export results window. The color will revert to black if feature properties have been restored.

Click on this button to export the file.


Click on this button to close the window. The file will not be exported.

Notes:

You can also set the settings of the export path of the file with the function Edit information in the
File menu. .

To do this, you must specify a variable, such as " EXPORT = c:\temp\fichier.txt " in the User Data field.
When exporting the work, right-click in the Filename field.
Then the following menu will pop up:

Page 113

Choose from the list of variables that which corresponds to the name of the file to be exported and to its path.

If several similar working sessions are exported, the filename of the exported file can be
automatically incremented, e.g.: file1.txt, file2.txt, etc...

This is possible, because the $ sign can be added at the end of the filename when entering it in the
Filename field.
You only need to put: c:\temp\fichier$.txt.
Thus, when exporting the first working session, the file " file1.txt " will be created. When exporting the second
working session, the file " file2.txt " will be created etc.
If one $ sign is used, the count will automatically run from 1 to 9.
If two $ signs are used, the count will automatically run from 1 to 99 etc. etc

To use an automatic incrementing mode, you must edit the file XG_USER.ini (containing the set-up
parameters for the software), which is located in the installation folder of the software.

Add the following lines which do not exist by default:


[EXPORT]
Mode=0 or Mode= 1
The 2 incrementing modes for exporting files work as follows:
Mode=0
If a file (for instance TEST1.TXT) is deleted, it will automatically be replaced when the next file is exported.
The next file of the type TEST$ which is exported will thus be called TEST1.TXT again.
Mode=1
If a file (for instance TEST1.TXT) is deleted, the deleted file will not be replaced. The numbering of the files will
continue to increase after the last file that has been created. Hence, the next file of the type TEST$ which is
exported will then be called TEST2.TXT.

The table below shows a summary of the various export formats available with the characteristics of
each one.

Export format

Measured values

Nominal values

ASCII

All features

All features

All features except


Text/Value
All features with a
center.
All features

All features except


Text/Value

DMIS
IGES
IGES GEOM
VDAFS

Comments

No feature
No feature

Geometrical points and


No feature
surface points

Page 114

PNT

All features with a


center.

No feature

QUARTZ

All features

All features

FI Measurement

Specific to Renault

FI Measurement
V2

Specific to Renault

QUANTUM

Specific to PSA

Demerite Pareto

Specific to PSA, it exports out-of-tolerance features

HTML

All features

Probing

All features except


Text/Value and
Tolerances

No feature

Probing
deviations

All features

No feature

ASCII [CAD POS] No feature


Mess

All features

All features except


Text/Value

All features

All features

Excel

All features

All features

MM3

All features

ASCII Leica
Howmet
TSV

The diameter of the


probe enables the
software to compensate
features on being
imported.
Numeric values of
tolerances are not
exported, just their
types, the same applies
to Text/Value and
Alignment information.
Probe diameter is
exported.
Used by John Deere

Specific to BMW

DML

QSTAT

The diameter of the


probe enables the
software to compensate
features on being
imported.
Used for imports in the
Quartz software

Alignments are exported

Enables a customized
header to be used
Values measured and
defined in accordance
All features
All features
with the chosen option
are exported in 1 or 2
files
Geometrical points and Geometrical points and Exports weather station
surface points
surface points
information
Deviation of the first
No feature
No feature
value of features only
All features

Specific to Nissan

The current export unit may be changed with the advanced parameter m_bExpImpInCurrentUnit.
M_BEXPIMPINCURRENTUNIT = 0; the unit is the millimeter regardless of the current unit.
M_BEXPIMPINCURRENTUNIT = 1; the current unit is used.
The exports not concerned by this parameter are: HOWMET, IGES (geometry), VDAFS, MM3, Demerite
Pareto.

Page 115

Note: During exports to ASCII or Howmet format, for example during export of values, the number of
decimal points in numbers without units can be modified. For this purpose, modify a parameter in the menu
Preferences > Advanced Parameters, section CPREFERPARAM:
M_SZFORMNOUNIT = 0,000000; 6 figures after the decimal point (default value)

Gimmick: DOS commands can be used to concatenate several text type export files.
The batch syntax to be used is as follows: type chemin_fichier__exporter >> chemin_fichier_concatnation.
For example, to convert the ASC.txt ASCII format export files into a CONCAT.txt file, create the following
batch:

Then fill in the export window as follows:

In program:

Page 116

All of the following exports can be learned in a program. A different program line will be corresponding to each
item that has been exported:

Page 117

Export to ASCII format

This format is proposed to save the results of a measuring session and their comments in a format which can
be read with a spreadsheet (with the ";" used as a separator).
This type of format exports the nominal and measured values of all the database features.
Here is an example of a file in ASCII-format:

Page 118

Export to DMIS format

This format allows to export data from all the nominal and/or measured features, except for Text / value and
Alignment info features.
An example of a file in DMIS format is show below:

Page 119

Export to IGES format

This format allows you to export measured X, Y, Z data of all features that can be classed as points
(geometrical point, circle, arc, sphere, surface point, rectangle, slot, hexagone, ellipse) and sections.
If there are families within the working session, groups of the same name will be created when the working
session is exported.
Here is an example of a file in IGES format:

Page 120

Export to IGES (geometry) format

This format allows you to export the geometry of features as IGES geometrical entities. 2D features are
exported as curves and 3D features as surface.
Here is an example of a file in IGES (geometry) format:

Page 121

Export to VDAFS format

This format allows you to export X,Y, Z data as well as values of the normal of measured features, such as
geometrical points and surface points.
Here is an example of a file in VDAFS format:

Page 122

Export to PNT format

This format allows you to export measured X, Y, Z data of all features that can be classed as points
(geometrical point, circle, arc, sphere, surface point, rectangle, slot, hexagon, ellipse).
Here is an example of a file in PNT format:

The first number, in example no. "10", indicates the number of exported features.
The second number, in this case "0.000", indicates the diameter of the ball used for the measurement of
exported features.
Finally, each feature is defined by two lines, the first one corresponding to the measured value of the feature,
while the second one enables the software to apply the necessary compensation when importing this type of
file.

Page 123

Export to QUARTZ format

This format is used for the reprocessing of data via the QUARTZ statistics software.
It allows you to export nominal and/or measured valued from all database features.
Here is an example of a file in QUARTZ format:

Page 124

Export to FI Mesure / FI Mesure V2 format

This format, which has been developed for Renault, is a text-file format with a specific syntax.
Exporting in this format is done in conjunction with additional Renault software tools.

Page 125

Export to QUANTUM format

This format is used by P.S.A for its statistics software.


This is a text-file format which has a particular syntax containing measured values, without denominating the
features.

Page 126

Export to Demerite Pareto format

This format, which has been specifically developed for P.S.A., can only be used for exporting features outside
tolerance.
A "note" in the form as an asterisk will be allocated according to the extent of the deviation measured.

Page 127

Export to HTML format

This format allows you to export the values of all database features as well as graphic views that have been
saved.
The HTML-pages thus obtained can be opened with Internet Explorer (V4.0 or higher).

This field allows you to go directly to the results of your chosen features:

This field allows you to display your chosen view:

Page 128

Page 129

Export to Probings format

This format allows you to export from all measured elements, except for Text / value and Alignment info
features.
Here is an example of a file in Probings format:

The first number under "Raw", in this case "6", indicates the number of probing points for the feature placed
underneath it.
The second number, in this case "2.990", indicates the diameter of the ball used during measuring.
Finally, each point is defined by two lines, the first of which corresponds to the measured value of the feature,
while the second allows the software to apply the necessary compensation while importing this type of file.

Page 130

Export to Probe Deviation format

This format allows you to export probing points from all database features. It also shows the constructions
and tolerances.

Warning: For features such as tolerances only one comment line is created, indicating, for instance,
that a flatness on a diagram is required. There are no numerical values. The same goes for Text/value or
Alignment info features.

Here is an example of a file in Probe Deviation format:

These lines for defining probing points are expressed as follows:


2

2.990

number
ball
of probing
diameter
points

-5.828

-0.002

-77.412

0.998

-0.065

0.000

0.001
Deviation
from the
calculate
d feature

Page 131

Export to ASCII [CAD POS] format

This file format, which has been specifically developed for John Deere, allows to associate stickers on the
features when imported into the company's software.
Only specified features are exported, except for Text / value features.

Page 132

Export to BMW Mess format

This text-file format, which has a particular syntax, has been developed for BMW.
Exporting in this format is done in conjunction with another software program only used by BMW.

Page 133

Export to DML format

The DML format is a standard format for structured data exchange, based on XML format.
This format allows you to export:
- nominal values, measured values, deviations and tolerances of features,
- geometrical tolerances,
- alignments.
Here is an example of a file in DML format:

Page 134

Export to EXCEL format

This format allows you to export the entire results of nominal and/or measured features from a document in
Excel via a macro.
This Excel macro, which can be edited, allows you to reformat the exported data.

Stage 1: Installing the Excel export module.

Install XgOfficeSetup.msi which can be found in the folder ..\XgOffice from the software installation CD.

Double-click on this file to launch the installation.


The following window will appear:

Click on Next.

Page 135

Select installation folder and specify user, then click on Next.

Click on Close.

Page 136

Stage 2: Setting the parameters for the Excel export module

Open the file XlStarter.ini which can be found in the software installation folder.
- Specify the path of the Excel file which contains the macro to be used for exporting, using XlsPattern
parameters.
- Specify the name of the macro which will be used for exporting, using MacroName parameters.

Stage 3: Using the Excel export module

Using the Excel export module File > Export menu.


- Select the Excel export format.
- Specify path and destination filename.
Click on Export.

Here is an example of a file in Excel format:

Page 137

Page 138

Export to MM3 format

File export in *.MM3 format allows a file to be created using a special header, created according to user
needs.
To do this, a parameter in the XG_USER.ini file must be modified. This parameter is used to inform the
software which header file to be used:
[CEXEEXPORTERTRAVAIL]
M_SMM3NOMFICHIERENTETE=C:\Header.txt

Example: header file used for export in *.MM3 format:

There is no specific formal format to be used when creating the header file, except that system variables
must be enclosed in { and } brackets.
At export, the header file will be inserted "as is" in the file created. Only the system variables will be replaced
with their values.
There are two specific variables for this type of export. The JOBDATE and JOBTIME variables are
automatically completed and allow the date and time of the export to be shown in the header. When
exporting, the user is requested to enter the other variables in the following window :

The MM3 file created has the following format :

Page 139

Note: Comments may be exported using the Text/Value features. To do this, define a printable
Text/Value feature of None Action type with a first result line that is not printable.

Page 140

Export to QStat format

A software work session file can be exported in QStat software format (*.DFQ).
To do this, select Qstat export format in the following file export window:

Two parameters allow the Qstat export procedure to be configured. In the XG_USER.ini file, in the
[Dmo2Qstat] section, configure the following settings (the default setting is 1):

OneFileOut: if set to 0, a *.DFX file containing the measured values and a *.DFD file containing the
nominal values will be created. If set to 1, a single *.DFQ file containing both the nominal and the
measured information will be created.
CreateLogFile: if set to 1, a *.LOG file containing a report on execution of the Qstat export will be
created.

Notes: This type of export can be performed via the following DMIS command:
CALL/EXTERN,SYS,'C:\Metrologic Group\Metrolog
XG\dmo2qstat.exe',ATTACH,'C:\EXAMPLE.DMO','C:\EXAMPLE','0','C:\EXAMPLE.LOG'
Description of the syntax used:

C:\Metrologic Group\Metrolog XG\dmo2qstat.exe: specifies the access path to be used for


conversion.
ATTACH: allows export of the *.DMO file created by the DMIS program at the end of program
execution.
C:\EXAMPLE.DMO: specifies the *.DMO file to be exported.
C:\EXAMPLE: shows the name of the file(s) to be created.
0 or 1: if set to 0, a *.DFX file containing the measured values and a *.DFD file containing the nominal
values will be created. If set to 1, a single *.DFQ file containing both the nominal and the measured
information will be created.

Page 141

C:\EXAMPLE.LOG: specifies whether or not an export *.LOG file is to be created. If this parameter is
not entered, a *.LOG file will not be created.

Page 142

Export in Leica ASCII format

This format is offered to save the results and comments for a measurement session in a format that can be
read in a spreadsheet program (the separator is the ";" character).
This type of format is used to export the defined and measured (nominal and actual) values of geometrical
points and surface points. The values exported are:
- The defined and measured (nominal and actual) values of the point
- The nominal and actual values of the normal
- Family name
- Tolerances
- ID of the reflector used for the measurement
- RMS
- Temperature
- Pressure
- Humidity
- The date and time the points were selected
An example of a file in Leica ASCII format is show below:

Page 143

Howmet Export

This format is used to export deviation and tolerances of the first value (or dimension) of all printable features.
This is an example of a file in Howmet format, where the ND of the surface points is being exported:

Certain variables require to be present in order to perform this export:


The following variables are to be included in the working session information, which can be accessed
from Working Session > Edit Information:
- HOWMET_SERIAL is to contain a maximum of 14 characters.
- HOWMET_OF is to contain a maximum of 8 characters.
- HOWMET_NO_ACTIVITE is to contain a maximum of 14 characters.

Note: The "." and "_" characters may be used in the HOWMET_SERIAL variable.
The following variable is to be included in the program information, which can be accessed from
Program > Edit Information:
HOWMET_GROUP is to take the following form:
- 1 letter
- 5 alphanumeric characters
- 1 space or alphanumeric type character
- 3 alphanumeric characters

Page 144

Export in TSV format

Files in *.tsv format have a special syntax, developed for the Nissan company.

Page 145

Data Import Wizard

This function is used to create specific import formats to match user file formats.
The formats thus created can be used in the same way as any other existing default software format.

Page 146

Define new format

A new data import format is defined from an example file in which a certain number of rules must be
described - that will be used when this format is imported.
The import rules are defined in three steps:
- File organisation : definition of the useful part of the file,
- Data organisation: description of the data contained in the file,
- Features association: correspondence between the data contained in the file and the data required to
generate feature (geometrical point, circle).
Note: Only files that can be edited in a notepad can be used in the Data Import Wizard. Binary files
cannot be used.

Select the file to be imported in the window that appears when this function is selected :

Each Wizard window is divided into two parts:


- the upper part, used to define the parameters,
- the lower part, that displays configuration incidents in real time.

Page 147

File organisation

Page 148

This window is used to define all the parts that are not to be included in the following step. Three are three
types of zones to be excluded (they are shown in blue in the file preview):
- File head,
- End of file,
- One or more lines/strings mixed with the data.

File head

Used to limit the file header by specifying a set number of lines. In this
case, empty strings can be ignored.
Used to delimit the file header by using a key word from
the file.

End of file
Used to define the end of the file by specifying a set number of lines. In

Page 149

this case, empty strings can be ignored.


Used to define the end of the file by using a key word from
the file.

Ignore

It is also possible to ignore lines starting by, including, or


ending by a key word or a specific character via the corresponding fields. Empty strings may also be ignored.
To add a term, enter it in the appropriate field, then click this button.
To remove a term, select it in the list, then click this button.

File preview

The different functions that can be accessed from the file preview window context menu are (x being the
character string selected in the preview):

The fields in the upper part of the window are automatically completed when the context menu is used.

Note: Please bear in mind that the Data Import Wizard is case sensitive (upper and lower cases
letters are considered as different) for term search in the file to be imported.

Data organisation

Page 150

This window is used to describe the data contained in the file. Only the useful parts of the file are displayed.
This step allows the elements to be described in number of lines and/or number of data items per line.
An element contained in the file has the following obligatory characteristics:
- A start,
- An end,
- Data,
- A correspondence (or not) with a software element (a transformation matrix contained in the file does not
generate elements but may be used for element creation).
A file may contain several types of entity that necessarily differ by a key word.

Data splitting

There are two methods of defining data separation into columns:

Page 151

- By using a specific character as data separator.

The separator may be a tab,


a comma, a dot comma (semicolon) or a space. Check (select) the corresponding box to select the desired
separator. If the final box is selected, a user-specified character (defined via the Define as separator option
of the context menu) will be used as separator.
If a separator used several successive times is used, a column will be created for each separator character
found. Several columns will thus be empty and therefore of no use.
Select this option in order to avoid taking adjoining separators into
account.
Select this option in order to maintain the separation between data
items. This may be desirable in certain cases in order to remain close to the initial file.
- By using a column number. However, the columns must be previously defined in the Wizard. To do this,
create the column separators by clicking in the position indicator. Then select and move them. A separator
may also be positioned by placing the cursor at the desired location and selecting the Insert a column
option from the context menu.

To delete a column indicator, right-click it and select Delete from the context menu.

Define character for merging cells

If certain items of information must not be "cut" by a separator, the Define character for merging cells box
must be used.
This function also allows a specific character in a given item of information to be deleted.
When a box contains a merge character, the text in the box is displayed in pink.

Example:
The selected merge character is ". The boxes containing this character are displayed in pink:

Page 152

The box in line 1 and column 4 will return the value PLANE BASE OF PART and not "PLANE BASE OF
PART".

Data arrangement

After determining how the data is to be separated, information on the start and end of the elements must now
be entered.
To do this, a list of arrangement rules allows the different rules created to be viewed:

To create a data arrangement rule, you may use:


- the existing default rule by double-clicking it to edit it.

this button, that allows a rule to be added.

- a term selected from the file display, then selecting the Define as element start option from the context
menu.
A data arrangement rule is created in the following window:

Page 153

This window is used to specify:


- the starting key word of the element.
- the short name of the rule (used in the following step).
- a unique column. This allows the column in which the starting key word or ending key word is to be
searched for to be specified. If this function is not used, the entire file is searched.
- the ending of the element (fixed number of lines, key word or constant column, i.e. while the value given in
this column remains constant). This key word may be selected directly from the file preview by highlighting
it, then selecting Define as element ending from the context menu.
- creation of inspection data. This function specifies if the element to be imported is a geometrical element. If
not, the element may be a coefficient or any other value that can be used at export.

To create a rule, the following must be given at minimum:


- A starting key word.
- An ending.

A data arrangement rule is edited by:


- Double-clicking the rule to be modified.
- Editing each of the fields accessible in the list of data arrangement rules.
This button is used to display the rule editor window. This window is identical to the window for rule
creation, except that the Starting key word field is not accessible.
This button is used to access the following menu, used to edit the ending of the element:

used to delete the selected rule.

Page 154

and
directions.

are used to search for the following selected data arrangement rule in the up or down

The different functions that can be accessed from the file preview context menu are:

or

- Define as separator: used to create separators delimiting columns. This command can only be accessed
when data separation is by one or more specific characters.
- Define x as element start: used to define the highlighted term as element start indicator.
- Define x as element ending: used to define the highlighted term as element ending indicator.
- Check only in column x: allows the column in which the starting key word or ending key word is to be
searched for to be specified. If this function is not used, the entire file is searched.
- Element ending on column value change x: used to determine the ending of an element on a value
change in column x.
- Insert a column: used to insert a column separator. This command can only be accessed when data
separation is by column numbers.
- Find automatically elements start from column x: allows data arrangement rules to be automatically
created by referring to the selected column.
- Define character for merging cells: used to avoid splitting information containing the character defined as
merge character.

Once data separation has been performed, you can see how the file to be imported is split up in the lower
part of the window:

Page 155

Features association

Page 156

This window is used to associate the previously defined entities with software elements, whether this be the
defined and/or measured (nominal and/or actual) part. This step involves describing how the data in the file is
organized so that the software can then import this file format automatically.
File entities must be defined for each type of element. To do this:

Select
the type of element to be defined from the drop-down list. Different types of elements may be defined for a
single export format. The elements available are Circle, Cylinder, Line, Plane, Surface point,
Geometrical point and Sphere.

Page 157

Determine the type of condition to be applied:


- None: No specific condition will be applied.
- Equal: The defined element will not be imported if the equal condition is met (true).
- Contain: The defined element will not be imported if it contains the character string specified in the field.

Examples:

means that if the box in line 3 and column 2 belonging to the


rule named NA has the character string 702, then the element for which this condition is true will not
be imported.

means that the element will only be imported if the character string
IMPORT is present in the element.

Allocate the "boxes" of the file to be imported to each of the fields allowing the element to be defined.
To perform this allocation:
- Select the "box" to be allocated in the above window by directly clicking in it. A data entry field is
displayed.
- Select the value to be used in the import file preview by clicking it. The import file value name will be
automatically entered in the "box" in the description window
.
The syntax used to name the value used is simple. It comprises the short name used in the previous step to
define a data arrangement rule, the number of the line of the selected value and the number of the column of
the selected value. VAL allows the numerical value of the data item to be obtained (as opposed to its value
as a character string).
- Repeat these operations as many times as required to fully define the required information. These steps
are to be performed for each type of element to be imported.
By default, the Wizard offers an automatic name as element name. In the example, <AUTO PT> corresponds
to the automatic name given to a point, the prefix being PT. However, this default prefix may be modified
using the
button. This opens a window allowing the default name of the element to be modified:

Page 158

If no orientation is to be specified, for geometrical points for example, 0 must be entered in the I, J and K
"boxes".
The Data Import Wizard will then be displayed in similar manner to that shown below, once all the fields
have been completed:

Page 159

Saving the import format


Click this button to finish defining the import rules. The Wizard then offers to save the
import format created:

Page 160

In this window, specify:


- The name of the format created (displayed in the file import window).
- A comment on this file format. This will be displayed when this import format is edited.
Click this button again. The Wizard then offers to import the file used to create this import
format:

The import format created can now be directly accessed from the file import window like any format available
in the software by default:

Page 161

The import format is saved in the directory IDPRules, located in the software installation directory.
If an environment variable is used, the import format is saved in the directory LocaldirIDPRules, located at the
same level as the Localdir directory of the software.

Page 162

Edit existing format

An existing file import format may be modified. Only user-created formats may be modified.
When this function is called, a window is displayed listing all the import formats created:

The formats created are listed with their name, extension and any comments.
used to delete the selected import format.
closes the window without applying any changes made.
to move to the next step in the selected import format editing process. The following
window is then displayed:

Page 163

This window is used to edit the File organisation parameters, as described in defining a new format.

Click this button to display the following step in the editing process:

Page 164

This window is used to edit the Data organisation parameters, as described in defining a new format.

Click this button to display the following step in the editing process:

Page 165

This window is used to edit the Elements association parameters, as described in defining a new format.

allows advanced editing of the import format currently being modified:

Page 166

A user-created import format may thus be edited directly from its code. The language used is the DMIS
language.

Note: Any modification of the rule in advanced mode renders it unusable by the Wizard and it can then
only be displayed and edited in advanced editing mode.

Page 167

Edit information
This function allows you to view traceability information related to the work in progress and to add further
informations if necessary.
The Edit information window looks like this:

There are two categories of data:

System Data
The system informations cannot be modified by the user, since they pick up the entire informations linked to
the current working session.

Example:
A_CAD_FILE: name and saving path of the CAD file related to the work
A_CAD_DATE: date of the working session
WORK_VERSION: version of the software in which the work was created

User Data:
The user informations are created and edited by the user. They must take the form "variable=value", as in the
example above.

Page 168

These variables can be used in 4 different ways:


- as informations to be viewed
- as values when exporting work: where the variables appear in the header of the exported file
- as variables when teaching in or operating a program
- as values when printing the report

Click on this button to save the informations entered


Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.

In program: This function can be learned in a program.


The following line appears:

Page 169

Import information

This function is used to import file information from a *.DAT file.


When this function is selected, the following window is displayed:

Select the *.DAT fto import the information contained in this file into the current working session file
information.
The *.DAT file must have the following type of format:

Once this file has been imported, *.DAT file variables may be displayed in the working session information:

Page 170

Note: These variables may be retrieved in a Text/Value of mathematical expression type by using the
WORKINFO function. See Operators and functions for the calculator.

In program: This function can be learned in a program.


The following line appears:

Page 171

Print Report
Once Once you have performed the control of an item, you can print the results. You can either print them in
the form of a table of results or a view defined in the software, containing precise informations. It should be
noted that when the statistics mode is activated, the printed results will be the statistical results. Otherwise,
it will be the results of the current control.

The Report window


To print a report, select Print Report from the File menu or click on
window will appear:

in the toolbar. The following

By clicking on this button, you can choose the available printer or default printer by ticking the
corresponding box and you can also define its properties.
Tick this box to select the printer which is set up as a default printer.
By ticking this box you can save a report to be printed in .pdf-format. If the box is ticked, the
following window will appear, enabling you to choose the access path and the filename:

Page 172

You cannot create a PDF-file unless Acrobat Writer or the shareware PDF995 Printer Driver is installed. If
neither of these are installed, a software message will invite you to download the PDF995 Printer Driver.
allows you to specify the path and the filename of the *.pdf -file created. The name of the *.pdf-file may
contain $-signs, so that the count of the filename automatically increases as you print. The path and/or the
filename may be the software user variables.
Then choose the orientation of the pages to be printed. You may choose Default, Portrait or Landscape.
Then specify the number of copies of the report.
allows you to print a report by sorting the features of the work to be printed by family Print
by family.

allows you to specify a maximum number of features to be printed per page. This
is, above all, useful when printing graphics reports with stickers: limiting the number of features, and thus
stickers, will make the printout more legible.
ticking this box allows you to print a report more quickly, although it will be of slightly lesser
quality. This may be useful when printing a table of results where the accuracy of the printout is not
absolutely vital.
allows you to print to a 'Black & White' printer. In that case, the colours Red and Green of
the stickers will be Black and White.

allows you to select a graphics report.

allows you to select a text report.

Page 173

allows you to select a a combined report.

allows you to select a a split-views report.

allows you to select a a customized report.

allows you to access the Print editor by opening the report template selected above in order
to modify it.
allows you to access the Print editor by opening a new template in order to create a
customized report.
allows you to access the Wizard report.
allows you to print the report, once the parameters have been specified in this window.
allows you to do a print preview with the parameters specified in this window.
allows you to close the print window.

used to display advanced print configuration. The print window is then as shown below:

Page 174

This mode is used to print a selection of features, as well as to modify the printing properties of these
features (printing properties or expression alignment).

Used to open the Feature Database to select the features to be printed.

Used to remove a feature from the list of features to be printed.

Used to move the features selected in order to have a specific printing order.
Used to open the Properties window of features selected and to choose the dimension that should be
printed:

Page 175

The only results that can be exported are: DIM1, DIM2, E.F., X (XoY), Y (YoZ), Z (ZoX). The other fields of this
window are grayed.
Used to modify the expression alignment. The name of the expression alignment then appears in the
list of features, in the proper column.
Used to restore the original properties of the features selected.

Note: Features whose properties were modified appear in blue in the list of features of the print
windeow. In case the feature properties were restored, the color returns to black.

Operating principle of reports


Reports, no matter what type, always consist of two pages:
- The first page can be used as a front page. When printing, the data contained in this page will appear on the
front page only.
- The second page is to be used as the formatting to be applied to all other pages. The data contained in this
page will appear on all the following pages.

Note: In order to display a table on all the pages of the report, you must insert it in the two pages.

In program: This function can be learned in a program.


The following line appears:

Page 176

Report types

The software distinguishes between 5 main types of reports:


the graphics report, the text report, the combined report, the split-view report, the customized report.

Graphics report
This is a report which only contains a graphics view, which is either the current view of the working session or
a view which has been pre-defined by the user.
A template for this type of report, called GRAPH.DEF, can be found in the tree structure of the program.

This button in the print window also allows you to access it.
The graphics report is structured as follows:
- an area for variables to be entered when launching the print
- a histogram of the entire features of the working session
- a graphics view

Text report
This is a report format which only contains a table of results of those features of the working session to be
printed. A template for this type of report, called TEXT.DEF, can be found in the tree structure of the program.

This button in the print window also allows you to access it.

Page 177

The text report is structured as follows:


- an area for variables to be entered when launching the print
- a table of results with the following data for each feature: its reference, its nominal values, its measured
values (actuals), the higher and lower tolerances, the deviations from these tolerances for each of th its
dimensions and an indication of the tendency (a graphic if the dimension is within the tolerance, a value if the
dimension is outside the tolerance)
- in addition, a small view is inserted above to illustrate the report

Combined report
This is a report which contains a graphics view and a table of results of those features of the working session
to be printed. A template for this type of report, called MIXTE.DEF, can be found in the tree structure of the
program.

This button in the print window also allows you to access it.
This combined report is structured as follows:
- a graphics view in the first half of the first page

Page 178

- a table of results in the second half of the first page and on all the following pages
- an area for variables to be entered when launching the print

Split-view report
This is a report format which contains All user-defined views in the working session. The purpose of this

Page 179

type of report is to be able to print All user-defined views automatically in one program. A template for this
type of report, called allviews.def, can be found in the tree structure of the program.

This button in the print window also allows you to access it.
The split-view report is structured as follows:
- an area for variables to be entered when launching the print
- a 'split-view'-type graphics view

This button in the toolbar allows you to include several 'split-view' views on one page.
Once the view has been inserted into the page, right-click to access the Properties window and select the
option All user-defined views in the View field.

Split-views, only on the first page of the report

If the 'split-view'-type views are only included on the first page, all the objects around them will be repeated in
the following pages, automatically created.
Several 'split-view'-type views can be included in the first page. In this case, each view created in the working
session will be printed on each view of the report, as in the example below:

Example: 4 'split-view'-type views

Page 180

In this example, all the following pages will be printed in the same way, with 4 views per page:

Page 181

Split-views, only on the second page of the report

The behaviour remains the same, only that the first page serves as a title page containing the title.

Example:
- The first page is a title page
- The second page contains 2 split-views

Page 182

Split-views on both pages

By inserting 'split-view'-type views on both pages, you can obtain a title page which contains both a title and
one or more of the user-defined views, as well as a second page which contains the remainder of the
user-defined views.

Example:
- The first page contains the title, an image and a 'split-view'-type view.
- The second page contains 1 split-view.

Page 183

In this example, All user-defined views will be printed at a rate of 1 per page.

Customized report
The 4 types of reports presented above are just examples and can, of course, be edited and modified. You
may also create your own report entirely on your own, using the Print editor.

Page 184

Print Editor

The report editor may be accessed:


- via the Print window:

Click on this button to edit the selected report.


Click on this button to create a new report.

- via the Report Wizard, by selecting the Print report option in the final window.

Toolbars
The Print Editor has two types of toolbars:
- a Windows-type toolbar

Page 185

- a software-specific toolbar:

Display a grid on the pages being created to facilitate the alignment of the object(s)
inserted.
Display page margins of the report and modify them if necessary.
Zoom up or down the view of the report.
Insert a table of results into the report
Insert a graphics view of the program into the report.
Insert an image in *.bmp, *.emf or *.wmf-format into the report, for example the
company logo.
Insert a histogram of a feature.

Page 186

Insert a text box


Insert one or more pre-defined or customized variables.

Insert a circle, a rectangle or a straight line.

Insert a legend.

Right, left, top and bottom alignment of selected objects

Re-dimension selected objects according to the height or width of the object last
selected.
Centre an object vertically or horizontally in relation to the page or to the object last
selected, if this is the case.

Notes:

If you want to insert an object, click on one of the above icons. The mouse cursor will change. Then
click on the insertion point of the object and draw a window with the cursor in which the object will be
inserted.
If you want to select several features in order to align them or, for instance, change their font, click on
the first object, then hold the
objects in the report.

key of the keyboard down at the same time as clicking the other

To check the actual dimensions of an object, just select it with your mouse
and read the information displayed in the bottom right-hand corner of the graphics window.

You will also see the current cursor position at the bottom of this window.
When an object contained in the report is selected, it may be positioned accurately by using the
arrow keys (for minor adjustments) or the arrow keys + SHIFT (for quicker adjustments).

Context-sensitive menu
By right-clicking on one of the objects, you will open up a context-sensitive menu which enables you to
access the Properties of that object and either choose Bring To Front or Send To plan, according to
whether you want to position it as First or Second in relation to the other objects:

The Properties function of the context-sensitive menu enables you to access a feature display control
window:

Page 187

This window contains a viewing area and different buttons which you can use for setting the display of the
feature.

This field (which is not available for View, Image, Histogram and Line objects) allows
you to choose the colour of the filling of the object or to tick the checkbox to make it transparent.

In this field you can choose the colour of the border. The horizontal button allows
you to adjust its thickness.

The context-sensitive menu related to the lines enables you to modify the type of line to create arrows.

This field (which is not available for Circle and Line objects) enables you to choose

Page 188

in the same way the colour and thickness of the shading.


You may also choose the type of arrow from the pull-down menu:

Click on this button to save your changes.


Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.

Insert table
When the icon for inserting a table is activated, the mouse cursor will change and allow you to decide where
you want to place the table and you can also adjust its size. Once the table has been inserted, yu can set its
parameters either by double-clicking on it or by right-clicking and choosing Properties from the
context-sensitive menu. Then the following window will appear:

Page 189

In the Features section:


Use this button to display in the table only those features of the working session to be printed.
Use this button to select those features to be printed even if they cannot be printed in the
database.
When choosing this mode, the database window will pop up:

Select the features to be printed, then confirm. A list of these features will be displayed in the Features
section.

The Filter Features section allows you to filter features according to the value of the deviation in relation to
the tolerance.
This gives you the option to print only those features that are within the tolerance zone, or, you can do the
opposite, i.e. only print those features that are outside the tolerance zone, or you can combine these different
filters.

Page 190

The Column section enables you to work on the table columns.


Click on this button to create a new column.
Enter its title in the field provided and tick the box to show the title in the table.
Select the value of this new column from the list.
In order not to split two columns, select one of them and remove the tick from this box.
Use these buttons to modify the column width.
To relocate a column, select it and drag it with your mouse to the location of your choice.
or

These buttons can be used for navigating from one column to another.
To delete a column, select it and click on this button.

Click on this button to save your changes.


Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.
Use this button to modify the table font: choose the character font, size, style and perhaps the
colour.
Use this button to access the Advanced Parameters of the display of results via the following
window:

Use this field to modify the number of figures displayed for the actual and nominal

Page 191

values of the feature.


Use this pull-down menu to modify the precision for the actual and nominal values
of the feature.
Use this field to modify the number of figures displayed for deviations and
tolerances.
Use this pull-down menu to modify the precision for deviations and tolerances.
Tick this box to arrange the geometrical tolerances.
Click on this button to save your changes.
Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.

Insert a view
When the icon for inserting a view is activated, the mouse cursor will change and allow you to decide where
you want to place the view. The view inserted by default is the current view. You can modify the view and set
its parameters by double-clicking on it or by right-clicking and choosing Properties from the
context-sensitive menu. Then the following window will pop up:

Select the view to be displayed in this field: the current view of the
working session or one of the views saved by the operator.
The selection Family View is applied when Printing by family
The selection All user-defined views is applied when choosing a multi-view report
It is possible to display the view's name in the top left hand corner of the view when
printing a report.

Page 192

When the view is displayed, you can add a lighter or darker


frame marking the border of the view as well as a shading round this frame.

You can also specify the scale of the view. If you enter 0, the view will be printed
without scale factor.
In the case of a combined report, with a graphics view and a table of results on the same
page, the software may allocate stickers automatically to the view, i. e. the stickers created in the view will
correspond to the features contained in the table on each page. To choose this option, you only need to tick
this box.
For this operating mode, you will need a table of results and a view for which you will have set as a parameter
the option Auto Stickers each page of the report. To do this, the current view must not contain any stickers
and the type of stickers you wish to apply to the report must be defined in the 3D View > Stickers.
Tick this box to stick stickers without gap. In the following example, the stickers correspond
to the features appearing in the table:

Page 193

The view inserted may be edited. To do this, right-click the view and select Edit view from the context menu.
The 3D View is then displayed, containing the selected view. Its display parameters may then be configured
(stickers added, colors changed, zooms, etc.). Indeed, all functions in the 3D View menu and the 3D View
Toolbar are available.
The following window is also displayed:

Page 194

Click this button to cancel the changes made and exit view edit mode.
Click this button to confirm the changes made and exit view edit mode. The view is then
modified both in the report and in the software.

Note: This function is not available for All user-defined views and View by family type views.

Insert a histogram
When the icon for inserting a histogram is activated, the mouse pointer will change and allow you to decide
where you want to place the histogram. You can modify the histogram and set its parameters by
double-clicking on it or by right-clicking and choosing Properties from the context-sensitive menu. Then the
following window will pop up:

Choose the type of histogram to be displayed from:


Automatic: the histogram will show all the values of all the toleranced features of the current working
session.
All features: the histogram will show all the values of all the toleranced features of the current working
session.
Selection: the histogram will only show the toleranced features selected from the Histogram window
Current feature: the histogram will show all the measured values of the current feature.

When a histogram is displayed, you can add a lighter or


darker frame marking its border as well as a shading round this frame.

Page 195

Move the cursor to modify the display of the histogram. The different display
options are contained in the Histogram page

Insert a text box


When the icon for inserting a text box is activated, the mouse cursor will change and allow you to decide
where you want to place the text box.
The text inserted by default is called "Text". You can modify it either by double-clicking on it or by
right-clicking and choosing Properties from the context-sensitive menu. Then the following window will
appear, showing the first tab ("Text").

In the Text field you can enter the text to be displayed.


When you click on the second tab, you will get the following page:

Page 196

Select the font, style, size and colour of the inserted text if you like.

Insert a variable
When the icon for inserting a variable is activated, the following window will appear:

Page 197

From the list select the type of variable to be displayed.


Tick this box to display the legend to the variable on the report. If you do not want the
legend to be displayed, do not tick this box.
In the following field, you can modify the legend to this variable if you like.
Specific variables:
IT-P: number of features whose deviation is included in a given percentage of the tolerance. The features used
for calculation are printable features in the work session.
MI-P1: number of features (in %) whose deviation is in the tolerance.
MI-P2: number of features (in %) whose deviation is out of tolerance but included in an interval which is lower
than twice the tolerance.
MI-P3: number of features (in %) whose deviation is higher than twice the tolerance.
The following variables: Upper tolerance, Lower tolerance, Max. error, Min. error and Mean error
require creation of a results table, in order to be displayed. The values of the variables displayed then depend
on the features present in the table.
Finally, there is one more type of variable: the operator variables. These are customized variables whose
value is required from the operator at the time of printing. From the list of variable types, choose Operator
variable.

Page 198

Enter the name of the variable in the Name field.


Tick this box to display the legend to the variable on the report. If you do not want the
legend to be displayed, do not tick this box.
In the following field you can enter the value of this variable.
When printing the report, the following window will appear:

Enter the value of the variable. On the report it will show like this:

Note: available operator variables (list of default variables in the software)


CAD_DATE
PROGRAM_DATE

Date when the CAD file was created


Date when the program was created

Page 199

PROGRAM_MODIF
PROGRAM_VERSION
PROGRAM_EXEC_USER
PROGRAM_EXEC_DATE

Date when the program was modified


Software version in which the program was created
Name of operator having executed the program
Date when program was executed

PROGRAM_MATIERE

Material of the temperature-compensated item in the program

PROBE_FILE
PROBE_DATE
PROBE_MODIF
WORK_DATE
WORK_FILE

Probe file
Date when probe file was created
Date when probe file was modified
Date when work was saved
Work file
Material of the temperature-compensated item in the working
session
Dilatation coefficient of the material of the
temperature-compensated item in the working session
Temperature of the item in the working session
User who has saved the work
Software version in which the work was created
Version of Windows operating system
Graphics engine selected from the set-up wizard
Software version
Name of printer used
Print in rapid mode (or not)

WORK_MATIERE
WORK_COEFMAT
WORK_TEMPERATURE
WORK_USER
WORK_VERSION
SYS_OS_VERSION
SYS_GRAPH_ENGINE
SYS_MT2_VERSION
SYS_PRINTER_NAME
SYS_PRINTER_RAPID

Insert a legend
- When Color Coding is enabled, inserts a legend which represents tolerance zones and associated colors:

Page 200

- When Color Coding is disabled, inserts a legend which represents colors associated to features in
tolerance, in critical zone or out of tolerance:

Page 201

Page 202

Print by family

When printing a report, you can sort the features of the working session according to their families. This
allows you, for instance, to obtain a particular view for each family and to print it with a table of results
containing the features of this family.

To do this, you will have to perform three stages: create report prepare working session and set print
parameters.

Create report
Create a report, using the Print Editor, inserting:
- A Header: with variables, operator variables if necessary, company logo etc...

Page 203

You will also have pre-defined variables, such as Name of active family and Comment on active family,
which allow you to display the name of the printed family and perhaps also a comment on this family
automatically. These variables are available in the list of variables of the Print Editor:

Page 204

- A graphical view
Select Family view from the list of views:
You can also automatically put stickers on features of the graphical view by ticking this
box. See Print Editor.

Page 205

- A table of results:

Prepare working session


- Allocate a family name to each feature to be printed:
either when defining the feature or when measuring it, or via the database in order to include the feature(s) in
one family.

Note: Those families that are not associated to views will not be printed. Those families that are not
associated to views will not be printed
In this instance, this is the case for the following: CURVE_SURFACE and RIGHT_PLANE, as there is no
view carrying these names.

- Create one view per family:


Give it the same name as the family. This function is not compulsory in the case of a report with text only
and no graphics.

Note: Those views that are not associated to families will not be printed.
Here, this is the case for CONE_DETAIL, CYL_DETAIL and DEFAULT_VIEW views, as there are no views
with these names.

Page 206

- Comment associated to each family:


In the data on the working session, add variables with the same name as the families and enter a comment
as a value of the variable (under Edit Informations). This comment will then become visible in the report if the
report was created using the associated variables.

Set print parameters


Print your report by ticking this box in the Print Properties window:

Page 207

Here are the first three pages of the report thus printed with the work file demo_color_map.wk2 and the report
file (SortFamily.def) which can be found in the installation folder of the program.

Page 208

Page 209

Page 210

Note: In this example, the report is made up of a graphics part and another part which contains a table
of results. But you can also use the same procedure if you want to create a graphics only report (= without a

Page 211

table of results) or a text only report (= without graphics).

Page 212

Statistical report

You can print the statistical results in a report.


A report of this type, which is called Textstat.def, can be found in the tree structure of the program.
To do this:
- activate the Statistics mode (see Statistical Results),
- select the command Print Report from the File menu,

click on this icon to insert a table of results into the report.

Insert a table of statistical results into a report


When the icon for inserting a table is activated, the cursor of the mouse will change and allow you to decide
on the location and the size of the table. Once the table has been inserted, you can set its parameters by
double-clicking on it or by right-clicking and selecting Properties from the pull-down menu.
Then the following window will appear:

You can select all the values available in this pull-down menu.
Among these values, those specific to the Statistics mode are:

Page 213

Capability (Cp), Machine Capability (Cpk), Deviation <i>, Range <i>, Mean (median error rate), Tendency and
Variance.

Example 1: Table of results containing statistical values:

Lines

- The first line indicates: the name of the feature (LEFTCIR), the type of feature and the mode (Statistical
Circle), and the details of the archived controls:

- On the following lines you will see the dimensions selected in the Results window.
In this example: diameter, ray, X, Y and Z.

columns

The different statistical values chosen appear in a column.


In the Tendency column you will see the film of measurements, representing the situation of archived
measurements in comparison to the nominal value as well as the positive and negative tolerance limits.

Example 2: Statistical values of type Deviation <i>:


Deviation <i> : This value allows to display the difference between the nominal value of a feature and its
value defined by archived control.
Hence, you need to create as many columns for the value Deviation <i>as controls to be displayed.

Page 214

Hence, when selecting this value from the pull-down list, an additional field will appear in the Results window,
to the right of the list of values.
This field allows you to enter the number of the control to be displayed. In the example below, number 1
corresponds to the first archived control.

Note: The value 0 allows you to display the result of the deviation or measurement observed during the
last control.
This may, above all, be of interest if a number of controls have been archived and the user only wants to
display the last one. Hence, it is not necessary to count them.

The following table of results contains the deviations observed during the first 4 archived control:

Example 3: Statistical values of type Measured <i>:

Page 215

Measured <i>: This value allows you to display the results of measurements of features by way of archived
control.
Hence, you need to create as many columns for the value Measured <i>as controls to be displayed.
The following table of results contains the measurements archived during controls 2, 3 and 6:

For further details on this window, please refer to the Print editor page.

Page 216

Wizard report
This option offers a Wizard to help you create reports. The Wizard comprises a series of windows that guide
you through the report creation process.
The window is shown below:

Step 1: Select the type of report

Page 217

Select report type from: Graphical report alone, Test report alone or Mixed report.
Click this button to go to the following step.

Step 2: Page layout

Page 218

Select document orientation, Portrait or Landscape, by checking (selecting) the corresponding box.
For a Graphical report alone or Mixed report, select the view to be inserted from Current view, one of
the saved views (selected from the drop-down list) or All user-defined views (Multi-view report).
Select whether or not view name is to be displayed by checking (selecting) the relevant box.
Check this box to apply a scale factor to the view and then enter the value of the
factor in the adjacent field.
Select whether or not page numbers are to be displayed by checking (selecting) the relevant box.
Click this button to go to the following step.
For a Graphical report alone, go to step 4.
For a Text report alone or a Mixed report, go to step 3.

Step 3: Result table management

Page 219

Select result table type from:


- Standard: the table will contain the following values:

- Condensed: the table will contain the following values:

- Standard with statistic: the table will contain the following values:

Select whether or not the columns are to be modified by checking (selecting) the corresponding box.
Select the number of features to be displayed per page from the drop-down list.

Page 220

Click this button to go to the following step.

If the Modify columns option was selected, the following window is displayed:

For more information on this window, see the Insert table section on the Report Editor page.
Click this button to go to the following step.

Step 4: Families and stickers

Page 221

Enable or disable Sort by family by checking (selecting) the corresponding box.


Select whether or not family name is to be inserted by checking (selecting) the relevant box.
Select whether or not family comment is to be inserted by checking (selecting) the relevant box.
Print the views according to families or only the selected view.
For a mixed report, sticker position may be selected from: Use current positions, Around the view and
Around the view and glued.
Click this button to go to the following step.

When Around the view or Around the view and glued sticker positioning is selected, the following
window is displayed:

Page 222

This window has two tabs allowing sticker Rows / Columns and Appearance to be modified.

Step 5: End of the Wizard

Page 223

Select whether or not to display a logo by checking (selecting) the corresponding box.
Select the number of copies to be printed from the drop-down list.
Finally, select the action to be performed after exiting the Wizard (when the

button is pressed):

- Back to print dialog: the print window will be displayed.


- Preview before printing: a preview of the report configured according to the selected parameters will be
displayed.
- Print report: the report configured according to the selected parameters will be directly printed.
- Report edit: The Report Editor will be displayed, containing the report configured with the Wizard.
Whatever the selected option, the save window is first displayed to allow the configured report to be saved.

The following buttons are displayed in the different windows of the Wizard:
To return to the previous step.
To go to the next step.
To close the Wizard without saving any changes made.
To display this help page.

Page 224

Statistics
This section explains the different functions of the Statistics menu.

An example illustrating all the functions is also available.

Page 225

Archive current control

This function enables you to save the results of several controls carried out on one item in a working session.
The characteristics of all the measurements are thus stored in one working session in order to calculate
statistics on the feature measurement results.
To activate this function, select Statistics > Archive current control.

Then the Edit Informations window of the File menu will pop up, allowing you to add traceability
informations about the control, just before archiving it.
Then click on this button in order to archive the control in the working session.
If the working session has not been saved yet, the program will ask you to save it by bringing up the Save a
Working Session window.

When archiving a control, 2 files will be added to the already existing work files: one which contains the data
of the Edit Informations window (*.xst), while the other one contains statistical data (*.sta).

In program: This function can be learned in a program.

Page 226

The following line appears:

Page 227

Statistical results

Statistics mode
This function enables you to calculate statistics on the measurement results of the features stored in the
archived controls of the working session. When choosing this function, the Statistics mode will be activated
and no actions on any of the features will be possible (definitions, measurements, etc...).
In the Statistics menu click on Statistical results. Alternatively click on the

icon in the toolbar.

If one of the controls have been archived, the following window will pop up:

By clicking this button you can select all the controls of this working session. You can also
select from this list some specific controls only, by using the cursor and the
key of your keyboard.
The number of controls selected in comparison with the total number of controls will be displayed in this
window.

enables you to destroy the selected archived control(s) permanently; you will get a message to confirm
the destruction of all archived controls.

Then click on this button to activate the Statistics mode.

Page 228

Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.

If a feature exists in the selected controls but not in the current control, the following message will appear and
there will not be any calculation of statistics for this feature:

By clicking on this button, you will get a list of those feature(s) missing from the current control:

When clicking on this button, the Statistics mode will be activated.

enables you to validate the window in order to move on to the next stage.

For each feature of the working session, the statistics will be displayed in the Results window:

Page 229

The stickers available for each feature will be modified according to this new statistical data. See Example

Statistical values
The following calculated statistical values can be fully integrated in the table of results of a statistical report :

Mean

The mean is calculated according to the following formula, Xibeing a characteristic measurement (for
example, the diameter of a circle) and n being the number of measurements:

Example: 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 20 0.3


Meas. Meas.
1
2

Meas.
3

Meas.
4

Meas.
5

Meas.
6

Meas.
7

Meas.
8

Meas.
9

Meas.1
0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8

20.1

20.3

Range

The range is calculated according to the following formula, Xibeing a characteristic measurement (for
example, the diameter of a circle):
W = Max {Xi} - Min {Xi}

Example: 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 20 0.3


Meas. Meas.
1
2

Meas.
3

Meas.
4

Meas.
5

Meas.
6

Meas.
7

Meas.
8

Meas.
9

Meas.1
0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8

20.1

20.3

W = 20.3 - 19.7 = 0.6

Standard deviation

This function evaluates the standard deviation of a population, based on a sample of this population,
according to the following formula, Xibeing a characteristic measurement (for example, the diameter of a
circle):

Page 230

Do not mix 0 the overall production deviation up with i the instantaneous production deviation.

Example: 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 20 0.3


Meas. Meas.
1
2

Meas.
3

Meas.
4

Meas.
5

Meas.
6

Meas.
7

Meas.
8

Meas.
9

Meas.1
0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8

20.1

20.3

Variance

This function estimates the variance of a population, based on a sample of this population, according to the
following formula, Xi being a characteristic measurement (for example, the diameter of a circle):

Example: 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 20 0.3


Meas. Meas.
1
2

Meas.
3

Meas.
4

Meas.
5

Meas.
6

Meas.
7

Meas.
8

Meas.9 Meas.1
0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8

20.3

20.1

Note: The Results window of the statistics either shows the standard deviation or the variance. To
select either one or the other, choose Preferences >Units.

Cp (Capability)

The capability is calculated according to the following formula:

Warning: Do not mix Tol up with ls (upper tolerance limit) ( ls =Xtheoretical + Tol )

Example : 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 200.3 (a diameter of 200.3 results in Tol Tol = 0.6)

Page 231

Meas. Meas.
1
2

Meas.
3

Meas.
4

Meas.
5

Meas.
6

Meas.
7

Meas.
8

Meas.9 Meas.1
0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8

20.3

20.1

Cpk (machine capability)

There are three cases for the calculation of Cpk:

Bilateral tolerancing (for all features, except tolerancing):

The machine capability is calculated according to the following formula, with Xi= X theoretical:

Example: 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 20 0.3


Meas. Meas.
1
2

Meas.
3

Meas.
4

Meas.
5

Meas.
6

Meas.
7

Meas.
8

Meas.9 Meas.1
0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8

20.3

20.1

Standard-limit tolerancing, upper limit (case of geometrical tolerances):

The machine capability is calculated according to the following formula, with Xi= X theoretical:

Standard-limit tolerancing, lower limit:

The machine capability is calculated according to the following formula, with Xi= X theoretical:

Page 232

Recall an archived control

In order to be able to make use of this function, you must have a statistics archive open.
This function enables you to view a specific archived control, without calculating any statistics. This is similar
to recalling a working session.
When selecting Recall an archived control from the Statistics menu, the following window will appear,
displaying the list of archived controls (.wk2 - file):

For each archived control the window will show:


- on the left-hand side of the window, date and time of archiving.
- on the right-hand side of the window, when one of the controls is selected, the system data (name of
working session, date of control, etc...) and the user data entered when archiving the control.

Once the control is open, the measurement results can be viewed, as for a working session. You can also
modify the control and archive it again.

Click on this button to open the selected control (previously saved measurements).

Click on this button to close the window. No archived controls will be recalled.

Page 233

Export archived controls

This function enables you to export the entire statistical controls stored in the archive (file .wk2). A text-file (
*.txt) will be created for use in other statistical data-processing programs or spreadsheets.
This is the window of the function:

Click on this button to select the access path to the target file in the tree structure.
Click on this button once you have chosen the export path.
Use this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.
The export file is a text-file, separated by the separator defined in the Separator field in the regional options
(";" by default in Windows). See Control Panel > Regional and language Settings..

Note: The results are presented in columns, as illustrated in the example.

Page 234

Example

In the File menu, select New Working Session in order to delete the database features and alignments.
Construct a new alignment and define a circle feature called CIRC1 in this alignment, defining the tolerances.
Measure this feature.
In the File menu, select Archive current control.
In Edit Informations specify the name of the operator, the name of the item and the number of the
measurement.
Click on this button and then save your working session under the name: demo.wk2.
The information stored is the first measurement value for CIRC1, saved on 29-10-2004, at 12:22:21.

Remeasure the circle. The measured value will be different.


In the File menu, select Archive current control.
In the Edit Informations window the name of the operator previously entered as well as the name of the item
and the number of the measurement will be called up.
Indicate the number of measurement no. 2.
Then click on this button.
The information stored is the second value of the measurement for CIRC1, archived on 29-10-2004 at
12:26:08:

Page 235

Do the same for a third measurement of CIRC1:

The Results window looks as follows: (normal mode) :

Page 236

You can now calculate the statistics on feature CIRC1, based on the features previously archived.
In the Statistics menu, select Statistical Results.
The following window will pop up:

The 3 controls previously carried out will be listed. Select all the controls.
Then click on this button.
Then the Results window will change, so that it shows the different statistical values calculated by the
program for the feature CIRC1 (Mean, Nominal, Tolerance, Range, Deviation type, Cp and Cpk).
This icon indicates that the Statistics mode is activated.

Page 237

The stickers available for each feature will be modified according to this new statistical data:

Normal Mode

Page 238

Statistics Mode

A control may be viewed on its own, without any calculation of statistics. To do this, select Recall an
archived control from the Statistics menu and in the following window you can choose the control to be
viewed.
Any additional information entered when archiving the control archive control is shown in the right-hand part of
the window (operator, item and measurement):

Page 239

Once the controls have been archived, you can export them in *.txt-format, so that you will also be able to
use them in other statistical data-processing programs. Select Export statistical controls from the
Statistics menu specify the export path and then click on

Once it has been saved, you can edit the text file in a spreadsheet, for example:
This will then look like that:

Page 240

Note: This file does not contain statistical results (Cp, Cpk, Range, etc.), but archived controls
(measured values (actuals), deviations etc.). To export statistical results you must use the Export function
which you can choose from the File menu.

Page 241

Delete measured values


This function allows you to delete the measured values (actuals) of the features of the working session only,
so that you can retain the definitions for a new series of measurements.
When this function is selected, the following confirmation message will appear:

Click on this button to delete the measured values. The window will be closed and the
change will be made immediately.
Click on this button to close the window. Your measured values will not be deleted.

In program: This function can be learned in a program.


The following line appears:

Page 242

Invert Deviation
This function allows you to invert the sign of the deviation and the tendency of all X, Y, Z or angular values of
features whose nominal X, Y, Z or angular values are negative.

Example: By default, the sign of the deviations depends on the orientation of the alignment.
For example, deviations in Y are greater than 0 when they have the same orientation as the Y-axis; they are
below 0 when they are in the opposite direction.
When the inversion of deviations is applied to Y, for instance, for the control of a car body, the deviations are
then greater than 0 when they go towards the outside and below 0 when they go towards the inside.

Example 2: Deviation on a geometrical point


The point POIN1 is defined (nominal) and measured (actual) as follows:

There is a deviation of 1mm on X.


Check (select) the line Invert deviation on -X in the menu File > Results.
The result window is then displayed as shown below:

Page 243

There is a now a deviation of -1mm on X.

Page 244

Automated backup
This function enables you to recover the last context of your working session (probe file, alignments, features)
that was auto-saved.
The automated backup is performed in a file called $$AUTO.wk2 as well as in the 5 associated files.
For further details, please refer to Automated backup
The automated-backup frequency can be set with the function Automated backup which you can choose
from Preferences menu.

Page 245

Send to
This function allows you to send a software working session by email. This enables a person to view results
without having to install the program on his computer.
The working session is first exported to HTML format (a table of results, all the views saved and the current
view); then the files resulting from the export will be attached in an email where you need to enter the
recipient and the subject.
In the example below, the system Outlook is being used:

In program: This function can be learned in a program.


The following line appears:

Page 246

Publish
This function enables you to publish a software working session on a website.
Select Publish from the File menu and a website publication wizard will pop up.

Once the wizard has been set up, and provided that you are entitled to write on the server, your work can be
sent to a website.

Page 247

Quit
This function allows you to quit the software.
Before closing, the software will detect whether any changes have been made.
Hence, the following warning messages may appear, allowing you to save your changes, if any:

Click on this button to save the changes made and quit the software.
Click on this button to quit the software without your changes being saved.
Click on this button to cancel the command for closing and come back to the software.

Page 248

Preferences

Page 249

Open, Open previous configuration


These functions are used to open working configurations in the software.
Open is used to open a configuration saved in a file. The following window is displayed:

Click this button to open the selected configuration file.


Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

The configuration files (*.cfg) contain information relating to:


- the size and position of the windows
- the units
- the default parameters (of the features)
- the open windows
- the display parameters of the 3D view window (colors, font, name of the features, etc.)
- the display parameters of the DRO window

Open Previous is used to display the previous configurations used and saved, making it easier to load them:

Page 250

Page 251

Save, Save as
These functions are used to save a specific working configuration. The position of the windows, their sizes,
the units used and the default parameters of the features are taken into account when saving.

Save
Save is used to save the current configuration assigning it a name and a directory, if it is being saved for the
first time, or to save the changes made in this same file.
The save window is shown below:

Select the save directory and name the file. The file will be a *.cfg file.

Save as
Save as is used to save the current configuration under a different name.
The save window shown above then opens, and is used to modify the name and the path of the current file.

Click this button to save the configuration.


Click this button to exit the window without saving the configuration.

Page 252

Change user
Changes the current user, without having to restart the application.
The following window appears, and is used to enter the user name and password:

Click this button to validate the information entered.


Click this button to exit the window without changing the user.

Page 253

Edit users
Only one user, with administrator rights, can access user management, using the Preferences > Edit users
menu.
The following window appears:

This button can only be accessed through the Users and Rules tabs. It is used to create a new
user or a new rule.
This button can only be accessed through the Users and Rules tabs. It is used to delete the
selected user or rule.
This button can only be accessed through the Users and Rules tabs. It is used to edit the
selected user or rule.
This button is used to save the changes made in all tabs of the window.
This button is used to exit the window without applying any changes made.

Users tab

Adding a user
adds a user to the list. The following window is then displayed:

Page 254

Enter the user name.


Assign the user a password.
Confirm this password.
Specify the software user level from the following options:
Administrator: Highest user level in the software. Users with administrator rights have access to all features.
Programmer: Intermediate user level in the software. Users with programmer rights have access to all
features except for user management.
Operator: Minimum user level in the software. Users with operator rights have limited access to the software
features, specified by the administrator(s).
In this drop-down list, you can select one of the rules available in the
Rules tab in order to assign it to the new user.
This button gives access to additional parameters:
The window is displayed as follows for users at Administrator or Programmer level:

Page 255

Checking this box is used to associate probe files with the user.
Manually enter the probe file access path or search
for it in the tree structure.
Checking this box is used to associate configuration files with the user. The user
configuration will be forced to the one specified in the file.
Manually enter the configuration file access path or
search for it in the tree structure.

The window is displayed as follows for users at Operator level:

Page 256

Checking this box is used to associate probe files with the user.
Manually enter the probe file access path or search
for it in the tree structure.
Checking this box is used to associate configuration files with the user. The user
configuration will be forced to the one specified in the file.
Manually enter the configuration file access path or
search for it in the tree structure.

These fields are used to specify the access paths to the probe and program files authorized for operator-level
users. For the programs, this is the start of the tree structure.

Note: A filter may be applied to the program directory to display only certain types of program. The
syntax is as follows: Directory_name|*.extension|
For example, the program directory may be displayed as follows: C:\Program Files\Metrologic
Group\Program|*.gm2|. Only GM2 type programs will then be displayed in operator mode.

Page 257

In this part of the window you can assign specific functions to the keys F7 to F12 on the keyboard.
The probe and configuration files will be loaded automatically when the software starts up or on a change of
user.

This button is used to save the changes made in all tabs of the window.
This button is used to exit the window without applying any changes made.

Modifying a user
modifies the parameters of a user previously selected in the list.

The following window is then displayed:

Level tab
The Level tab is used to display the hierarchy of the users as follows:

Page 258

This hierarchy can be modified by selecting a user and sliding them to the required hierarchy level.
The level can also be modified for each user in the Users tab.

Rules tab
In this tab, each user can be assigned a software user rule.

Note: Each user can only be assigned one rule at a time.


The rules tab is shown below:

Page 259

The rules will be used to manage and/or control information entered in the fields of the definition,
measurement and automatic measurement windows, according to the working procedures established and
translated in the form of scripts.
Microsoft Visual Basic is then used by the software to run these scripts. This is why MS script control needs
to be installed in order to use the scripts. However, these scripts are text files with the extension *.xgs, which
can be edited using any text editor. The following is an example:

Click this button to create a new rule.


The following window appears, and is used to configure a user rule by specifying general information (name,
description, bitmap, etc.) and associating it with control scripts in .xgs format:

Page 260

Enter the name of the rule.

Enter a description if required.

Enter the name of the creator of the rule if required. By


default, the name of the connected user appears in this field.

If necessary, choose an icon to associate with this rule.


This will appear next to its name in the Rules tab.

Definition, measurement and/or automatic measurement rules can be associated for each feature. To do this,
click in the box corresponding to the feature and the required action. Then click

The following window then appears, and is used to search in the tree structure for the script to be applied:

Page 261

Click this button to accept the changes made to the rule.


This rule then appears in the window and can be assigned to users.
To do this, drag and drop the user to the required rule.

Note: Rules can also be assigned using the Users tab.

When the software is started, the rules associated with the connected user will be automatically activated.
In the software status bar, the user name will appear in red if rules are associated with this user.

Page 262

When a rule is applied to a window, the title bar of the window appears in red instead of the usual blue:

Disabling user operations


The user management window is used to disable user operations. To do this:
Uncheck this box.
click this button to confirm.
From this point on, the Change user, Edit users and Change password functions are no longer accessible:
they will be grayed out in the Preferences menu.
To re-enable user operations, you need to delete the hidden file users.mod, saved in the software installation
directory.
The functions will again be accessible next time you log on to the software.

Page 263

Change password
The following window is used to change the password of the current user:

Enter the current password, then enter the new password twice.

Then click this button to confirm the new password.


closes the window without applying any changes made.

Page 264

Edit rules
The software has a script editor, accessible through the Preferences > Edit rules menu, which is used to
debug the *.xgs format files.

Notes:

The connected user must have administrator rights in order to access this function.
MS Script control must be installed in order to use this function.
The syntax of the files in *.xgs format corresponds to the Microsoft Visual Basic Script standard.

The window used to edit or debug a script is as follows:

The buttons bar


Opens an existing *.xgs file.
Saves the current *.xgs file.
Saves the current file under a different name.
Changes to debug mode.
Resumes running after a breakpoint. This button is grayed out if the script is not
paused on a breakpoint.
Stops the debug mode. This button is grayed out if the program is not in debug
mode.
Positions or deletes the breakpoints.
Runs the current instruction, entering inside the invoked functions if necessary, as
long as they are present in the *.xgs file. This button is grayed out if the script is
not paused on a breakpoint.
Runs the current instruction, without entering inside the invoked functions. This

Page 265

button is grayed out if the script is not paused on a breakpoint.


Runs the current instruction, and exits the current function to move up to the
calling instruction. This button is grayed out if the script is not paused on a
breakpoint.
Displays a variable when the script is paused on a breakpoint. This button is
grayed out if the script is not paused on a breakpoint.
Exits the script editor.

Symbols of the script editor


Breakpoint.
Next line to be run.
Line with an error detected by the script engine when running.

Displaying a variable
Position the breakpoint(s).

Start the Debug phase.


Load the software window relating to the script to be debugged. When the script stops running on a
breakpoint, the content of a variable can be displayed by carrying out the following steps:
Select the variable:

Click this button.


The following window is displayed:

Page 266

Variable name
Value

Run with error


No script analysis is carried out by the software. The only syntax analysis carried out takes place when
running the Microsoft VBScript engine. As a result, only the errors on the lines run are taken into account.
Error messages all take the following form:

If you answer Yes, the debugger appears, loads the script file and highlights the line containing the error,
giving a specific icon associated with a run error.

Page 267

Lock windows
This function is used to lock any movement and modification of the size of the windows.

Page 268

Enable sound effects


This function is used to choose whether or not sound effects will be used to indicate system events, such as
probing, taking of reference marks, the end of the program and help in the measuring of edges.
For this, check that the computer being used has a sound card and speakers.
In the Windows task bar, select Start > Settings > Control panel.

Click this button. The following window is then displayed:

You can then associate a software event with a sound in Wav format.
Click this button to apply the choices made.

Note: This sound configuration may not work directly after installing the software in Windows 2000. To
resolve this problem, you need to use the Mt2wav.reg file by double-clicking on it. This is used to add sound
events to the existing list.

Page 269

Enable highlighting
This option is used to enable or disable highlighting of the active feature in the database and in the Results
window, so as to make it easier to distinguish in the 3D view.
The highlighting color, yellow by default, can be modified using the options of the 3D view.
In the 3D view menu, select Rendering > Colors or click the

icon in the graphic view bar.

Page 270

Automated backup
Used to enable or disable automated backup.
The following window opens, and is used to give the saving frequency:

When this box is checked, the automated backup is active.

determines the saving frequency.


validates the window, the first backup is then carried out.
closes the window without applying any changes made.

The file $$AUTO.wk2 and its five associated files are saved:
- either in the software installation directory
- or in the directory designated by the environment variable
If required, select the option Recover automated backup from the File menu.

Warning: The automated backup does not mean the user should no longer carry out regular backups
in order to avoid losing information.

Page 271

Units
This function is used to choose the units in which the following are given: measurement, angles, temperature,
deviations, geometrical tolerances, statistics and the precision in reading numerical values.
In the Preferences menu, a dot indicates the type of display used:

Page 272

Millimeters/Inches

Used to choose the measurement unit.


The unit used is shown in the software Status bar, located in the lower part of the window.
is shown if millimeters are chosen as the current unit.
is shown if inches are chosen as the current unit.

Page 273

Decimal degrees/Degrees DMS/Grads

Used to choose the unit in which angles are given.


The unit used can be seen in the software Status bar located in the lower part of the window.
is shown if decimal degrees are chosen as the current unit.
is shown if degrees DMS are chosen as the current unit.
is shown if grads are chosen as the current unit.

Page 274

Celsius/Fahrenheit

Used to choose the unit in which the temperature is given.


When the Workpiece temperature compensation is active, it is possible to see which compensation unit
is used in the software Status bar:
is shown if the compensation unit used is degrees Celsius.
is shown if the compensation unit used is degrees Fahrenheit.

Page 275

Pressure

In the event of connection with a laser, this option is used to choose the unit of pressure.
The unit used can be seen in the laser status bar:

Hectopascal (hPa)

Millibar (mb)

Millimeter of mercury (mmHg)

Inch of mercury (inHg)

Page 276

Form fault/Standard deviation

Used to choose between displaying the form fault and displaying the standard deviation in the Results
window.

Form fault
This is the sum of the distances of the points furthest from the calculated feature.
Example:
In the example of the line D below, the form fault F.F. = d1+ d2.

In the example below, a form fault (F.F.) of 0.010 mm appears on the last line of the Results window:

Standard deviation
This is the average deviation between the probed points and the calculated feature.
In the example below, a standard deviation (SDEV) of 0.004 mm appears on the last line of the Results
window:

Page 277

IJK/Projected angle

Used to choose how the angles of the features will be given.

The IJK option is used to display in the Results window the components of the normal for the selected
feature:

The Projected angle option is used to display in the Results window the angles formed by the normal of the
selected feature with the axes of the alignment associated with the CAD:

Page 278

ISO, ASME

Used to choose the standards system used during the evaluation of the geometrical tolerances.
For example, the calculation of the profile tolerance on the cone in the ASME (American) standard requires
the prior definition of the cone, in order to apply a constraint on the opening angle during the calculation. For
the ISO standard, however, this operation is not necessary since the calculation applies only to the
measured feature.
The choices between ASME+ or ISO+ are an extension of ASME or ISO standards, that consist in adding
new calculation methods by modifying certain calculation methods. Note that the conformity of the standard
cannot be perfectly complied with.

Page 279

Precision

Used to choose the precision when reading numerical values in the results window as well as in the stickers
of the 3D view. You can then specify the number of digits after the decimal point (between 1 and 6) for the
units of length (millimeters and inches) and for the angle units (decimal degrees and grads).

Warning: This function cannot be used to configure the precision display in the reports editor. In this
case, this configuration takes place when inserting a results table.

Note: When a number greater (i.e. with more decimal places) than the current accuracy is entered or
the accuracy is changed, the software displays a rounded number. However, the entire number is stored in
memory and when you switch to a greater accuracy, the exact number entered is displayed.

Page 280

Statistical units

Used to choose between displaying the standard deviation or the deviation of the variance in the Results
window in statistical mode. In the Preferences menu, a dot indicates the type of display used.

The standard deviation is the mean of the deviations between the probed points and the calculated feature.
In the following example, the

icon indicates that the Results window is in statistical mode.

The standard deviation appears in the Std. D column:

The variance is the square of the standard deviation.


In the following example, the

icon indicates that the Results window is in statistical mode.

The variance appears in the Var. column:

See also:

Statistical results.

Page 281

Material position symbols

Used to give symbols (letters) to show the direction of the deviations for a measurement. These symbols
therefore replace the + or - sign for a deviation.

ISO standard
To use the French standard, select the option F/B - I/O - H/L from the menu:

The convention in a vehicle alignment is as follows:

X axis:
B: Back: the deviation is in X+
F: Front: the deviation is in XY axis:
I: In: the deviation is inside the vehicle
O: Out: the deviation is outside the vehicle
Z axis:
H: High: the deviation is in Z+
L: Low: the deviation is in Z-

In the following example, the SURF_PNT feature displays the deviations on the three axes:

In the Dev. column:


F: 0.002 indicates a negative deviation of 0.002 mm on X.
O: 0.020 indicates a deviation outside the vehicle of 0.020 mm on Y.
H: 0.002 indicates a positive deviation of 0.002 mm on Z.
In the following example, the SURF_PNT feature does not have any deviation:

Page 282

American standard
To use the American standard, select the option F/A - I/O - H/L from the menu:

In this case, F means "Fore" and A means "Aft".


Once the American standard has been selected, the Results window appears as follows:

Page 283

Use the type of coordinates of the nominal

Used to keep a type of coordinates through different actions:

When measuring a feature in static mode, the probing / via point instructions are learned using the
same coordinate system as that of the feature concerned.

Example: Measuring a circle defined in spherical coordinates. The tooltip on the program line allows
the coordinate system to be checked:

The tooltips on the probing / via point program lines allow for checking that the coordinate system is kept:

Page 284

When constructing a feature, it i constructed using the same coordinate system as that of its
reference features. Caution: source features must be at least defined.
Example: Constructing a circle by projection.

The PLN1 and CIR1 features are defined and measured in a spherical coordinate system.
The CIR2 circle is constructed as follows:

Page 285

Its coordinate system can be checked by opening the results window and its edit window:

Page 286

Important note: If the Use the type of coordionates of the nominal option is unchecked, the defaut
coordinate system used is the cartesian system.

Page 287

Point representation
This function allows the type of graphical representation to be used for the points database (geometrical or
surface points) to be selected: cross or square.

Example

Cross representation

Square representation

Page 288

Advanced parameters (Managing INI files)


This option is used to modify the INI files from the software, selecting the option Advanced Parameters
option from the Preferences menu.

Warning: This option can only be accessed by administrators.


The window is shown below:

The four tabs correspond to the four main INI files:


metropass.ini (if the metropass user is connected)
XG.DME.ini
XG.CONFIG.ini
metropassui.ini (if the metropass user is connected)

The columns correspond to the variables: Name, Section, Value and Description. These can be sorted in
alphabetical order by clicking on the heading of the column.

The values which can be modified are displayed in black. To modify them, double-click on the value. Once

Page 289

modified, they appear in red:

Click this button to search for a value in the currently selected file.
The search is carried out on the name and the section:

The result of the search is displayed in yellow:

To search for the next occurrence likely to correspond to the request, click the search button again.

INI files may be exported to a *.txt file. To do this, press the

key and click the

button.

Four files then appear in the software installation folder:


- in the default file C:\Program Files\Metrologic Group\Metrolog XG\USERS: XG_CONFIG.txt and
XG_DME.txt
- in the default file C:\Program Files\Metrologic Group\Metrolog XG\USERS: username.txt and
UIusername.txt.

Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.
Click this button to apply the changes made and close the window.
The following message is displayed to inform you that the changes will only be applied when you restart the
software:

When you accept the message, the software offers to restart immediately.

Page 290

Clicking
shuts down the application after offering to save any changes made to the
current working session, the probes file or the program, as appropriate.
Clicking
restarted.

closes the dialog box. The changes will only be applied when the software is

When the application has restarted, the changes are applied to the modified features.

Page 291

Default feature name

This function can be accessed via the menu Preferences > Advanced parameters. It is used to change
the default names of all defined, constructed or measured features.

Click the

button to sort the variables by name.

Then search for lines starting with "PREFIX_".


To change the default name of a feature, two variables must be modified:
modifies the default name of the corresponding entity, in this case the
circle feature.
confirms whether or not the new default name is to be used. This variable
can only have 0 or 1 as values.
The
column specifies which feature is affected by the variable
concerned. For a circle, the following description is obtained:
After locating the line corresponding to the feature whose default name is to be changed, double-click the
empty cell in the

column to edit the field.

Page 292

Enter the new default feature name.

Confirm the change by clicking elsewhere in the window. The modified line is displayed in red to show that
changes have been made.

Page 293

Repeat the operation for the line PREFIX_USE_xxx, used to enable the new default name.
Enter a value of 1 to enable the change or 0 to disable it.

Example:
Before:

After:

Page 294

Notes:

If the value of the PREFIX_USE_xxx variable is 1 and no name has been entered in the PREFIX_xxx
field, the software will assign "1" as default name, then "2" and continue like this each time a new
entity is created.
If the variable enabling the default name is set to 0, and no name has been entered in the default
feature name field, the software will assign the name provided by default. For example, for a circle,
the name will be CERC, even if the value of the variable is CERCLE.

Page 295

Feature name incrementation in the measurement windows

Feature names in measurement windows


This function is accessed via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters. It is used to select the
incremental naming mode for the next feature to be measured.

In the Advanced Parameters window, find the INCREMENTALNAMINGMODE parameter.


When the value of this parameter is 0 (default mode), the software offers the first feature that has been
defined but not measured when the measurement window is opened.
When the value of this parameter is 1, the software proposes the name of the last feature measured
incremented by 1.

Examples: for a point, with INCREMENTALNAMINGMODE = 1

If there is no existing point, the software proposes POIN1 when the measurement window is opened.
If POIN1 has already been measured, the software proposes POIN2 when the measurement window
is opened.
If POIN1 and POIN2 have already been measured and the current measurement is for POIN5, the
software proposes POIN6 when the measurement window is next opened.
If POIN2 has already been measured and the current measurement is for POIN1, the software
proposes POIN3 when the measurement window is next opened.

Page 296

If POIN1 and POIN6 have already been measured and the current measurement is for POIN2, the
software proposes POIN3 and not POIN7 when the measurement window is next opened. This is
because the last feature measured was POIN2, thus incremental naming mode operates as follows:
POIN2 + 1 = POIN3

Feature names in other windows


Parameter FORMATTED:
When the value of this parameter is 1 (default mode), the software increments the name of features according
to the following method considering any 0 placed before the number of the feature.

Example: If point POIN001 is measured, the next proposed point is POIN002.

When the value of this parameter is 0, the software ignores all 0.

Example: If point POIN001 is measured, the next proposed point is POIN2.


This parameter applies to:

the names of features (including any type of surface point)


the names of alignments
the names of probes
the names of calibration spheres
the names of views
the names of stations

Note: Use of the


The

key on the keyboard

key can be pressed to increment or decrement the name proposed in the drop-down list.

If POIN1 is selected, press


+ the up arrow to increment feature name. The software then
proposes POIN2, even if this point has not been defined.
If POIN3 is selected, press
+ the down arrow to decrement feature name. The software then
proposes POIN2, even if this point has not been defined.

Page 297

Configuring languages in the software


The language of the software can be changed in the software, without having to close the application or install
the software in all the required languages.
Simply select the required language from the Preferences > Language menu:

The language is changed immediately, in all the windows of the software, even if a definition, measurement or
construction window is open.
The next time the setup assistant is opened, the selected language for the software will be enabled.
The online help is opened in the current language of the software. However, if the online help in this language
has not been installed (component to be selected during installation of the software), by default the help file
will be in English, if this help has been installed.

Note: The software can easily be translated into a specific language, using a resources graphics editor
(texts). To do this, please contact your resales agent.

Page 298

CMM
The options available in this menu are used to configure the CMM and its associated components (rotary
table and probe/stylus changers).

Page 299

Set-up CNC Parameters


This option is used to modify and configure the default parameters of the CNC.
The window is shown below:

Carriage

This field is used to declare a CNC on the workstation and send this
information to the station(s) connected in Twin mode when a DMIS program is run.

Distances
Distance of the theoretical point at which the CMM slows down and switches to probing
mode.
Distance after the theoretical point during which the CMM is ready for probing.

Page 300

Distance to which the CMM retracts after probing, along the normal to the point probed.
The nominal probe deflection value to be maintained by the CMM during continuous
scanning may be entered.

Continuous Parameter Measurement:


Deflection adaptative movement (servo deflection) gives enhanced
measurement accuracy. Deflection is determined by the type of workpiece measured and desired probing
speed. This is due to the fact that, when a workpiece with major variations is measured, it is preferable to
plan for greater deflection in order to limit loss of contact between the probe and workpiece during
measurement, all the more so if probing speed is high.
Optical sensor
The sensor position changes according to the variation of height of the workpiece measured. If this option is
selected, the optical center of the sensor is automatically positioned at the maximum point of the scanline
measured. In case of loss of material, the movement continues to the theoretical direction.
This mode is automatically disabled during calibration. Hence theoretical calibration trajectories are not
affected.
Scanning (continuous) probe
When a scanning probe is detected, a new section is created in the file XG_CONFIG.INI:
[Mesure_Auto]
Enfoncement_Max=0.5
Enfoncement_Min=0.02
These parameters give a deflection interval for measurement. When probing operations are performed outside
this interval, they are not used for calculation of the feature.

Page 301

(a): probing operations used for feature calculation.


(b): probing operations eliminated from feature calculation.

Note: For surface points, if certain probing operations are outside the validation interval, they are
eliminated and the corresponding surface points are not created.

CNC protocol determines whether the approach and retraction distances can be handled separately. If not,
the line allowing retraction distance to be entered will not be available. Retraction distance will then be equal
to approach distance.
According to CNC type, there are thus two possible cases:
CNC that does not handle Retract distance

CNC that handles Retract distance

Page 302

When an automatic measurement is made in continuous and cont. no


retraction mode, this perce,tage goves the number of valid points needed to accept the measurement. If the
number of valid points is less than the percentage given, a warning message appears at the end of the
measurement sequence.

Round Corners
and
These spheres allow paths to be optimized by applying a
curve to each change of direction. This allows jerks at changes of direction to be avoided, such jerks being
damageable to correct CNC operation.

The path shown as a dashed red line is the path obtained if clearance sphere diameter is 0.
The path shown as a green curve is the path taken by the CNC when clearance sphere
diameter is 12.
Note: Only a sphere around a clearance point can be configured.

Warning: Near an edge, an incorrectly calculated clearance sphere may result in a probe collision.

Page 303

Speed
Probing, low, and high speeds may be configured in the CNC Settings window. Such configuration may be
performed in two ways:

By directly entering the desired values in the corresponding fields.

Note: Scanning speed is the speed of movement of the CMM used for continuous (scanning) feature
measurement (on a Metrologic group CNC). This applies to measurement by scanning, point scanning,
Scanning Gasket.

By clicking this button to open the following window:

There is a cursor for each type of speed. Adjust the cursor to set a percentage of the CNC's speed
capabilities. True speed is shown below each column.

Warning: Probing speed must not exceed 25 mm/s, otherwise the probe may be damaged and
inconsistent measurement deviations produced.

Accept
When you have configured the different distances and speeds, click this button to apply your

Page 304

changes.
This button is reserved for specific use of LK controllers. When the user is connected to a CNC, this
button may be used to refer to the controller values and retrieve the maximum perrmissible speed and
movement values.

Close
Click this button to close the CNC Settings window.

In program: When the CNC is configured, the following lines are added to the program:

Page 305

Reset Scales
This function is used to reset CMM alignment.
The window is shown below:

CMM alignment may be reset in different ways:

Manually, at the desired location


Move the CMM to the desired location, then click the buttons corresponding to each axis (
;

) to reset the CMM.

Manually, at the origin of the scales


Move the CMM in the three axes. When it passes the reference marks on the scales, the corresponding axis
is reset. The taking of the reference marks is accompanied by an audio signal (beep) if sounds effects are
enabled.

Automatically, for a CNC


When this button is clicked, the CMM automatically searches for its reference marks and resets
its scales.

Note: The offset values, in the right part of the window, have no influence o this button.

Page 306

By using offsets
The fields in the right part of the window represent the offset values on the respective CMM axes. Thus, a
CMM zero can be configured in lthe software even if it is not at the physical zero of the CMM.
The offset values to be indicated are valid in the CMM alignment.
As above, it is possible to click on the buttons corresponding to the (

) axes in order to initialize the counters. The position display window then shows the position
entered in t he offset values.

Note: This function is not accessible when using a 23-parameter compensation.

to close the window (any changes made are saved).

Notes:

This function can be used in a program.

The following line is displayed:

An additional field is displayed for CMMs with a rotary table, allowing rotary table position to be
reset:

Page 307

High Speed
This feature allows switchover between high and low speed modes.
The symbol in front of the function (menu item) indicates that high speed mode is enabled.

In program: a line showing the speed mode used is added:


or

Note: Both the high and low speed values may be configured using the Set-up CNC Parameters
function.

Page 308

Positioning/Probing
This function is used to position the CMM in order to probe a point and also to create a via point in a program.
It may be accessed:
- Via the CMM menu, by clicking Positioning/Probing

- By using the
- Via the

key

icon located in the toolbar

Warning: This function may only be accessed if a probe has already been calibrated.

The following window is then displayed:

Page 309

Goto

used to select the desired operation: in this example, CMM positioning.

the via point icon is displayed.

Probe

used to select the desired operation: in this example, probing of a precise


point.

the probe icon is displayed.

Position

used to select the type of coordinates.

used to specify the coordinates of a point by entering them in the fields.


To obtain a value from the other two values, complete two of the three fields, then click the button
corresponding to the field with the unknown value:

Page 310

If a CAD file is used, this option allows you to click on the different types of CAD
entities to obtain the desired point.
The value obtained is the value for the nominal (theoretical) point on the CAD model offset in relation to the
normal of the approach vector.
It is likely that the surface clicked will not be the desired surface as surfaces are often superimposed. In this
case, use the
buttons to move the point to the nearest surfaces (see the diagram below). The first
surface offered is the nearest surface.

Page 311

means that the move will be made relative to the absolute (real) dimensions of the alignment.
means that the move will be made relative to the absolute (real) dimensions of the alignment plus
the deviation between the actual and nominal values of the feature in each axis. The features selected as
reference features must thus be defined (nominals) and measured (actuals) so that they are displayed in the
list of selectable features.

means that the move will be performed relative to current probe position.

Example: Probing relative to a plane


During Teach-in, define and measure plane P1. Then define and measure circle C1, Relative (R) to plane P1.
At execution, the software measures plane P2 and obtains a deviation that it includes to measure circle C2.
If measurement teach-in is performed in Absolute (A) mode, the deviation is not used:

Normal Vector
This function is only available when the window is in the Probe position.
It is used to modify the normal probing vector.

Select the approach vector values in the I, J and K fields. These are positive in the direction of the alignment
axes.
used to invert the normal vector.

CNC Distances

Page 312

The above fields are used to modify the values of the approach, search, and retract distances. By default,
these distances are those shown in the Set-up CNC Parameters window.
For a via point, the approach value is used to offset a point on the CAD file by this value, along the normal
vector. This allows via points to be created offline using the CAD file.

Example: Approach distance


Enter a value of 5 in the Approach field.
Click a point on the CAD model.
Then click this button to validate the point and apply the parameters entered.
The software will then offset the point by 5mm in the direction of the normal vector:

Page 313

Nominal / Use CNC


This function is used to:
- Take or validate a point by simulating CMM movement. This operation is displayed when a program is
created.
- Add a line in a program without moving the CMM. This operation is displayed when a program is created.

This function is used to:


- If the software is running while connected to a CMM, really position the CMM or probe at the specified
coordinates. This operation is displayed when a program is created.
- If the software is running offline, to position the CMM or to move the probe on the screen to the specified
coordinates. This operation is displayed when a program is created.

Notes:

In
position: These two actions only function if the software is ready for (awaiting) probing.
Otherwise, an error message is displayed informing the user that they are not ready for probing. The
counter showing the number of points probed in the measurement windows is incremented for each
point probed (theoretical (nominal) or real (actual) probing).

In
position: These two actions function, even if the software is not ready for (not
awaiting) probing. This allows command lines to be added in a program without having to perform
multiple operations. The counter showing the number of points probed in the measurement windows
is incremented for each point probed.
If a CAD file is used, there is a shortcut allowing via points to be directly created in a program. Click

the CAD model while holding the

key depressed.

Page 314

Close
closes the window without applying any changes made.

Note: Variables may be entered in the fields.


Right-click the CMM Positioning/Probing window, a pop-up (context) menu is displayed:

A list of variables is available either by configuring variables via Edit Information in the File menu, or existing
features in the database allow the probe to be positioned at the coordinates of the selected entity.
In the following example, the CMM will be positioned in the X axis, at the coordinates of point POIN1.

In program:

This function corresponds to via point teach-in. This type of point may be inserted
inside or outside a measurement group.

The following line is then displayed:

This function corresponds to probing point teach-in. It is only meaningful if used in a


measurement group.

The following line is then displayed:

Page 315

Gasket scan
This function is used to freely determine the probing path for scanning, in particular to scan a gasket.
Open the Gasket scan window to configure measurement by scanning and also the Measuring plane window
that will then allow the measurement to be made.
The window is shown below:

Select the type of point clicked from Surface, Edge, Curve or Point.

Note: The first point clicked determines the plane of the Gasket. In Curve mode, the first point is
projected on the CAD model.
This field is only available in Edge mode. It allows an offset to be entered with respect to
the selected edge.
The number of points remaining to be clicked to define the current path is displayed in this field
(cannot be edited).

Page 316

Different types of path definition are available. These may be combined to scan the plane.

Corner mode polyline

The path is generated by clicking the corners of a polyline.


When Angular mode is selected, the lines are connected end to end:

Page 317

When Radius mode is selected, a circular path is created between each linear path. Radius value is entered
in the adjacent field.

If the previous path is an arc, Tangent mode creates a line tangential to the circle and passing through the
point clicked:

Two point mode polyline

Page 318

The path is generated by clicking the polyline lines at two points. The path passes through the intersection of
these two lines.
When Angular mode is selected, the path is generated as follows:

When Radius mode is selected, a circular path is created between each linear path. Radius value is entered
in the adjacent field.

Page 319

Arc

The path is generated by clicking three points on a circle (two in tangent mode):

Page 320

When Angular mode is selected, the arcs are connected as follows:

When Radius mode is selected, the circle is connected to the previous path by an arc. Radius value is
entered in the adjacent field.

Tangent mode creates an arc tangential to the circle and passing through the point clicked. Arc radius value
is entered in the adjacent field.

Page 321

Arc-line-arc

The path is generated by connecting the last arc to the new arc (clicked at three points) by a line tangential
to the two arcs:

Page 322

used to delete the last path or last point clicked if the path has not been generated.

used to delete all paths.

used to delete the selected path in order to add new paths.

Example: Using the insert funtion


The following paths have been generated:

Page 323

To improve the line plotted around the hole, path 8 is selected. It is then displayed highlighted in the Gasket
scan window and in pink in the 3D View.

The insert function is enabled by clicking the

Paths 2 to 7 are deleted by clicking the

button.

button the appropriate number of times:

Page 324

The Arc method is selected to re-define the line around the hole:

Page 325

Finally, reclick the

button to close the path with a line:

Page 326

Notes:

When the insert function is enabled, the


of the insertion.

Click the

button is used to delete the last path located in front

button again after making the desired insertions, the path is closed with a line.

used to split the path into two paths. Click the location where the split is to be made. A point is added
at the location clicked in the 3D View.

used to select a path in the 3D View.

A list of the paths generated is displayed in the center of the window, showing the type and dimensions of
each path:

Page 327

The lower part of the window is used to determine measurement step and the approach
and retract distances.

Click this button to exit the window without performing scanning. The paths generated will not
be saved.
Click this button to launch measurement by Gasket scan via the measurement window.

In program mode: When this function is learned in a program, the following lines are added:

The Gasket Contouring line can be edited. Double-clicking it opens the Gasket scan window, allowing the
paths to be modified if necessary.

Warning: The Gasket scan window is independent. It may therefore be used without the measurement
window being open. In this case, the probing path will be generated, but the plane will not be measured.

Page 328

Define security position


This function is used to define (configure) a security position. The measurement system (CMM) can then be
set to this position in a program.
The following window is displayed:

Select the desired type of coordinates from: Cartesian, Spherical, Cylindrical X,


Cylindrical Y, or Cylindrical Z.

Allows security position coordinates to be manually entered.

Allows current probe position coordinates to be automatically entered.


Click this button to confirm the settings entered.
Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

In program mode: This function may be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 329

Go to security position
This function allows the measurement system (CMM) to be set to a security position previously defined via
the Define security position function.

In program mode: This function may be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 330

Use Joysticks in PCS


When this function is enabled, the relevant button in the CMM menu is shown depressed:

This function is only operational if a workpiece alignment has been created.


It allows the CMM to move according to the axes of the workpiece alignment.
This is useful when:
- The software is connected to a CMM
- A console is used to control the CMM
- The alignment created in the working session is not aligned with the real axes of the CMM.
In this case, the X, Y, Z joysticks of the console move according to the X, Y, Z axes of the alignment created.

Page 331

Clearance Planes
This function is used for automatic management of via points and to activate probes according to the features
to be measured.

The window is shown below:

This window is divided into two distinct sections:

Clearance Plane:

Page 332

Enables the containing box to be enabled in Auto mode or in Manual mode.


It shows a preview of the 3D View as well as displaying the planes selected.
Sets the size and position of the containing box and displays the drawing of the box in 3D View.
Auto.Probe Activation:

Automatically enables the probe relative to the feature or probing operations.


Sets up an angular tolerance for enabled probes.
Defines new probes.

Select / unselect planes


In Auto or Manuel mode, all or just part of the planes that make up the containing box can be selected.
Unselects all the alignments.
Selects all the alignments.

Using the mouse in the 3D view preview of the window to select/unselect all
planes:
- Left-click: selects/unselects the plane which has been clicked.
- Left-click +

: selects the plane which has been clicked only (the others are unselected).

- Left-click +
- Left-click +

: selects all planes (the same as


+

).

: unselects all planes (the same as

).

- Right-click and hold + moving the mouse: changes the orientation of the graphic view for the selection
of planes

Examples:

All planes selected

No plane selected

Page 333

Three planes selected

The name of the selected clearance planes is displayed to the right of the graphic view of the window. (e.g.:
X-; Y-; Z+)

NoClearance Plane

Disables clearance plane(s).

Clearance Planes - Auto

Page 334

Used to enable clearance planes and determine their offset relative to features and/or the CAD model.
The value of the margin defines the offset of all planes around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Clearance Planes - Manual

Activates clearance planes and manually determines the dimensions as well as the position of the containing
box around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Page 335

When the probe is inside the configured clearance plane, the following warning message is displayed:

Move the probe, either with the joystick, if connected to a CMM, or by using the Positioning/Probing function.

Box Drawing
Used to enable/disable display of a "container" box showing the clearance planes in the graphic view.
This box is a cube surrounding the nominal/actual (defined/measured) features and the CAD model (if open).

Auto. Probe Activation


the probe is not activated automatically.
used to automatically activate the probes according to the orientation of the feature to
be measured.
used to automatically activate the probes according to the orientation of the probing
points.
For more information, see Managing Probes.

Parameters

Page 336

Used to configure the angular tolerance for probe selection and automatic activation.
Used to enable/disable automatic definition of new probes.

to close the window (any changes made are saved).

Page 337

Managing Via Points

Via points are determined using clearance planes.


Via point offset is the distance between the CAD model and the clearance plane.

Clearance Planes - Auto

Page 338

Used to enable clearance planes and determine their offset relative to features and/or the CAD model.
The value of the margin defines the offset of all planes around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Clearance Planes - Manual

Activates clearance planes and manually determines the dimensions as well as the position of the containing
box around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Page 339

When the probe is inside the configured clearance plane, the following warning message is displayed:

Move the probe, either with the joystick, if connected to a CMM, or by using the Positioning/Probing function.

Box Drawing
Used to enable/disable display of a "container" box showing the clearance planes in the graphic view.
This box is a cube surrounding the nominal/actual (defined/measured) features, irrespective of whether or not
a CAD file is open.
It includes the feature located at the greatest distance from the other features.

Auto. Probe Activation


the probe is not activated automatically.

Parameters
Used to configure the angular tolerance for probe selection and automatic activation.
Used to enable/disable automatic definition of new probes.

Page 340

to close the window, any changes made are saved.

Example:
After measuring feature CYL1, the software must measure surface points on the small inclined plane.
To reach the next feature to be measured without a collision occurring, the software adds the required via
points on the clearance planes.
The probe, initially positioned over CYL1, skirts the upper clearance plane and creates a first via point on the
edge.
It then moves slightly down along the inclined plane to reach a second via point.
The measurement approach is then started.
Once the measurement has been made, a retraction distance equal to the offset between the container box
and the feature is applied to create a third via point.

Note: If program Teach-in mode is being used, these three via points are added to the surface point
measurement group.

Page 341

Managing Probes

Using clearance planes adjustable head position can be automatically managed according to the feature
measured.

Clearance Planes - Auto

Page 342

Used to enable clearance planes and determine their offset relative to features and/or the CAD model.
The value of the margin defines the offset of all planes around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Clearance Planes - Manual

Activates clearance planes and manually determines the dimensions as well as the position of the containing
box around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Page 343

When the probe is inside the configured clearance plane, the following warning message is displayed:

Move the probe, either with the joystick, if connected to a CMM, or by using the Positioning/Probing function.

Box Drawing
Used to enable/disable display of a box showing the clearance planes in the graphic view.
This box is a cube surrounding the nominal/actual (defined/measured) features, irrespective of whether or not
a CAD file is open.
It includes the feature located at the greatest distance from the other features.

Auto. Probe Activation


Three types of probe management are available:

the probe is not activated automatically.

: activates head positions so that the probe is aligned with the normal of the feature to
be measured for Plane, Circle, Rectangle, etc. features, or with the axis for Cone, Cylinder and Line features.

Example: Measuring two planes

: activates head positions so that the probe is aligned with the normal to the points to

be probed.

Example: Measuring a section

Page 344

Note : When the option Relative to Probing is activated, all via points between each probing are
removed. These via points are recalculated according to the clearance zone:

Page 345

If the adjustable head orientations required are present in the probes file, the software activates them.
If not, the software defines them (the

box must be checked).

For the software to be able to automatically define a new head orientation, the orientation must be within the
angular tolerance specified in the

field.

If the angular tolerance is too low, the following error message is displayed:

to continue with the current measurement with the active probe.


to cancel the current measurement and modify angular tolerance, if required.
When a new head orientation is activated, the following message is displayed:

to accept this head rotation.


to refuse head rotation and use the active probe.
to activate another, previously calibrated probe from the list.
to cancel head rotation and cancel the current measurement.

Notes: Change of head orientation

A small grey sphere appears in the 3D View on the display of an automatic probing path to indicate
that there will be a warning message for a change of head orientation.

Page 346

During a change of orientation of the head, a safety zone is calculated above the clearance zone so
that the probe remains out of the clearance box during the probe rotation. If the user decides to keep
this change of orientation (probe automatically calculated or selection of another probe), the probe
moves from the grey sphere to the center of this safety zone, performs the change of orientation, and
returns to the grey sphere position to continue the measurement path.

Parameters
Used to configure the angular tolerance for probe selection and automatic activation.
Used to enable/disable automatic definition of new probes.

Click this button to close the window.

Page 347

Expansion/Shrinking
This function may be used (for example) to:

Make measurements on a mold using the CAD file for the corresponding workpiece (that is not to the
same scale).
Make measurements on a workpiece by applying a coefficient obtained from calculation of an
Alignment by By Best-Fit (scale factor), or calculation of a distance (expansion coefficient for a
reference standard, for example).

It also allows the same measurement program to be used for workpieces of identical shape but with different
scale factors.
When this function is selected, the following window is displayed:

Disabled
This option is used to disable application of an expansion/shrinking coefficient. The coefficient is then
implicitly assigned a value of 1.

Expansion / Shrinking percentage


The X, Y and Z fields correspond to the expansion or shrinking percentage values to be applied in each axis.
The fields may be assigned positive or negative values.
If a null value is entered, no coefficient will be applied.

Page 348

Coefficient
Used to directly enter a coefficient that will be applied to all axes when features are measured.
This coefficient may also be obtained from the Alignment By Best-Fit calculation (=SCALE('REP4') for
example) or a mathematical formula.
Used to replace the existing coefficient with the new value entered or, if
not checked (selected), to combine the two values in order to calculate a new coefficient.

Example: Expansion/Shrinking enabled with a coefficient of 1.02. A new coefficient value is entered
(1.03). You may obtain either a new coefficient of 1.03 (by selecting the box), or a coefficient of 1.0506 (by
deselecting the box).

Distance
Used to select a Distance feature to obtain a new coefficient value:
by selecting it from the drop-down list,
or using the Browse Feature Database function.
The calculated coefficient then corresponds to (nominal value of the distance)/(actual value).

Calculated coefficient
Indicates the calculated coefficient.

Page 349

Alignment
Used to specify the alignment in which the expansion or shrinking coefficients are to be used.

Used to apply the calculated coefficient both to future measurements and also
to previously measured features.

Note: Only features that have really been probed will be affected by selecting this option. For example,
constructed features (thus with no probing points) will not be affected by this choice and therefore not moved.

MEASURED FEATURES
CONSTRUCTED FEATURES
COEFFICIENT = 2

used to apply the configured expansion/shrinking coefficient.

Page 350

closes the window without applying any changes made.

Calculating expansion/shrinking
Calculated dimension = Real dimension (Real dimension coefficient (in %))
If a negative value is entered, shrinking is applied.
If a positive value is entered, expansion is applied.
Values displayed in the Results
window:

With no expansion or shrinking: 90


10% expansion in the Z axis: 99
10% shrinking in the Z axis: 81

Example of use:
The user has the CAD file for a workpiece and must check the corresponding mold. The workpiece to be
inspected (the mold) is larger than the CAD model. The values measured on the mold must thus be "shrunk"
to match the CAD model. This means a negative coefficient must be entered in the software
Expansion/Shrinking window.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Create a new working session


Select the Expansion/Shrinking option
Enter the expansion or shrinking coefficients in the CMM alignment
Click "Accept" to confirm.
Calibrate a probe.
Create an alignment.

Warning: Use of this function may give inconsistent results. For this reason, it should be activated
before making any measurements.

Several indicators show that the Expansion/Shrinking function is enabled:


The counter in the measurement window is displayed in red:

Page 351

Function disabled
The

Function enabled

icon is displayed in the Status bar.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 352

Leapfrog Realignment
The Leapfrog Realignment function is used to match measurements made in different alignments
(coordinate systems).
It is used for:
- Measuring parts that have been moved.
- Making measurements with a poly-articulated arm or laser when the workpiece is of larger size than can be
handled by the measuring system.
Moreover, the Mirror function allows inaccessible features to be measured using a reflection system on
some types of laser CMMs.

Method to be applied for a part that has been moved:

To match the measurements made at position 1 with those made at position 2:


- Create the alignment REP1 for the first workpiece position (this alignment may be different to the CAD

Page 353

alignment).
- Make the desired measurements in this position.
- Move the workpiece to position 2.
- Create the alignment REP2, preferably using the same type of alignment and features to limit dispersion.
However, a different type of alignment and features may be used. Although, in this case, the alignment
position and orientation must be the same as those of alignment REP1 (with respect to the workpiece).
- The CAD alignment may be activated.
- Select the Leapfrog Realignment option from the CMM menu.
The following window is displayed:

- Select measurement from REP2 (unpositioned alignment) to REP1 (alignment in position).


-

Click this button to apply the settings entered.

- Measurements are now made with the Leapfrog Realignment function enabled.
Thus, features measured in position 2 are automatically transferred to position 1.
closes the window without applying any changes made.

Method to be applied for measurement with a poly-articulated arm or laser tracker:


To match the measurements made with the arm in position 1 and those made with the arm in position 2:
- Create the alignment REP1 with the arm in position 1.
- Associate it to the CAD alignment, if a CAD file is used.

Page 354

- Make the desired measurements.


- Move the arm to position 2.
- Create the alignment REP2,, preferably using the same type of alignment as for alignment REP1 to limit
dispersions.

- Select the Leapfrog Realignment option.


- It is preferable to activate REP1.
The following window is displayed:

Page 355

- Select measurement from REP2 (unpositioned alignment) to REP1 (alignment in position).


-

Click this button to apply the settings entered.

- Measure the desired geometrical or surface features. The features measured in position 2 will thus
automatically undergo the translations and rotations required to bring them to position 1.
If making measurements at additional positions, the function must be disabled before the alignment for the
following position is created.
When the alignment has been created, reactivate the function and select measurement from REP3
(unpositioned alignment) to REP1 (alignment in position).

closes the window without applying any changes made.

Note: This function may also be used to measure workpieces of larger size than the CMM can handle.
However, it should be noted that using this method will result in reduced measurement quality.

Method to be applied when measuring with a laser tracker and the Mirror function:
To measure features that cannot be accessed with the laser tracker but that can be accessed with the mirror:
- Perform direct measurement of a point feature. Preferably a target or a sphere: SPHE1 in the following
example.
- Measure the same feature using the mirror (measure the reflection). Assign it a different name. SPHE12 in
the following example.
- Select the Leapfrog Realignment option.
The following window is displayed:

- Check (select) the Mirror box and select the features SPHE1 and SPHE2 from the drop-down list.
The order of the features is not important as this function corresponds to a mirror symmetry.
- Click Accept.
- Inaccessible features may now be measured using the mirror.

Page 356

Important note: This function is automatically shutdown during a calibration.

In program:
These functions may be programmed, the following lines are then added:
Leapfrog Realignment only:

Mirror:

The two functions combined:

Function cancelled:

Page 357

Workpiece Temperature Compensation


This function is used to compensate measurements by taking the temperature of the workpiece to be
inspected into account.
The window is shown below:

Note: The temperature given in this window may be given in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending
on the temperature unit chosen.

Activate compensation
If the
box is checked (selected) and the temperature of the workpiece to be
inspected is other than 20C (68F), the software compensates the measured values. The units used may be
modified in the Preferences menu, by selecting Celsius, Fahrenheit.

Material

Page 358

To configure compensation, the material the workpiece to be inspected is made of must be selected from the
drop-down menu (opened via the
button).
The field specifying the linear expansion coefficient is automatically completed. This list may also be
manually completed by entering the name of the material and its expansion coefficient.

Example: Expansion coefficients for certain materials


Type of material

Expansion coefficient (in m/m/C, equivalent to ppm/C)

Mild steel
Aluminum
Silver
Bronze
Copper
Tin
Quartz
Gold
Nickel
Nickel (grain)
Nickel steel
Porcelain
Bismuth
Magnesium
Platinum
Lead
Tungsten
Glass
Zinc
Cast iron
Brass
Molybdenum
Cadmium
Constantan
Steatite
Wolfram

12.0000000000
23.8000000000
19.7
17.5000000000
16.5000000000
23.0000000000
0.5000000000
14.2000000000
13.0000000000
18.0000000000
1.50000000000
4.00000000000
13.5000000000
23.0000000000
9.0000000000
29.0000000000
4.0000000000
9.0000000000
30.0000000000
10.50000000000
18.5000000000
5.20000000000
30.0000000000
15.2000000000
8.5000000000
4.50000000000

Temperature
The value in the Temperature field must be entered manually. This is the temperature of the workpiece to be
inspected.
If this box is checked (selected), an automatic temperature reading may be used,
however, in this case, an acquisition board must be used.

Alignment
This field is used to specify the alignment to which the compensation is to be applied.

Page 359

Warning
Check this box to display a warning message when the temperature varies
by the deviation indicated in relation to the reference temperature, here 5. When the temperature is
exceeded, it is displayed on a red background in the status bar.
The frequency with which the temperature is monitored can be configured using a parameter. This is found in
Advanced Parameters, CONFIG tab, TEMPERATURE section:
UPDATE_TEMP_FREQ = time in milliseconds (by default 600,000).
This warning can be activated without applying a temperature compensation. To do this, simply apply a null
linear expansion coefficient.

After validating the window with this button, the


show that temperature compensation is enabled.

icon is displayed in the Status bar to

In the measurement windows, the probed points counter is then displayed in red:

Without compensation

With compensation

Click this button to close the window without saving any changes made.

In program:
This function can be used in a program.
When compensation is enabled, the following line is displayed:

When compensation is disabled, the following line is displayed:

Page 360

Automated compensation

Real-time temperature compensation requires to create the MTXGTemp.ini file into the software directory and
to modify its configuration file XG_CONFIG.ini.
The file XGTemp2U.dll is already in the software directory.

MTXGTemp.ini file parameter setting


In MTXGTemp.ini, define a mapping between logical sensor IDs (1 to n) and a physical channel on a PT104
box. Each PT104 box is connected to a serial port of the PC and can handle up to 4 temperature sensors.
Use the following syntax :

For resistance mode sensors:

The first number is the sensor ID, COM5 is the com port and the last number is the channel on the PT104
box (each PT104 has 4 channels, numbered 1 to 4).
[SENSOR]
1=COM5,1
...

For tension mode sensors:

The first number is the sensor ID, COM1 is the com port and the last number is the channel on the PT104
box (each PT104 has 4 channels, numbered 1 to 4). Two more parameters have to be entered compared to
resistance mode sensors, VOLT: Gain, Offset.
[SENSOR]
4=COM1,4,VOLT:31.4,-11.1

The two modes can be mixed together, which means you can use at the same time both resistance and
tension mode sensors.
[SENSOR]
1=COM5,1
4=COM1,4,VOLT:31.4,-11.1

Define as well the electrical network frequency, in the [MAINS] section (for instance 50Htz in France, 60Htz
in the United States). The syntax is as bellow :
[MAINS]
FREQ=
An offset value may also be entered for each sensor. The offset value must be expressed in degrees Celsius
and may be either positive or negative.
[SENSOR]
1=COM5,1, OFFSET:1.5

XG_CONFIG.ini file parameter setting

Page 361

In the XG_CONFIG.ini file, set-up the following parameters:


[TEMPERATURE]
PART_SENSORS=...
X_SENSORS=...
Y_SENSORS=...
Z_SENSORS=...
X_COEF=...
Y_COEF=...
Z_COEF=...
REF_TEMP=
The ..._SENSORS parameters should define one or several sensor IDs. When more than one sensor ID is
listed for one parameter, the software will use the mean temperature of the listed sensors.

It is necessary to fill in the 3 coefs X_COEF, Y_COEF and Z_COEF with the correct values for the particular
machine. These coefficients should be given by the machine manufacturer. The coefs must be given in ppm
(part per million), so the values should be roughly around 10.0...
The REF_TEMP parameter equals the temperature when the technician has initially compensated the
machine. Basically, this temperature is the reference temperature for the software, from which temperature
compensation are applied to the machine axis. It means that for the REF_TEMP temperature, no
compensation are applied to the machine axis. This parameter has to be set by hand directly in the
XG_CONFIG.INI file.

Example :
Settings for 7 temperature sensors connected on two PT104 boxes. There are two sensors per axis and one
sensor for the workpiece.
PT104#1 is connected on COM5 and PT104#2 on COM6.

Page 362

Compensation method
All temperatures (part as well as machine axis) will be "latched" when you (or the part program) activate part
temperature compensation. These memorized values will be used for compensation until you (or the part
program) deactivate it (or activate it again).
We must assume that temperature stays approx. constant while measuring one workpiece.
Activate temperature compensation just before starting the measurement process of a workpiece and
deactivate it as soon as measurement is complete.
When measuring several workpieces on a palet, you may re-activate the temp. compensation in-between the
different workpieces to adapt for slow shifts in temperature. Never change the temperature compensation
within the measurement process of one single workpiece.

Page 363

Notes :

Axis temperature compensations require an option in the software.


Sensors have to be connected via the three wires mode, which is the only one supported by the
software:

Page 364

Rotary Table
The rotary table is a mechanical device allowing the orientation of a workpiece installed on a CMM to be
changed. A change in orientation may be required to enable access to the features composing the measured
workpiece.
The calibration performed by the software allows the center of rotation and orientation of the rotary table to be
determined, but DOES NOT COVER mechanical or software calibration of the rotary table.

Page 365

Move

This function allows the rotary table to be orientated at a given angle.


Positioning is performed in the following window:

This field is used to set rotary table angle.

This part of the window is used to select Relative movement (with respect to the current
position) or Absolute movement (with respect to 0).

Use the
button to select the direction of rotation. Rotation may be performed in
the clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
If the Shortest Distance option is selected, the rotary table will turn in the direction allowing it to arrive the
most quickly at the desired position.

Rotary table position is displayed in the DRO position window as a fourth axis:

Page 366

The parameters of this window may need to be modified for rotary table position to be visible.

Click this button to position the rotary table according to the parameters
entered.

Closes the window without positioning the rotary table.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 367

Calibrate Rotary Table

This function allows the position and orientation of the axis of rotation of the rotary table to be determined.
This calibration must be performed to allow rotary table compensation and thus the features measured in the
active alignment to be computed whatever the position of the rotary table.
Calibration is performed via the following window:

Calibration procedure
- Check the rotary table is disabled (see the Activate menu).
- Measure the same sphere with the rotary table in at least three different positions.

Page 368

- Open the calibration window.


- Select the spheres measured by holding the Ctrl key down. The spheres must be displayed in increasing
order of rotary table angle (in the above example, 0, 45, 90,...), given that the table turns in the trignometric
direction.
-

If the spheres are not in the correct order, use the arrows to change their position in the list.

Click this button to start calibration.

The features resulting from rotary table calibration (circle, line and point) are then displayed in the database.
Rotary table calibration is automatically saved by the software so that this procedure does not need to be
performed at each startup.

closes the window without applying any changes made.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following lines are then added:

Page 369

Activate Rotary Table

This function is used to enable/disable rotary table compensation, i.e. to apply its angular coordinates.
Rotary table compensation can be viewed in two ways:

In the toolbar:

Rotary table enabled

Rotary table disabled

In the position display window:

Rotary table enabled

Rotary table disabled

Warning: When rotary table compensation is enabled, probe calibration cannot be performed as this
may result in inconsistent results being obtained.

Note: When a tool calibration or change is performed, the rotary table is automatically disabled then
re-enabled.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 370

Set-up Rotary Table

This function is used to configure the speed of rotation of the rotary table (in degrees per second) in the
following window:

Click this button to configure rotary table speed according to the parameters
entered.

Closes the window without configuring rotary table speed.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 371

Probe/Stylus Changers
This function allows probe and stylus changers to be configured and used when a probe and/or stylus
changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant.

Activate changer
To enable or disable use of changers. The symbol at the start of the line is depressed when the changer(s)
are activated.

Set-up Calibration
Used to enter specific information on the current probe file. This information allows the changer(s) to be used
correctly. It is displayed in the Edit information window of the Probes menu.
The window differs according to the type of changer used:

or

Define Slot

Page 372

To associate a slot to the local alignment created. This information is entered in the window that is then
displayed:

Store Probe in Slot


Used to store the probe being used in the slot shown, without activating another one.
When this option is selected, the following warning message is displayed before the machine moves:

Edit information
Used to modify the name of the current slot. The edit window differs depending on the configuration being
used in the software:

if a probe changer is used.

Page 373

if a stylus changer is used.

if both types of changers are used


simultaneously.

Click this button to apply the changes made and close the window.
Click this button to exit the window without saving the changes made.

Page 374

Probe Changers

The Renishaw ACR1 and ACR3 probe changers allow a probe to be changed during an automatic measuring
program, without operator intervention. This is only possible if the probes and head are equipped with the
autojoint connection and are perfectly aligned with each other.
To check this alignment, measure four geometrical points (ball center, for example) on the upper part of the
changer and check that they all have the same Z coordinate to +/- 0.01 mm. Then repeat the operation using
points on the side of the changer to check its alignment in the X or Y axes (depending on changer orientation
with respect to the axes of the machine) and check they have the same X or Y coordinates to +/- 0.01 mm.

Open the software Setup Assistant (XGSetupAssistant.exe) and check (select) the Probe changer box.
Then select the probe changer used from the corresponding drop-down list, as shown below:

Page 375

To be able to use a probe changer, the software must know the orientation and position of each slot in the
rack on the machine with respect to the probe connection. This calibration can only be performed if the
machine's reference marks have been taken. It is then reloaded automatically each time reference marks are
taken: it must therefore only be performed when probe changer position is changed.
This operation is used to copy the files containing the pick-up and put-down paths for the selected changer(s)
to the installation directory root: "getprob.dat" and "putprob.dat" for probe changers, "getstyl.dat" and
"putstyl.dat" for stylus changers.

Page 376

ACR1 Tool Changer

Description
The ACR1 is composed of two main parts: the probe rack and the control unit.

The rack

The rack comprises eight probe storage slots, the calibration probe and the display LEDs. Each slot is
equipped with a screwdriver allowing the probe connections to be locked and unlocked and a sliding flap. Flap
position is used by the control unit to detect rack status. Four flap wedges are provided to hold the flaps open
for certain phases of changer calibration.
The calibration probe is used in certain changer calibration phases to determine the position of the probe
connection with respect to the rack.

The ACC2 control unit

This manages rack operation (screwdriver control, probe switching, errors). Front panel LEDS display status
and the Reset button is used in the event of errors or to change mode.

The display LEDs

Page 377

Probe changer status is shown by LEDs on the rack and control unit. The following table shows their
functions. Two control unit LEDS are not mentioned: On/Off and Probe Status (current probe state, on (lit) if
the probe is active).

Operation
There are two operating modes:
DATUM 1: allows the flaps to be opened without generating a probe change cycle, thus allowing slot position
to be measured. Indicated on the rack by the Probe active and Change cycle LEDs coming on
simultaneously and on the control unit by the Rack ready LED flashing.
Transition to this mode is performed by pressing the Reset button on the control unit while maintaining one or
more changer flaps open.
This mode is exited either by closing the flaps (transition to DATUM 2 mode), or by pressing the Reset
button with the flaps closed (transition to normal mode).
DATUM 2: activates the calibration probe allowing probe connection measurement. Indicated on the rack by
the Cycle error and Lock error LEDS coming on simultaneously and on the control unit by the Rack active
LED flashing.
Transition to this mode is performed by switching to DATUM 1 mode and closing the flaps.
This mode is exited either by opening one or more flaps (transition to DATUM 1 mode), or by pressing the
Reset button with the flaps closed (transition to normal mode).

Page 378

Note: Meaning of error messages:


Rack not connected: the control unit is powered but the rack is not connected.
Cycle time out (exceeded): ten seconds after the screwdriver command, the flaps were still not closed.
Overtravel: the probe rack allows 7mm overtravel down and to the rear. An overtravel detector triggers an
"overtravel" error of 0.5 to 1.5 mm.

Calibration
Warning: It is important to make sure that the changer is correctly aligned with the machine axes. To
do this, probe 4 ball center geometrical points on the plane above the changer and check that they are
aligned in the Z axis to at least one tenth of a millimeter. If this is not the case, use the adjustment screw on
the base of the changer to correct it. Follow the same procedure for the front face of the changer (X or Z axis
depending on the machine used).

ACR1 tool change calibration is a three-step procedure:

Configure probe changer alignment: used to define an alignment with the changer probe calibration
ball as origin.

- Measure the top of the rack (points A, B, C, D) as a plane.


- Measure the front of the rack (points E, F, G) as a line.
- Measure the changer probe calibration ball as a sphere (dia. 8mm).

Warning: The triggering force of the probe on the head must be less than that of the rack probe.

Create a Geometrical alignment orientated according to the normal of the previously probed plane and line
and with the ball center of the rack probe for origin, as shown in the diagram.

Configure probe connection position: calculate tool length to define the position of the probe
connection.

Remove the probe from the head using the wrench.

Page 379

Switch to DATUM 2 calibration mode to activate the rack probe. To do this:


- Maintain one or more flaps open,
- Press the Reset button on the probe changer control unit,
- Close all the flaps,
- Check that the rack probe is active.
Manually force probe ball diameter (8mm) by performing an artificial calibration of diameter 8 for the active
probe.
Probe a plane on the flat surface of the connection (points A, B, C, D).
Measure the diameter of the connection (points E, F, G, H) as a circle by selecting the previously probed
plane as projection feature. It is important that the machined part of the connection be correctly measured (if
there is one).

Re-install the probe on the head using the wrench (do not forget to move 5 back).
Evaluate the distance between the center of the circle and the center of the sphere by selecting the sphere
as reference feature so that probe length has the correct sign.

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration. The following window is
displayed:

Page 380

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer of which the position is
to be entered. Here, this is a Probe changer. As only a probe changer has been selected in the Setup
Assistant, Stylus cannot be selected.
The Probe Dimensions in the X, Y, and Z axes correspond to the components of the vector passing through
the center of the circle and the center of the changer ball.
used to select the distance feature corresponding to the calculated probe connection
dimension from the Features database.

Warning: If a stylus changer is used jointly with the ACR1 changer, certain precautions must be taken
when performing calibration. See the Using changers page.

Configure slot position: used to define the position of each slot.


Notes:

The program calibration_acr1.GM2 ( default location in the folder C:\Program


Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\ACR1) may be used in place of the following
procedure.
All the following measurements must be performed with the same calibrated probe.

Re-install the probe using the wrench (do not forget to move 5 degrees back).
Check that the adjustable head is in the position used for probe change operations.
Switch to DATUM 1 calibration mode to activate the probe on the head and inhibit flap opening being taken
into account. To do this:
- Maintain the flaps of the slots to be calibrated open with the wedges,
- Press the Reset button on the probe changer control unit,
- Check that the probe on the head is active.
Manually force ball diameter by performing an artificial calibration for the diameter calculated during the actual
(real) calibration performed previously, or re-calibrate the probe.

Run the program calibration_acr1.GM2 and follow the instructions using the photos as a guide, or follow the
instructions given below to calibrate the ACR1 changer manually:

Page 381

Probe the upper face of the connection as a plane (points A, B, C, D).

Probe the rounded part of the slot at approximately 3mm from the upper face as the arc of a circle (E, F, G,
H), with the previous plane selected as projection feature.

Create a Geometrical alignment orientated according to the normal of the measured plane on the upper
face and the line measured for rack alignment creation, with the center of the arc as origin.

Warning: The direction of the alignment axes must be as shown in the following diagram as the
alignment will be used for the probe put-down (storage) and pick-up sequences. For more information, see
the Advanced use page.

Page 382

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Define Slot. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer to be configured. In the
example, this is an "autochange" Probe changer slot. As only "Probes" has been selected in the Setup
Assistant, Stylus cannot be selected.
In the Reference field, enter a name to identify the slot being configured (it is advisable to use a name with a
number showing slot position).
In the Ref. Alignment field, select the previously created alignment.
The Head Angles field is automatically completed. It shows angles A and B of the adjustable head used
when the Define Slot window was opened.

Warning: Before this window is opened, adjustable head position must be the position that will be
used for probe changes.

Repeat the Set-up Calibration operation for each slot used.


Exit DATUM 1 calibration mode. To do this:
- Close all the flaps,
- Press the Reset button on the probe changer control unit,
- Check that the probe on the head is active.
The probe changer is now ready to be used.

Page 383

ACR3 Tool Changer

Description
This changer has four probe storage slots. Each slot is equipped with a screwdriver to unlock and lock the
probe connections and a sliding flap to protect the slot. Two flap wedges are provided to hold the flaps open
for certain calibration phases.
The probe connection is automatically locked and unlocked by a translational movement of the rack on its
mounting base. This pick-up/put-down movement is automatically performed by the software.

Calibration
Run the program calibration_acr3.GM2 (default location in the folder C:\Program
Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\ACR3) and follow the instructions using the photos as a
guide, or follow the instructions given below to calibrate the ACR3 changer manually:
Probe the upper face of the connection as a plane (points A, B, C, D).

Page 384

Probe the rounded part of the slot at approximately 3mm from the upper face as the arc of a circle (points E,
F, G, H), with the previous plane selected as projection feature.

Create a Geometrical alignment orientated according to the normal of the plane measured on the upper
face and a line measured along the changer with the arc as origin.

Warning: The direction of the alignment axes must be as shown in the following diagram as the
alignment will be used for the probe put-down (storage) and pick-up sequences, for more information, see the
Advanced use page.

Page 385

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Define Slot. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of slot to be configured. In the
example, this is an "autochange" Probe changer slot. As only a probe changer has been selected in the
Setup Assistant, Stylus cannot be selected.
In the Reference field, enter a name to identify the slot being configured (it is advisable to use a name with a
number showing slot position).
In the Ref. Alignment field, select the previously created alignment.
The Head Angles field is automatically completed. It shows angles A and B of the adjustable head used
when the Define Slot window is opened.

Warning: Before this window is opened, adjustable head position must be the position that will be
used for probe changes.

Repeat the Define Slot operation for each slot used.


The probe changer is now ready to be used.

Page 386

Zeiss probe changer - ST head

Description
The Zeiss tool (probe) changer is used to change probes fitted on an ST head. This changer may be used
with a Zeiss CNC or with an ME5007 CNC version XG 3.002 or higher. The controller must be version 2.35G.

Calibration
To configure slot position, use the program Zeiss_ST_Changer.gm2 (located by default in the folder
C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\Zeiss) and follow the instructions using the
photos as a guide or follow the instructions given below to calibrate the changer manually.
Probe a point Pt1, as shown in the following photo, with plane XY of the machine alignment as compensation
feature (if the head is orientated in the Z- axis):

Page 387

Then probe point Pt2 as shown:

Evaluate the distance between these two points, while selecting point Pt1 as reference feature so that probe
length has the correct sign.

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration. The following window is
displayed:

Page 388

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer of which the position is
to be entered. Here, this is a Probe changer. As only a probe changer has been selected in the Setup
Assistant, Stylus cannot be selected.
used to select the distance feature (from the Feature Database) corresponding to the
calculated dimension of the probe used for calibration.

Note: The X and Y values are not 0, they must be modified to obtain probe dimensions of type (0 ; 0 ;
-Z).

Probe the upper face of the slot as a plane:

Page 389

Probe a line along the slot:

Probe the rounded part of the slot at approximately 3mm from the upper face as a circle with the previous
plane selected as projection feature.

Page 390

Create a Geometrical alignment orientated according to the normal of the plane measured on the upper
face and the line measured along the slot with the center of the circle as origin.

Warning: The direction of the alignment axes must be as shown in the previous diagram as the
alignment will be used for the probe put-down (unloading) and pick-up (loading) sequences (for more
information on these two sequences, see the Advanced use section).
Repeat the plane, line and circle measurements and alignment creation procedure for each slot.
In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Define Slot. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer to be configured. In the
example, this is an "autochange" Probe changer. As only a probe changer has been selected in the Setup
Assistant, Stylus cannot be selected.
In the Reference field, enter a name to identify the slot being configured (it is advisable to use a name with a
number showing slot position).
In the Ref. Alignment field, select the previously created alignment.
The Head Angles field is automatically completed. It shows angles A and B of the adjustable head used
when the Set-up Calibration window is opened.

Warning: Before opening this window, make sure adjustable head position is the position that will be
used for probe changes.

Repeat the Define Slot operation for each slot used.


The probe changer is now ready to be used.

Page 391

FCR25 Tool Changer

Description
This changer has three storage slots in which the user can choose to store an SM25 module, a TM25
adaptor module allowing a TP20 module to be used, an SH25 continuous calibration stylus holder, or a TP20
module. This choice is made possible by the use of various accessories provided with the FCR25 changer.
Use of this type of changer is somewhat particular. If the FCR25 is used alone, it may be used as both a tool
changer and a stylus changer. In this case, an SM25 module, a TM25 adaptor module, a SH25 continuous
calibration stylus holder and a TP20 module may all be changed. If the FCR25 is used with an ACR1 or
ACR3 tool changer, it may only be used as a stylus changer. In this case, it may be used to change SM25
or TM25 modules fitted with SH25 calibration stylus holders or TP20 modules, or only to change SH25
calibration stylus holders. In the latter case, the SM25 module remains on the SP25 probe when it is stored
in the ACR1 or ACR3 tool changer.

Calibration
To configure slot position, use the program Calibration_SP25_rack_changer.GM2 (located by default in the
folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\SP25-SM25) and follow the instructions
using the photos as a guide.

Page 392

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration.

Probes changer

Enter the probe-stylus distance (Module unloading level - probe hit point) of the active calibrated probe as
shown below:

Page 393

Stylus changer

When the FCR25 is used as a stylus changer, it is not necessary to modify the calibration settings. The
window is shown below:

Edit Probes Information

If the FRC25 is used alone (both as a probe and stylus changer), a probes file must be assigned to each slot
that is to receive probe balls (probe module + stylus or stylus only). The Edit Probes Information window
should then be displayed as shown below:

If there is a common probe module for several styluses, the Probe Slot Reference and Stylus Slot
Reference fields are to be completed as follows:

Page 394

Probe Slot Reference corresponds to the module unloading slot.


Stylus Slot Reference corresponds to the stylus unloading slot.

If there is a probe + stylus module assembly, the Probe Slot Reference and Stylus Slot
Reference fields are to be completed as follows:

Page 395

Probe Slot Reference corresponds to the assembly unloading slot.


Stylus Slot Reference must not be entered.

In all cases, the Probe (dimensions) part of the Edit Probes Information window must not be
edited (the values must be left at zero). This is because the dimensions for the different modules are
directly taken into account by the FCR25 changer calibration program.

Page 396

Stylus Changers

The Renishaw SCR200, MCR20 and SCP80 stylus changers allow a stylus to be changed during an
automatic measuring program, without operator intervention. The SCR200 and MCR20 changers are
composed of a single part, the stylus rack. On the SCP80, each part corresponds to a stylus position. The
SCR200 is connected to a PI200 interface unit.
Open the software Setup Assistant (XGSetupAssistant.exe) and check (select) the Stylus changer box.
Then select the stylus changer to be used from the corresponding drop-down list, as shown below:

Calibration
To be able to use a stylus changer, the software must know the orientation and position of each slot in the
rack on the machine with respect to the probe connection. This calibration can only be performed if the
machine's reference marks have been taken. It is then reloaded automatically each time reference marks are
taken: it must therefore only be performed when stylus changer position is changed.

Page 397

FCR25 Tool Changer

Description
This changer has three storage slots in which the user can choose to store an SM25 module, a TM25
adaptor module allowing a TP20 module to be used, an SH25 continuous calibration stylus holder, or a TP20
module. This choice is made possible by the use of various accessories provided with the FCR25 changer.
Use of this type of changer is somewhat particular. If the FCR25 is used alone, it may be used as both a tool
changer and a stylus changer. In this case, an SM25 module, a TM25 adaptor module, a SH25 continuous
calibration stylus holder and a TP20 module may all be changed. If the FCR25 is used with an ACR1 or
ACR3 tool changer, it may only be used as a stylus changer. In this case, it may be used to change SM25
or TM25 modules fitted with SH25 calibration stylus holders or TP20 modules, or only to change SH25
calibration stylus holders. In the latter case, the SM25 module remains on the SP25 probe when it is stored
in the ACR1 or ACR3 tool changer.

Calibration
To configure slot position, use the program Calibration_SP25_rack_changer.GM2 (located by default in the
folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\SP25-SM25) and follow the instructions
using the photos as a guide.

Page 398

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration.

Probes changer

Enter the probe-stylus distance (Module unloading level - probe hit point) of the active calibrated probe as
shown below:

Page 399

Stylus changer

When the FCR25 is used as a stylus changer, it is not necessary to modify the calibration settings. The
window is shown below:

Edit Probes Information

If the FRC25 is used alone (both as a probe and stylus changer), a probes file must be assigned to each slot
that is to receive probe balls (probe module + stylus or stylus only). The Edit Probes Information window
should then be displayed as shown below:

If there is a common probe module for several styluses, the Probe Slot Reference and Stylus Slot
Reference fields are to be completed as follows:

Page 400

Probe Slot Reference corresponds to the module unloading slot.


Stylus Slot Reference corresponds to the stylus unloading slot.

If there is a probe + stylus module assembly, the Probe Slot Reference and Stylus Slot
Reference fields are to be completed as follows:

Page 401

Probe Slot Reference corresponds to the assembly unloading slot.


Stylus Slot Reference must not be entered.

In all cases, the Probe (dimensions) part of the Edit Probes Information window must not be
edited (the values must be left at zero). This is because the dimensions for the different modules are
directly taken into account by the FCR25 changer calibration program.

Page 402

MCR20 Stylus Changer

Description

The rack

This rack has six stylus storage slots. Each slot has a sliding flap:

Stylus changer loading

It is recommended that the MCR20 slots be loaded using a CNC with the TP20 probe. This ensures correct
stylus positioning and alignment when performing repeated stylus changes.
To calibrate the probes, the styli must be correctly connected to the TP20. To do this, make sure the stylus
is correctly assembled with the probe using the three alignment symbols shown below and located on the
TP20 and its module:

Page 403

Calibration

Configure stylus connection position

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration. The following window is
displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer of which the position is
to be entered. Here, this is a Stylus changer. As only a stylus changer has been selected in the Setup
Assistant, Probes cannot be selected.
used to select the type of stylus used.
The Stylus Length and Ball Diameter fields are automatically updated according to the type of stylus
selected. Stylus length may also be manually entered.

Warning: This operation must be performed to be able to configure slot positions.

Configure slot position

To configure slot position, use the program Calibration_MCR20.GM2 (located by default in the folder
C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\StylusChanger\Mcr20) and follow the instructions using the
photos as a guide or follow the instructions given below to calibrate the SCR200 changer manually.
Check that the adjustable head is in the position used for stylus change operations.
Open and retain slot 1.

Page 404

Probe the upper face of the central block of the stylus changer as a plane (PL1).

Note: Renishaw recommends use of a PS35R stylus. If you do not have this stylus, the length of the
stylus used must not exceed 20 mm and ball diameter 2 mm.

Measuring plane PL1


Construct a plane PL2 parallel to plane PL1 and located at a distance of -8.250.
For the first slot, probe lines L1, L2 and L3, using the parallel plane as projection feature.

Page 405

Measuring line L1

Page 406

Measuring line L2

Measuring line L3

Page 407

Construct line L4, located at a distance of 8.250 from line L1 and passing through plane PL2.
Construct the median line L5 between L2 and L3.
Construct the intersection point Pt1 between lines L4 and L5.
Create a Geometrical alignment orientated according to the normal of plane PL1 measured on the upper
face, with line L4 as direction and the point of intersection of lines L4 and L5 as origin.

Warning: The direction of the alignment axes must be as shown in the following diagram as the
alignment will be used for the stylus put-down (storage) and pick-up sequences. For more information, see
the Advanced Use page.

Close slot 1.

Construct the geometrical alignments REP2, REP3, REP4, REP5 and REP6, for slots 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, by
performing a translation of 30, 60, 90, 120 and 150 mm on alignment REP1 in the Y+ axis.
In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Define Slot. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of slot to be configured. Here, this
is an "autochange" Stylus Changer. As only a stylus changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant,

Page 408

Probes cannot be selected.


In the Reference field, enter a name to identify the slot being configured (it is advisable to use a name with a
number showing slot position).
In the Ref. Alignment field, select the previously created alignment.
The Head Angles field is automatically completed. It shows angles A and B of the adjustable head used
when the Set-up Calibration window is opened.

Warning: Before this window is opened, adjustable head position must be the position that will be
used for stylus changes.

Repeat the Set-up Calibration operation for each slot used.


The stylus changer is now ready to be used.

Page 409

SCP80 Stylus Changer

Description

The rack

An SCP80 rack has a single storage slot. Several SCP80s must therefore be used in order to be able to
perform stylus pickup/putdown operations. Each slot has a sliding flap:

Stylus changer loading

SCP80 stlus changers may be manually loaded. Unlike on the MCR20 and SCR200 changers, styli are
positioned using guide rails, thus avoiding any risk of incorrect stylus orientation.

Calibration
To configure slot position, use the program Calibration SCP80.GM2 (located by default in the folder
C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\StylusChanger\Scp80) and follow the instructions using the
photos as a guide.

Page 410

SCR200 Stylus Changer

Description

The rack

The rack has six stylus storage slots and display LEDs. Each slot has a sliding flap:

The Pi200 control unit

The control unit controls operation of the TP200 probe and stylus rack.

Stylus changer loading

It is recommended that the SCR200 slots be loaded using a CNC with the TP200 probe. This will ensure
correct stylus positioning and alignment when performing repeated stylus changes.
To calibrate the probes, the styli must be correctly connected to the TP200. To do this, make sure the stylus
is correctly assembled with the probe using the three alignment symbols shown below and located on the
TP20 and its module:

Page 411

Check the probe has been correctly reset by pressing the button located on the PI200 interface unit.

Display LEDs

The LEDSs on the rack show stylus changer status. The following table shows their functions:

The SCR200 has two operating modes, Mode A and Mode B. These two modes are selected using a switch
located under the block composing the central part of the stylus changer.

Warning: The SCR200 must be disconnected to select a change of mode. When it is reconnected, the
SCR200 performs a test procedure and switches to the selected mode.

Mode A

Place the switch to the left.


It is recommended that stylus changes always be performed in this mode (this mode will be used for stylus
change operations).
In this mode, the probe can only be deactivated by a stylus change, by moving the probe in front of a sensor
located on the central block.
This operation activates the infra-red detection system that, in turn, deactivates and resets the probe during a
stylus change cycle.

Page 412

Mode B

Place the switch to the left.


In this mode, the infra-red detection system is always active.
Any object traversing the infra-red beam will result in the probe being deactivated.
Accidental beam cutoff (by the operator's fingers, for example) will result in a collision.
Thos mode is not recommended for stylus change cycles. However, it may be used by loading the SCR200
slots with the TP200 probe.

Power on: the stylus changer performs a ten-second test procedure (the Power and Status LEDs flash) to
check correct operation.

Calibration

Configure stylus connection position

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration. The following window is
displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer of which the position is
to be entered. Here, this is a Stylus changer. As only a stylus changer has been selected in the Setup
Assistant, Probes cannot be selected.
used to select the type of stylus used.
The Stylus Length and Ball Diameter fields are automatically updated according to the type of stylus
selected. Stylus length may also be manually entered.

Warning: This operation must be performed to be able to configure slot positions.

Configure slot position

Page 413

To configure slot position, use the program Calibration_SCR200.GM2 (located by default in the folder
C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\StylusChanger\Scr200) and follow the instructions using the
photos as a guide or follow the instructions given below to calibrate the SCR200 changer manually.
Check that the adjustable head is in the position used for stylus change operations.
Open and retain slot 1.
Probe the upper face of the central block of the stylus changer as a plane (PL1). The points probed around
the name plate.

Note: Renishaw recommends use of a PS35R stylus. If this is not the case, make sure stylus length
does not exceed 20 mm and ball diameter 2 mm.

Measuring plane PL1


Construct a plane parallel to the previously probed plane and located at a distance of - 6.150.
For the first slot, probe lines L1, L2 and L3, using the previous plane as projection feature.

Page 414

Measuring line L1

Measuring line L2

Page 415

Measuring line L3
Construct line L4, located at a distance of 23.630 from line L1 and passing through the median plane.
Construct the median line L5 between L2 and L3.
Construct the intersection point Pt1 between lines L4 and L5.
Create a Geometrical alignment REP1 orientated according to the normal of the plane measured on the
upper face, with line L4 as direction and the point of intersection of lines L4 and L5 as origin.

Warning: The direction of the alignment axes must be as shown in the following diagram as the
alignment will be used for the stylus put-down (storage) and pick-up sequences. For more information, see
the Advanced Use page.

Close slot 1.
Repeat the different steps for slot 6, by measuring lines L6 and L7 and constructing the median line L8, and
point of intersection Pt2. Construct the geometrical alignment REP2.
Construct the geometrical alignments REP2 and REP3 associated to slots 2 and 3, by performing a
translation of 30 and 60 mm of alignment REP1 in the Y+ axis.

Page 416

Construct the geometrical alignments REP4 and REP5 associated to slots 4 and 5, by performing a
translation of 30 and 60 mm of alignment REP6 in the Y+ axis.

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Define Slot. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of slot to be configured. Here, this
is a Stylus Changer. As only a stylus changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant, Probes cannot
be selected.
In the Reference field, enter a name to identify the slot being configured (it is advisable to use a name with a
number showing slot position).
In the Ref. Alignment field, select the previously created alignment.
The Head Angles field is automatically completed. It shows angles A and B of the adjustable head used
when the Set-up Calibration window is opened.

Warning: Before this window is opened, adjustable head position must be the position that will be
used for stylus changes.

Repeat the Define Slot operation for each slot used.


The stylus changer is now ready to be used.

Page 417

SCR600 Stylus Changer

Description

The rack

An SCR600 rack comprises four stylus storage slots. Each slot has a sliding flap:

Stylus changer loading

It is recommended that the SCR600 slots be loaded using a CNC with the SP600 probe.
This will ensure correct stylus positioning and alignment when performing repeated stylus changes.

Calibration
To configure slot position, use the program Calibration SCR600.gm2 (located by default in the folder
C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\StylusChanger\Scr600) and follow the instructions using the
photos as a guide.

Page 418

Using changers

Assigning a slot to a probes file


Once a probe has been installed and calibrated, it must then be assigned a slot. To do this, from the Probes
menu, select the Edit Informations option. The following window is displayed:

System Data: in this section, two variables show probe file creation date and the date on which the file was
last modified. These variables are automatically updated and cannot be modified.
User Data : user-defined variables are entered in this section, with the syntax name = value.
Slot Reference used to select the slot in which the probe is to be stored. If a stylus changer is used, a
specific field for styli will be displayed.
Select the slot in which the probe is to be stored, then save the modified probes file. It is advisable to name
the probes file to show the slot used (in the example, the probe will be in slot 1, the probes file could thus be
saved under the name slot1.plp, for example).

Modifying the name of the current slot


The name of the slot in which the probes file currently in use is to be stored can be changed at any time.
To do this, select the menu CMM > Probe/Stylus Changers > Edit Informations or click slot name in the
software status bar.

Page 419

The following window is then displayed:

Select the desired slot from the list of slots.


Click this button to associate the probe in use with the selected slot. This association is only
temporary. It is not saved in the probes file. To save it, see the previous paragraph.
Click this button to exit the window without associating the probe to the selected slot.

Putdown and pickup


To put down (unload) the probe currently installed in its assigned slot and pick up (load) the probe located in
slot Y, perform the following procedure:
Select Open from the Probes menu. The following warning message is displayed:

Click this button to cancel loading of the probes file.


When this button is clicked, the following window is displayed:

Page 420

Select the desired probes file. The probe in use is stored in its slot. The corresponding probes file is closed
so that the new probes file containing the desired probe can be opened. The probe is then loaded from its
slot.
The following window is displayed during probe putdown/pickup (unloading/loading):

Click this button to abort probe loading.

Wait until the unloading/loading sequence is complete. Select the position of the adjustable head to be used
in the following window:

Page 421

Bear in mind that, in this probe or stylus unloading/loading sequence, the slot to which the probe or stylus is
to be unloaded (stored) is specified in the the software status bar (see previous paragraph). However, the
data used by the software to know in which slot a probes file is stored is shown in the Edit Informations
window (displayed from the Probes menu).

Unloading without loading


Select Probe/Stylus Changers > Store Probe in Slot from the CMM menu.
The following window is displayed during probe putdown (unloading):

Click this button to abort probe unloading.

Wait until the probe unloading sequence is complete. The procedure is the same for both probes and styli.

Pickup (loading)
This function is used when no probe is loaded and the user wants to use a probe that is stored in a probe or
stylus changer.
Select Open from the Probes menu.

Page 422

The following window is then displayed:

Select the desired probes file.


The following window is displayed during probes file loading:

Click this button to abort probe loading.

Wait until the probe loading sequence is complete. Select the position of the adjustable head to be used in
the following window:

Page 423

The procedure is the same for both probes and styli.

Simultaneous use of several changers


The software allows simultaneous use of a stylus changer and a probe changer or two stylus changers or two
probe changers.

ACR1-ACR1 configuration

The different changers are calibrated as described in the relevant online help pages. But if two changers of the
same type are used, the calibration program used for the second changer must be modified to avoid the slots
created during the first calibration being overwritten.
For this type of configuration, first calibrate the first ACR1 changer using the program calibration_acr1.GM2,
(default location in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\ACR1), then
calibrate the second ACR1 changer using the program calibration_acr1_n9-16.gm2, (default location in the
folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\ACR1-ACR1).

ACR1 and SCR200 configuration

In the software, two separate lengths must be specified in order to calibrate the probe changer (length LO)
and the stylus changer (length LS).

Page 424

Length LO is from the autojoint plane to the stylus attachment plane.


Length LS is from the stylus attachment plane to ball center.
These two values must be entered in the Set-up Probe Changer Calibration window, accessed via the
menu CMM > Probe/Stylus Changers > Set-up Calibration.

In this example, the value to be entered in the probes file is D= (X=0, Y=0, Z=-100).

Page 425

If the probe is different to the probe used for calibration, the value to be entered in the probes file is the new
LO value for the relevant probe. This value must be updated for each new probe used.
With the probe used in the above example, the Edit Informations window for the probe is as shown below:

If the following probe configuration is used,

Page 426

the Edit Information window should be as shown below:

Page 427

Probe and stylus change operations

Each probes file has a corresponding stylus changer slot number and probe changer slot number. Hence,
when a probes file is loaded, the probe changer slot and the stylus changer slot references are displayed in
the status bar:

This is also the case in the Edit Information window opened via the Probes menu:

Page 428

The probe dimensions displayed at the bottom of the window are the sum of the probe and stylus
dimensions.

Precautions of use
Various problems may occur during probe loading operations. Most of these problems are caused by manual
actions performed by the operator on the rack or probe and may easily be avoided. Following these rules will
allow potential problems to be limited:

- Make sure the slot for the probe currently in use is empty (otherwise a collision will occur at unloading).
- Make sure there is a probe present in the slot from which the probe is to be loaded (otherwise the machine
will be in "open probe" configuration at the end of the cycle).
- Make sure the probes are in their respective slots. To ensure this, it is advisable to always store the probes
in the same slots, whatever the measurement program used.
- If the machine is manually locked, fully tighten then move 5 degrees back, otherwise the following
automatic unlocking operation will not be able to be performed (ACR1-ACR3).
- After an error has occurred, check that the probe on the head is active. This is because incorrect
acknowledgement may have deactivated the probe on the head and activated the probe in the rack (ACR1).
- Make sure there are no obstacles between probe position and probe changer position.

Page 429

ACR1 error handling

Probe stored in an occupied slot

A collision occurs between the two probes at the slot entry, this results in unlocking of the adjustable head.
As the probe is still closed, movement can be performed using the joysticks. Lock the head from the console
and clear it.

Probe loading attempted from an empty slot

The procedures runs correctly until exit from the slot. At this time, the probe changer validates the probe on
the head. As there is no probe, the probe signal is activated. The CNC considers probing to have taken place
and stops. As the probing point is located in the slot, the joysticks cannot be used to perform clearance.
Hold the ACC2 Reset button depressed (probe inhibited), use the joysticks to clear it then, after making sure
that all the flaps are closed, release the button and manually attach the probe specified in the Slot window.

Positioning problem

If positioning is incorrect (CNC incorrectly adjusted, incorrect calibration) or it the probe was incorrectly
installed manually (without the 5 degree return), the machine forces slot entry, thus resulting in unlocking of
the head, triggering of the probe changer safety device or a control error. As the cycle cannot be completed,
the probe changer goes to error status after a ten-second interval, this preventing further movement. Press the
ACC2 Reset button once, then clear the machine using the joysticks while holding the button depressed. If
the error was an adjustable head error, lock it while requesting positioning.

In all cases, after acknowledging the error, check the following points:

- That the probe mounted on the head is indeed the probe from the slot displayed by the software in the slot
window. If not, change it manually.
- If the probe was manually installed, that the 5 degree return movement was performed.
- That each probe is in the correct slot.
- That all the flaps are closed.
- The probe on the head is active.

Advanced use
The files containing the probe loading/unloading sequences are:

For probe changers

GETPROBE.DAT
PUTPROBE.DAT
Meaning of the header characters:
Command
$
T, "MOVE WITH PROBE OPENED", 1
P, 30.0, 0.0, 5.35
S, 5.0
C, "PAUSE", x
C, "CHANGING ST HEAD 1"

Meaning
The characters following this command are
comments and are not taken into account.
Enables to deactivate the probe while moving.
The digits following this command specify the
coordinates of the target position of a movement
(position to be reached).
This command indicates a movement speed change
(Speed) to 5 mm/s.
This command indicates a stoppage of x seconds.
This command enables probe loading on ME 5007

Page 430

C, "CHANGING ST HEAD 0"


C, "M07"
C, "M08"
C, "UNLOCK LOCK"

CNCs.
This command enables probe unloading from ME
5007 CNCs.
This command enables probe loading on Zeiss
CNCs.
This command enables probe unloading from Zeiss
CNCs.
This command enables unlocking then locking of
the measurement head.

Example files:
GETPROBE.DAT
$ Probe loading sequence
$ -X- -Y- -ZT, "MOVE WITH PROBE OPENED", 1
P, "" 30.0, 0.0, 5.35
S, 5.0
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 5.35
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, -1.85
C, "PAUSE", 0.3 : Stopped for 3 tenths of a second (to allow probe locking)
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, -1.65
P, "" 30.0, 0.0, -1.65
or
$ Zeiss ST probe loading
$ -X- -Y- -ZP, "" 70.0, 0.0, 10.0
S, 30.0
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 10.0
S, 10.0
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 0.0
C, "M07"
C, "PAUSE", 0.5
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 10.0
S, 30.0
P, "" 70.0, 0.0, 10.0
PUTPROBE.DAT
$ Probe unloading sequence
$ -X- -Y- -ZP, "" 30.0, 0.0, -1.65
S, 5.0
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, -1.65
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, -1.85
C, "PAUSE", 3.0
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 5.35
P, "" 30.0, 0.0, 5.35
or
$ Zeiss ST probe unloading
$ -X- -Y- -ZP, "" 70.0, 0.0, 10.0
S, 30.0
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 10.0
S, 10.0

Page 431

P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 0.0


C, "M08"
C, "PAUSE", 0.5
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 10.0
S, 30.0
P, "" 70.0, 0.0, 10.0

For stylus changers

GETSTYL.DAT
PUTSTYL.DAT
Meaning of the header characters:
Command
$
T, "MOVE WITH PROBE OPENED", 1
P, 30.0, 0.0, 5.35
S, 5.0
C, "PAUSE", x
D, "CASIER3" 21.0, 25.0, -10.0, 21.0,
10.0, -10.0, "CASIER1",
"CASIER2","CASIER3", "CASIER4",
"CASIER5", "CASIER6"

Meaning
The characters following this command are
comments and are not taken into account.
Enables to deactivate the probe while moving.
The digits following this command specify the
coordinates of the target position of a movement
(position to be reached).
This command indicates a movement speed change
(Speed) to 5 mm/s.
This command indicates a stoppage of x seconds.
Movement with respect to the alignment associated
with slot 3. The coordinates of the target positions
are then displayed. The slot names shown at the
end of the command are the names of the slots
concerned by these movements. The slot names
must match the names configured by the user at
stylus changer calibration.

Example files:
GETSTYL.DAT
$ Stylus loading sequence
$ -X- -Y- -ZT, "MOVE WITH PROBE OPENED", 1
D, "CASIER3" 21.0, 25.0, -10.0, 21.0, 10.0, -10.0, "CASIER1", "CASIER2","CASIER3", "CASIER4",
"CASIER5", "CASIER6" :
P, "" 21.0, 0.0, 3.0
S, 5.0
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 3.0
C, "PAUSE", 0.3
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 0.0
P, "" 21.0, 0.0, 0.0
PUTSTYL.DAT
$ Stylus unloading sequence
$ -X- -Y- -ZD, "CASIER3" 21.0, 25.0, -10.0, 21.0, 10.0, -10.0, "CASIER1", "CASIER2", "CASIER3", "CASIER4",
"CASIER5", "CASIER6"
P, "" 21.0, 0.0, 0.0
S, 5.0
P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 0.0
C, "PAUSE", 0.5

Page 432

P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 3.0


P, "" 21.0, 0.0, 3.0

The file REFSTYL.DAT gives a list of Renishaw styli that can be fitted on a TP200 probe with the
corresponding lengths and ball diameters.
"PS29R", 10.0, 0.3
"PS10R", 10.0, 0.5
"PS31R", 10.0, 0.7
"PS9R", 10.0, 1.0
"PS24R", 10.0, 1.5

For all types of changers

It is possible to specify whether, after a probe or stylus change, the probe must return to the position
occupied before the change or remain in the slot used.
To do this, in the file XG_DME.INI, modify the variable PTEND in the section [CHANGEUR].
If PTEND = 0, the probe remains at the last slot used.
If PTEND = 1, the probe returns to the position occupied before the probe file change.

Note: In a Metrologic + SP25 + TP200 CNC configuration, it is necessary to change the time-out
parameter in the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, DME tab, CHANGER section:
M_DTEMPOREACTIVATION = 250.

Page 433

Compensation File Information


This function is only available if 23-parameter compensation is enabled on the CMM. It allows the information
contained in the compensation file, "MT23.dat", to be read.

This function allows the following information to be extracted from the MT23.dat file:

Compensation file access path.


Date and time of MT23.dat file creation.
Date and time file was last modified.
CMM brand/manufacturer.
CMM model.
Serial Number.
Comments in the compensation file.
CMM type.

The window containing this information is displayed as shown below:

Page 434

Probes
This menu can be displayed in two different ways, depending on the CMM and/or head configuration used:

Reduced menu: for example in the case of a configuration with a poly-articulated arm type system.

Full menu: in the case of a digitally-controlled CMM with geometrical compensations.

Page 435

Page 436

Introduction
Principle of calibration
The aim of the calibration is to determine the diameter of the probe ball and the position of its center. In
effect, when the CMM starts up, it retrieves the positions X, Y and Z of a point at the end of the measurement
arm (without probe). If the reference marks are taken, they will mark the origins of these coordinates. The
calibration should be used to locate probes with regard to others.
Normally on 3D measurement CMMs, probing points are acquired when the ball of the probe comes into
contact with the part. The probe opens a contact, and an electronic pulse is sent to the system. At this
precise moment the system acquires the X, Y, Z coordinates.

Since these X, Y, Z coordinates are not those of the real contact point, the software must apply a translation,
corresponding to the probe configuration. In addition, since the diameter of the ball is not nil, the software
must also apply a correction to the value of the ball radius. It is the role of the calibration to determine this
offset and this ball diameter.
If using several probes, or an adjustable head, calibration allows you to find out the relative position of all the
probes used.
To perform calibration, the points must be taken on a calibration or reference sphere with its exact diameter
known (calibrated if possible), taking care to distribute the points as uniformly as possible.
The system knows the diameter of the reference sphere and, based on the coordinates of each probed point,
it determines the diameter of the probe ball and its position in relation to the CMM.

Page 437

r: radius of the reference sphere


R: ball center radius

The ball radius = (the radius of the ball centers - the radius of the reference sphere).

Note: For contact probes, the diameter of the ball will generally be smaller than the actual diameter,
due to the bending of the shaft.

Adjustable heads
These avoid the need for multiple sensors and are used to reach difficult areas. They are normally motorized
and used on digitally-controlled CMMs, although some of these heads can be adjusted manually.

Page 438

Each time a probe is called with a head position other than the current position, the head moves
automatically to the new position.
When requesting a new position, remember to move the part out of the way.
For each position used, a probe must be calibrated.

Recommendations
Avoid excessively long shafts, excessive bending can affect the quality of the measurements.
Check that the stylus is correctly screwed in.
Avoid excessively "complicated" probe configurations.
Avoid probing at a tangent to the part, normal probing is preferable.
Take points widely spread around the reference sphere, at least five points are required for a calibration: four
points on the equator, one point on the pole.
Avoid probing below the equator, since the contact can be made in this case with the shaft.
For a multiple sensor probe, check that the probe used is the defined probe; use the drawing as a reminder in
the definition of the probe.
Check the result, in particular that of the form fault.

Page 439

New file of probes


This function can be accessed:
- via the Probes menu
- via the Probes database context menu.
It is used to initialize a new probes file: the current probes file is then closed.
However, the software detects whether the current probes file has been modified and if it has, a message
suggests saving the probes list:

Clicking on this button closes the message without saving the probes list.
Clicking this button opens the save window:

Once the probes list is saved, the Edit information window concerning the new probes file appears:

Page 440

Click this button after entering or modifying the User data if required.

Note: If no probes file has yet been opened and modified, the Edit information window shown above is
opened directly.
Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

Note: With changer (probes or stylus), you have to store probe to a case.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 441

Open probes file, Open previous probes file


Open probes file
This function is used to load a probes file.
It may be accessed either:

- via the Probes menu


-

via the toolbar, by clicking this button

- via the Probes database context menu.

The Load Probes from a File window is shown below:

Click this button to open the probes file selected and close the window.
Click this button to close the window without opening the probes file.

This checkbox is used to enter a number of days during which the


probes file will be valid. The validity duration may be expressed as a decimal number.

Example: To render a probes file valid for half a day:

Page 442

If any of the probes in the file has a calibration date that is no longer valid, the following message is displayed
whether the program is running or not. However, probes in this condition can still be used:

After selecting the *.plp file from the list, the following window appears:

The software then suggests Activating one of the probes.

Open previous probes file


This function can be used to quickly reload a recently used probes file.
If no validity date has been entered for the probes file to be opened, in the menu the probe loading line is
displayed as follows:

If a validity date has been entered, however, the line is displayed as follows:

Notes:

If a probes file is open, the software displays the following message:

Page 443

Clicking this button closes the message and the current set of probes remains active.
Clicking this button displays the Load Probes from a File window.

If the type of adjustable head selected in the setup assistant is not the same as the one with which
the probes file to be opened was created, the following message appears:

Opens the probes file, bearing in mind that it is not suitable for the hardware
configuration.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 444

Save a probes file, Save as


These functions are used to save a set of probes. Their names, orientations, diameters, shaft diameters and
calibration spheres are taken into account when saving.

Save a probes file


This function can be accessed:
- via the Probes menu
-

by clicking this button on the Toolbar.

- via the Probes database context menu.

Save is used to save the probes file assigning it a name and a directory, if it is being saved for the first time,
or to save the changes made in this same file.
The save window is shown below:

Select the save directory and name the file. The file will be a *.plp file.

Notes:

It is very practical to save the set of probes, especially when using an adjustable head with a lot of
calibrated positions. This allows you to reuse calibrated positions later.
If the probes file has already been saved, the software saves it automatically, without opening the
save window.

Page 445

Warning: To reuse a saved set of probes, it is essential that this set has not been modified (mounted,
remounted, different length of stylus, different ball diameter). Otherwise a new calibration will be necessary.

Save as
Save as is used to save the current probes file under a different name.
The save window shown above then opens, and is used to modify the name and the path of the current file.

Note: This is only relevant for a file which has already been saved. If saving for the first time, simply use
the Save a probes file command.

Click this button to save the set of probes.


Click this button to close the window without saving the set of probes.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 446

Print probes list


This function is used to print a list of the probes contained in a file.
It may be accessed:
- via the Probes > Print probes list menu
- via the Print button of the Activate a probe window
- via the Probes database context menu.
The Print window is shown below:

This window is used to configure print settings and start printing.


Print layout is as follows:

Page 447

The columns printed correspond to the columns selected in the Activate a probe window.
Right-clicking in this window displays the following menu, in which a marker indicates the selected columns:

Page 448

Note: if the print settings (Portrait/Landscape) mean you cannot print the number of columns selected,
the following message appears:

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Warning: The configuration of the columns is stored in the program line. It is therefore no longer
modifiable during program execution.

Page 449

Export probes list


This function is used to export the list of the probes contained in a file in text format.
It may be accessed:
- via the Probes menu
- via the Probes database context menu.
The window is shown below:

Choose the target folder and the name of the exported file.

Click this button to save the probes list in the chosen export file and exit the window.
Click this button to exit the window without exporting the probes list.

When the text file has been exported, it can be edited in an Excel editor, for example.
It is then displayed as shown below:

Page 450

Page 451

Define probe
This function is used to assign a name to the probe, to define a position (for an adjustable head), then to
calibrate it.
This function can be accessed:
- via the Probes> Define menu
-

by clicking this button on the Toolbar.

The definition window is shown below:

This field is used to give a name to the probe. With each new definition, the software
attaches a number to the name given. If there is an adjustable head, the name given by default corresponds
to the position of the head.
or

These icons indicate whether or not the documented probe is calibrated.


Field for entering the diameter of the probe.

Page 452

used to select the ball number for a star probe.

Note: The value of the diameter can be modified after calibration, and even forced at the moment of the
definition.

This button is used to define a probe (by entering its name and orientation), to
calibrate it artificially (by entering its nominal diameter) and to choose it as the current probe.
The software then displays the following message:

By clicking on this button, the probe A45.0_B-37.5 is calibrated artificially and no logical link
can be established with other probes.
When the probe is activated, its name appears in the tool bar.

Warning: if the probe is defined with an adjustable head position and the CNC is connected to the
software, the adjustable head positions itself when the probe is activated. To avoid disengaging, you therefore
need to clear the adjustable head of all obstacles.

This button is used to artificially define a probe with the chosen position, but it is not activated.
The warning message mentioned above is also displayed.

The drawing at the center of the window is interactive. It takes the positions specified by the operator, in the
case of an adjustable head:

Page 453

The drawing may vary according to the choices made in the setup assistant during the installation:

These two fields indicate the angles of the adjustable head defined for this probe.

These buttons are used to give a new value to the angles.


By clicking on a button, the angle increases or decreases according to the values allowed for the type of
head.

Angles A and B take the minimum and maximum values allowed for the type of head connected.
For heads with three angles, an additional field appears, used to define the angle C.
It is also possible to define head angles by clicking in the 3D View. The angle values are calculated as a
function of the entity clicked (feature, CAD, section, etc.).
Certain conditions should be fulfilled in order to use this function off-line:

The configuration of the measuring head, as well as its orientation, configured in the setup assistant,
should correspond to those of the CMM.
The CAD alignment in the work session should correspond to the alignment of the part in the CMM
alignment.

The values proposed are rounded off as a function of the increment of each head. If the head is not indexed,
the value proposed is the exact value, to the degree.

Example: Definition of angle by clicking on the right plane of the part.

Page 454

To use the probe, it must be calibrated by clicking on this button. The calibration window is then
displayed.

closes the window.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 455

Activate
This function is used to select one of the probes defined and/or calibrated as a current probe.
It may be accessed:
- via the Probes menu
- via the Probes database context menu.
The Activate a probe window is shown below:

The name of the probes file loaded is displayed at the top of the window, above the list of the probes making
up this file.

Several status indications may appear in the list:


Probe for which the shaft has actually been calibrated.
Probe for which the ball has actually been calibrated.
Probe for which the shaft is not calibrated.
Probe for which the ball is not calibrated.
Probe for which the ball is not calibrated but is used for qualification
Probe for which the shaft has been artificially calibrated.
Probe for which the ball has been artificially calibrated.
Probe for which the ball has actually been calibrated and which has been used to
qualify the adjustable head.
Probe of a continuous measurement head for which the ball has been interpolated.

This line of the field is used to sort the probes by number, name, angles, ball or shaft diameters, and their
form fault.
It can be configured: the width of the columns can be increased or decreased using the mouse cursor.

Page 456

Additional columns can be displayed. To do this, right-click with the mouse in the probes list area.
The following context menu appears:

Choose the new columns to be displayed and those to be hidden. Choosing Default settings will return to
the initial column display.

Select the probe required from the Activate a probe window. The line is then highlighted.

activates the selected probe.


This then becomes the current probe and its name appears in the toolbar

prints the list of probes.


closes the window without applying any changes made.

Warning: if the probe is defined with an adjustable head position and the CNC is connected to the
software, the adjustable head positions itself at the moment the probe is activated. To avoid disengaging, you
therefore need to clear the adjustable head of all obstacles.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 457

For more information on an error occurring during program execution, see Error management.

Page 458

Calibrate
This function is used to define the diameter of the ball and the position of the probes with regard to the
reference sphere. It is therefore important to not move the sphere during the calibration of a set of probes.
It may be accessed:
- via the Probes menu
- via the Probes database context menu

The calibration window is shown below:


Manual calibration

Semi-automatic calibration

Name

Select the name of the probe to be calibrated in the drop-down list of defined probes.

Page 459

Manual calibration
: when this box is unchecked, at least five points must be taken manually.

Semi-automatic calibration
: when this box is checked, a first point must be taken manually. The
following points are measured automatically by the CMM.

Number of points
used to enter the number of points to be probed to validate a calibration, at least 5.

Maximum form fault


used to enter the maximum form fault tolerated for the calibration: when this fault is
exceeded, an error message appears giving the user the choice of retaining this calibration or repeating the
calibration.

Automatic stop
used to immediately calculate the calibration when the minimum number of
probing points is reached.

Repeat
used to move on to the calibration of the following probe, once the previous
calibration has been validated. Warning, the adjustable head moves to take up its new position.

Auto. calibrate probe shaft


used to carry out automatic calibration of the shaft (artificially) by entering a
diameter. This is only possible if the adjustable head has been qualified.

Shaft diameter
When the automatic calibration of the probe is activated (previous field), this field is
accessible, and used to enter the nominal diameter of the shaft.

Page 460

This button appears when selecting a semi-automatic calibration, used to


access the Calibration parameters:

Enter the automatic calibration parameters here: the approach, search and retract distances, the number of
probing points and, if necessary, an offset of the probing area, according to the equator of the sphere.
Then simply probe one point manually at the zenith of the calibration sphere. Three points are then probed in
automatic mode, near to the first probed point. This provides an initial approximation of the calibration.
Finally, the number of probings entered in the Calibration parameters window is carried out.
Check this box to use the probing direction of the stylus to be calibrated.
Check this box to generate a greater number of contouring calibration paths (head
orientation, calibration sphere, ball diameter, calibration sphere diameter, etc.).

aborts the probe and exits the calibration.

Number of points probed.

validates the points measured for the calibration to be calculated.

Page 461

deletes the previous point, if for example the point was probed incorrectly.

Note: For a manual calibration, the points must be distributed over the surface of the sphere (at least
on one half sphere). Probes at a tangent must be avoided.

Calibration parameters

Select the sphere on which the calibration is to be carried out, Master or


local sphere. The diameter is displayed for indication purposes, but cannot be modified in this field.

When adding a probe to the existing field, at the moment of the calibration the following message will appear:

The
button is used to cancel the calibration, so as to locate the probes file if necessary, before
calibrating a new position.
The
button is used to inform the software that the position of the sphere is OK and that the
calibration can be carried out without any problems.

Using a star probe


A star probe is calibrated differently depending on whether it is fitted on:

a fixed head: semi-automatic calibration can be used. The first probing points is then taken along the
direction of the shaft of the stylus to be calibrated.
an adjustable head: semi-automatic and automatic calibration can be used. For semi-automatic
calibration, a number must be given to each probe ball. For automatic calibration, fill in the Ball No.
field in the probe definition window.

Utilisation of disk probe

Page 462

A disk probe is calibrated as follows: 8 points should be probed around the equator of the calibration sphere:
4 points below the semi-thickness of the disk and 4 points above.
The probe points should be equally distributed on each side of the sphere along two circular paths, in order to
obtain a correct compensation of the shaft and a reliable calculation of the centre of the sphere:

Note:
The toolbar button takes this status when the current probe is calibrated.
This button, on the other hand, indicates that the current probe is not calibrated.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following lines are then added:

Page 463

Calibrate shaft
Probing using the shaft of a probe or a cylindrical probe can be useful for features located on the edges of
sheet metal, as shown in the following figure:

To be able to calibrate the shaft of a probe, the probe must first have been calibrated, or at least artificially
calibrated.
This function can be accessed:
- via the Probes menu
- via the Probes database context menu

In the probes file, the shaft appears as follows:


when it is not calibrated
when it is calibrated.

The shaft calibration window is shown below:

Page 464

Name
Select the name of the probe for which the shaft is to be calibrated in the drop-down list of
the defined probes.

Actual calibration

The calibration of a probe shaft involves using this shaft to measure two perpendicular edges, these two
edges having been probed on at least points, at different heights. The points probed on each of the edges
must describe a plane. The intersection of these two planes gives the direction of the shaft.

Page 465

Therefore, in the calibration window enter the maximum form fault accepted, indicate the number of points
measured on edge 1, then on edge 2. Indicate the nominal diameter of the shaft, measured with slide calipers
for example.

Nominal calibration

To use this function, the probe head must have been qualified, otherwise the
out.

field is grayed

This function is used to automatically calibrate the probe shaft selected (from the drop-down list) without
having to probe the two edges. It is the orientation of the head which is used.
Simply enter the nominal diameter of the shaft in this field.

Click this button to calibrate the shaft of the probe.


To calibrate more than one shaft consecutively, simply check this box.

Page 466

Maximum form fault


used to enter the maximum form fault tolerated for the calibration: when this fault is
exceeded an error message appears, giving the user the choice of retaining this calibration or repeating the
calibration.

Number of points probed


used to enter the number of points probed on edge 1.
used to enter the number of points probed on edge 2.

Shaft diameter
used to enter the nominal diameter of the shaft.

Automatic stop
used to immediately calculate the calibration when the minimum number of
probing points is reached.

Repeat
used to move on to calibrate the shaft of the following probe, once the
previous calibration has been validated.

aborts the probe and exits the calibration.

Number of points probed.

validates the points measured for the calibration to be calculated.

Page 467

deletes the previous point, if for example the point was probed incorrectly.

Warning: the calibration of the shaft in the software does not involve calculating the diameter of the
probe shaft, but rather its direction. This is because it is the direction which is taken into account when
calculating the features, when they are measured in shaft probing.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following lines are added:

Page 468

Automated calibration of the probe shaft


This function is used to automatically calibrate the shaft of the probe(s) selected in the Probes database.
It can be accessed via the Probes database context menu.
The window is shown below:

Enter the diameter of the shaft in this field.


validates the diameter entered.
closes the window without applying any changes made.

Note: If the probe head has been qualified, automated calibration of the shaft is possible for all the head
positions.

Page 469

Unlock / Lock head


This function enables unlocking then locking of the measurement head. This function can be used after a
change of tools or after a shock in order to re-position the head correctly..

In program mode: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 470

Qualify probe head


This function is used to determine the position, the dimensions and the orientation of the probe head with
regard to the CMM, in order to initialize the automated calibration function.
This involves calculation carried out from probe head positions, some of which are enforced and already
calibrated.
On selecting this function, the following window appears:

The minimum number of positions to be used to be able to qualify the motorized head and angles is indicated
in the upper part of the window.
Depending on the head selected in the Setup Assistant or depending on the type of probe used, the number
of positions may vary.
This window is the same type as that of the Activate a probe function.

To qualify the probe head, simply check the boxes corresponding to the required probes:

This button is available if the minimum number of probes is respected and the angles

Page 471

A and B correspond to the requirements. If it remains grayed out, it means either that not enough probes
have been selected, or that the selected head positions are not suitable.
Clicking this button displays the following message if the head has been qualified correctly:

Otherwise, an error message appears, specifying that the head has not been qualified.

closes the window without applying any changes made.

Notes:

When a head is modeled and at least one probe is calibrated, the head is qualilfied. Automatic
calibration then becomes possible for the other modeling probes.

The Qualify Probe Head window can be left open as a reminder if:
- when the window is opened, no probe appears in the list
- the number of probes available or their angles cannot be used to qualify the head
Therefore, the positions required remain visible while using a probe calibration and definition window.
In the case of a head with an offset axis, five calibrated probes are required, with precise angles A
and B, to qualify the probe head. The following window is then displayed:

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 472

Page 473

Quick qualification of the motorized head


The quick qualification of the motorized head (like the full qualification) is used to determine the position, the
dimensions and the orientation of the head with regard to the CMM. This has the advantage of being quicker
than the standard qualification.
This qualification procedure is only possible if the motorized head is mounted according to the CMM axes
(rotation axes A and B of the head parallel to the CMM axes), and if the parameters concerning this
configuration have been entered correctly in the setup assistant.
The qualification involves probing the zenith point of a reference sphere with the two head positions
(A=0,B=0) and (A=90,B=as chosen), having entered the rough diameter of the ball.
Once the first point is probed in position (A=0,B=0), three additional points are probed in automatic mode,
close to the first point. This provides an initial approximation of the calibration. The position of the head must
then be changed to (A=90,B=angle chosen). If the CNC is connected to the command console, the head will
change position through the buttons intended for this purpose. Otherwise, two probes must first be calibrated
artificially with the two head positions, and when the position is to be changed, simply activate the required
probe in the toolbar. The probing procedure is the same as for the position (A=0,B=0), the zenith of the
sphere must be probed again.
On selecting this function, the following window appears:

Page 474

Uncheck this box if the length of the shaft is unknown. In this case, the quick
qualification is carried out using the two head positions indicated at the top of the window.
If the length of the probe shaft is known, the box can be checked so as to
enter this length. In this case, the quick qualification is carried out only in position (A=0,B=0)

Enter the approximate diameter of the ball in this field.

Shows the ball number during a start configuration


used to indicate the distance between head rotation center and ball center.
Clicking this button displays the following window, used to configure the
quick qualification options such as the approach, search and retract distances of the CNC, as well as the
parameters of the calibration sphere:

aborts the probe and exits the calibration.

Number of points probed.

Page 475

Click this button to validate the points probed and proceed with the qualification of the motorized
head.

deletes the previous point, if for example the point was probed incorrectly.

When the quick qualification has been carried out correctly, the following message appears:

Since the quick qualification is less accurate than the standard qualification (approximate determination of
the shaft length, no precise alignment of the head with regard to the axes), it may be best to increase the
approach and search distances used during the automated calibration.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following lines are then added:

Page 476

Create / Modify Measure Head Configuration


It is possible to access the function via the Probes menu.
It is used to display the configuration of the orientable head in the 3D View.
It also gives access to the automatic calibration window of the probes without going through qualification,
contents or not, of the orientable head. In fact, it is just necessary to load the probe file in which an orientable
head configuration is recorded, then to calibrate a probe to gain access to automatic calibration.

Notes:

If the configuration of the head is deleted, the probe file however preserves the same information
pertaining to the qualified head.
When a head configuration is loaded and a new probe file is opened, a message for preserving the
configuration is displayed:

Only one configuration can be recorded in a probe file.


The head display parameters can be modified via the 3D View > Rendering menu.

The window displays as below :

Page 477

It is composed of three areas:


- The left area is a library of items from different manufacturers (a preview is displayed when an item is
selected).
- The central area lists the selected sub-assemblies.
- The right-hand part displays the head and the probe configuration as its construction progresses.

Click the tab corresponding to the desired manufacturer. A head is composed of different sub-assemblies
according to the manufacturer.
A list of head sub-assemblies for the selected manufacturer allowing the head assembly to be configured is
displayed.
The selected item is displayed in the top window:

Click on this button to select an item, or double-click the item. When an item is selected, the scrolling
menu automatically offers preset items suitable for adding to the previous sub-assembly. For example, when
a PH10M/Renishaw head is selected, an autojoint sub-assembly item (extension or probe) is offered for
selection.
The various items selected are displayed in the central list. In the example below, the assembly is composed
of a PH10M/Renishaw head, a PAA1/A-1051-0417 type extension, a TP2 type probe and a
PS16R/A-5000-4160 type stylus:

Page 478

The angles of the head can be configured in order to best align the probe head. To do this, click the Settings
function in the head context menu.

The following window is displayed:

Enter fixation (attachment) rotation (in degrees). This parameter allows


head orientation on its attachment point to be modified.
and
Enter the rotation of the A and B
axes, parallel to the CMM axes (in degrees). These parameters enable head movement to be viewed.
Click this button to accept the head settings.
Click this button to cancel any changes made.

Page 479

If the selected item does not match head configuration, select the item in the central area and click on
this button.
A preview of the assembly is displayed in the right part of the window.
To access the Generic Accessory Editor.
Used to open an existing head configuration.
To save head configuration under a new name.
To change background color.
Used to re-center the head in the 3D View.

Used to exit the window without having loaded or modifed any head.

Used to exit the window by loading or by modifying the head in the 3D View.

Note:

In the different previews, probe configuration may be moved in the same way as in the graphic view.
The image may be re-centered by double-clicking.
For a "Star probe" or "Elbow probe" configuration, the angles of the head may be set to position the
probes at the desired angle.

Right-click on the name of the head (PH10M in the above example) and select Settings in the context menu.

A red hemisphere represents the position of the stylus for a star configuration. Simply select one of
the locations in the tree structure for its position to be visible in the 3D view in order to add the
relevant stylus.

Page 480

This feature is available for optical sensors in the same way as for the adjustable heads.

Page 481

Generic accessory editor

This function is used to create libraries of customized accessories (styluses, extensions, etc.), that can be
used when creating a head and that round out the standard libraries in the Head Creation Wizard.
This function is accessed by clicking on this button

in the Add Head window.

The following window is displayed:

Libraries
The Generic Accessory Editor thus allows customized libraries to be created in *.xte file format. These
libraries are then saved either in the software's DATA folder or in the DATA_DIR if the station is operating with
an environment variable.
The libraries are managed from the Generic Accessory Editor:

Page 482

: file name and hence name of the active library in the editor.

: create a new library.

: open a library and activate it in the editor.

: save active library.

- List of accessories contained in the active library:

Opening a library

, allows a list of all available libraries to be accessed in the following window:

Page 483

This button is used to delete a library.

Adding accessories to a library


To add accessories to a library, accessory type must be specified:

To complete the different characteristics and information for the selected accessory:

This button is used to add the accessory to the list in the active library:

Page 484

Using libraries in the Head Creation Wizard


Libraries created in the Editor are directly displayed in the Head Creation Wizard in the form of additional
accessory tabs, each representing the content of a library (i.e. an *.xte file):

Accessories

Different categories of accessories may be added

and, for each of these, different types

may be added.
Accessories may be of two types: configurable generic accessories and customized accessories created
directly by the user.

Configurable generic accessories


For any configurable generic accessory (extension, stylus extension, stylus, accessory, etc.), simply select
the type then enter the corresponding configuration settings:

Page 485

- the dimensional configuration of the accessory:

These configuration settings allow the dimensional characteristics of the accessory to be defined and its
representation in the graphic view (ball and shaft material, etc.).
- the functional configuration of the accessory:

Page 486

Definition of accessory name in the form in


which it will be displayed in the library.
Comment on the accessory.

Type of item (Auto-joint, M2 bolt, M3 bolt,


etc.) on which the accessory can be
mounted.
Type of item (Auto-joint, M2 bolt, M3 bolt,
etc.) that can be mounted on the accessory
(for an extension).
These configuration settings allow the assembly/mounting characteristics of the accessory to be defined.

Customized accessories
Customized accessories directly created by the user may also be added to a library.
, used to select an *.SU3 file representing the accessory:

This file must have been previously imported into the software from a supported CAD file. This CAD file will
have been created in compliance with a certain number of rules allowing it to be connected with the other
items and the probing areas to be defined. Curves and circles are used to do this, named as follows:
- The name of the curve defining the entry connection point of the accessory must start with "INCON" (and
may be followed by a number).
- The names of the curves defining the probe balls or exit connection points of the accessory must start with "

Page 487

OUTCON" and must be followed by a number defining the name of the exit point.

- If a circle is used, its center must represent the most distant point of the connector in the direction of the
shaft, and its orientation represent shaft direction.

- If a line (or a curve) is used, one of its ends must represent the most distant point of the connector in the
direction of the shaft and its orientation represent shaft direction.

Page 488

Page 489

Automated calibration
This function allows automated calibration of the probes. You can therefore calibrate a large number of
measuring head positions automatically.
It can only be accessed if the head has been qualified first (See Qualify probe head and Quick
qualification of the motorized head).
If the probes to be calibrated are defined, the software uses this definition for the automated calibration.
If the probes to be calibrated are not defined, the software creates each probe assigning it a name made up of
angles A and B (See Standard automated calibration).
The probes can also be named using the Advanced automated calibration.
When a head is modeled and at least one probe is calibrated, the head is qualified. Automatic calibration
then becomes possible for the other modeling probes.

Standard automated calibration


The Automated calibration window is shown below:

This window takes the form of a table with two entries, A and B being the possible angles for the probe head.
When the cursor is moved, angles A and B corresponding to the box in which the mouse cursor is positioned
appear in red.

You can also read the current position in this field.


The red boxes indicate the positions which have already been calibrated, in particular those which have
allowed qualification of the head.

Page 490

The brown boxes indicate expired positions. They only show up is the Nbr Days of Validity option has been
checked on opening the probe file and the number of days of validity has been exceeded.
To calibrate a position you must click on the corresponding gray box, this then becomes green and will be
calibrated automatically. To select several positions in the table click the left mouse button and move the
mouse to produce a window covering all the positions required.

The number of positions to be calibrated is displayed at the


bottom left of the window.

Used to select the number of the ball. Select Laser if you are using an optical sensor.
reselects all the positions which have already been calibrated in order to recalibrate them.
selects all positions known as expired.
cancels this operation.
clicking this button displays the following window, used to configure the automated
calibration options such as the approach, search and retract distances of the CNC, probe shaft calibration, as
well as the parameters of the calibration sphere:

Page 491

exits the window without applying any changes made.


After selecting the probes to be calibrated, click this button to begin the calibration.
A message warning of obstacles between the current position of the probe and the position to be reached
appears:

Click this button. The calibrations begin and the following window appears, showing in real
time the result of the probe calibrations already carried out and the number remaining to be carried out:

Page 492

Clicking this button aborts the automated calibration and a confirmation message
appears.
However, the positions which have just been calibrated are retained.
When the automated calibrations are completed, the software systematically proposes saving the probes in a
file.

Advanced automated calibration


It is possible to carry out automated calibration of the positions of the probe head which cannot be accessed
through the standard positions grid, by indicating the exact positions required in a table. This positions file
can be saved in text format (*.ini) and reused later.
To do this, click this button in the automated calibration window, the following window will then
appear:

Page 493

Enter the values of angles A and B, then the name of the


probe.
Then click this button to add this probe to the list of probes for automated calibration.

Page 494

modifies the information concerning a probe previously selected in the list.


To change the calibration order for the probes, select the probe position to be moved and use the
arrows on the right of the table.
is used to save and name this positions file so as to be able to reuse it. A *.ini or *.txt file (as chosen)
is then created.
This file is shown below:

with the following characteristics:


Value of angle A

Separator

Value of angle B

Separator

22.500

0.000

Name of the
probe
P1

opens a positions file.

Page 495

deletes a previously selected position.


deletes the whole positions table.
used to carry out automated calibration of the shaft (artificially) by entering a
diameter. This is only possible if the probe head has been qualified.
This field is used to enter the nominal diameter of the shaft.
the calibration options must be configured using this button, then choose whether or not to carry
out automated calibration for the shaft in each position.
used to automatically begin the automated calibration, with the same warning messages as
explained above. Likewise, when the calibrations are completed, the software systematically proposes saving
the probes in a file.
returns to the standard automated calibration page: the grid with all the probe head positions to
be selected.
exits the window without applying any changes made.

Note: If a quick qualification of the motorized head has been used to access the automated probe
calibration and if the probes chosen for the automated calibration allow it, the probe head will be fully
qualified.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 496

Locate probes
This command is used to locate a probes file on a calibration sphere, meaning the offsets of the probes of
this file are brought into line with the calibration sphere(s) of the CMM.
This involves recalibrating one or more adjustable head positions on the reference sphere.
The Locate probes window is shown below, similar to the Activate probes window:

Press this button after selecting one of the probes.


In the next window, measure the sphere on which the location is required:

Page 497

This button becomes active after validation of the measurement and automatic closing
of this window.
When you click on this button, the following message is displayed:

prints the probes list.


closes the window without applying any changes made.

Page 498

Note: The sphere can be measured using several probes rather than just the one. In this case, the
result of the location is taken as an average.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following lines are then added:

Page 499

Locate calibration sphere


This function is used to position another reference sphere (physical) on the table of the CMM to be measured.
This is defined by its name, its diameter, its orientation and its X, Y, Z coordinates.
This gives the advantage of being able to calibrate probe positions which cannot be accessed on the Master
sphere.
The location window is shown below:

For a straight sphere

For an inclined sphere

Page 500

used to enter the name of the calibration sphere or to select an existing sphere in the
drop-down list.
used to enter the diameter of the calibration sphere.

used to indicate the inclination angle of the shaft on which the sphere is positioned.
used to enter the diameter of the shaft.

The components of the orientation vector are automatically displayed according to the angle
A and the orientation parameters entered.

Note:

The fields I, J, K can only be edited if this box is checked.

and
These buttons are used to configure the position of the calibration
sphere with regard to the CMM axes, aiming to avoid any collision with the shaft of the sphere in automated
calibration.
When this box is checked the fields of the orientation vector components can be
edited, in order to define a sphere orientated in the CMM volume.

closes the window without applying any changes made.


Click this button when all the settings have been entered.
The following window is displayed:

Page 501

Click this button after choosing one of the probes in the list.
The following window is then displayed:

Measure the calibration sphere, in the same way as for a probe calibration (see Calibrate a probe)
Once the measurement is completed, the sphere location window appears as shown below:

Page 502

Clicking this button displays the following message:

Note: The sphere can be measured using several probes rather than just the one. In this case, the
result of the location is taken as an average.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following lines are then added:

Page 503

Memorize/Move Master sphere


For CMMs which use 23-parameters compensation, the position of the Master sphere must be memorized
with a probe which will be used as a reference probe.
The aim of this procedure is to position the Master sphere with regard to the reference marks of the CMM
and allows for correct use of the compensations.
This procedure is to be carried out in the following cases:
- on CMMs controlled by an ME5007 controller and using the software 23-parameter compensation (MT23.dat
file),
- on any CMM controlled by controllers other than the ME5007, but using the software compensations,
- on CMMs controlled by controllers other than the ME5007 and for which controller-internal compensations
are active (on Mitutoyo, B3CLC or Johanson controller, for example),
- on CMMs controlled by controllers other than the ME5007 and which use the software external software
compensations, such as Mora controllers, for example.
First of all, the MT23.dat file must be located in the same directory as the software configuration files (*.ini
files), and the compensations must be selected in the setup assistant.
The memorization/moving of the Master sphere should then be carried out as follows:
- start the software,
- calibrate a probe in position A0.0,B0.0 on the Master sphere (see Calibrate a probe),
- select the Memorize Master sphere function from the Probes menu.
The following window is then displayed:

Enter the password providing access to the following window:

This window shows the diameter of the Master sphere. Enter the values in X, Y and Z corresponding to the
lever arm of the reference probe (distance from the rotation axis of angle A, adjustable head to the probe ball
center, these distances are given in mm in the CMM alignment).

Page 504

If the probe is vertical, the lever arm is X=0, Y=0, Z= -x:

If the probe is horizontal, the lever arm is X=0, Y= +x, Z=0:

Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.
Click this button to take into account the calibration parameters entered and close the window.

The following message confirms that the operation has been carried out correctly:

Once this procedure has been carried out, the compensations are correctly activated.
You can then select Probes > New file of probes in order to create the required sets of probes.

Notes:

Once the sphere memorization procedure is carried out, the Memorize Master sphere option in the
Probes menu is replaced by Move Master sphere. For coherence in the use of compensations, it is
therefore necessary to carry out this procedure again in full if a Master sphere is moved for any
reason.
This new procedure will reposition the Master sphere with regard to the reference marks of the CMM,
and will also delete any previously declared local spheres.
You will then need to locate (see Locate probes) and then automatically recalibrate (see
Automated calibration) the existing probe files, but also relocate any local spheres (see Locate

Page 505

calibration sphere).

Page 506

Edit information
This function is used to consult traceability information concerning the current probes file and to add
information if required.
The Edit information window is shown below:

The information is divided into two groups:

System data
System data cannot be modified by the user. It covers all the information associated with the probes file. For
example:
PROBE_FILE: name and save path of the probes file
PROBE_DATE: probes file creation date
PROBE_MODIF: date of the last modification.

User data
User data is created and may be modified by the user. It must be in "variable=value" format, as shown above.
These variables can be used in four different ways:
- as information to be consulted
- as a value for exporting the working session: the variable(s) will appear in the header of the exported file
- as variables when learning and running a program

Page 507

- as a value when printing reports

Click this button to validate the information entered.


Click this button to exit the window without applying the changes made.

Page 508

Probes database
This function allows all the probes contained in a file to be viewed in list format.
It gives direct access to the Probes tab in the unified database:

All of the probes are included in a single category, entitled Probes.


The active probe is displayed in bold in the list.
The two icons appear in front of each probe, showing its state.
The following is the list of the different icons, with the description of the corresponding states:

This button is used to activate the selected probe, the same as


double-clicking on a probe.

Page 509

closes the window.

The Probes database window provides quick access to certain functions via context menus:
Context menu
for the Probes category

Context menu
for one or more probes

Select All is used to select all the probes of the list.


Invert Selection is used to select everything which is not highlighted.
New File of Probes is used to initialize a new probes file.
Open... is used to open a probes file.
Save is used to save a set of probes.
Save As... is used to save the current probes file under a different name.
Edit Informations is used to consult the traceability information concerning the current probes file.
Print Probes List is used to print the list of the probes present in a file.
Export Probes List is used to export the list of the probes present in a file, in text format.
Rename is used to rename the selected probe, entering the new name in the following window:

Duplicate is used to create either a probe with the same characteristics as the selected probe or a shaft
type (cylindrical) probe, by assigning it another name and/or specific shaft features in the following window:

Page 510

Check (select) this checkbox to be able to create a cylindrical probe by assigning it a shaft diameter
and offset. This type of probe can be used to program automatic measurement with a cylindrical probe.
Used to enter actual shaft diameter.
Used to apply a ball center offset to the shaft. This indicates probing height on the
shaft.

Important note:

The Cyl. Probe checkbox in the measurement windows must not be checked when a duplicated
probe is used in shaft mode.
Only probe name distinguishes a cylindrical probe from another probe.
Be careful when measuring 3D geometrical features with a cylindrical probe.

Activate is used to select one of the probes defined and/or calibrated as the current probe.
Calibrate is used to define the ball diameter and the position of the probes with regard to the reference
sphere.
Calibrate Cylindrical Probe is used to calibrate the shaft of the selected probe.
Auto. calibration of probe shaft is used to automatically calibrate the shaft of the selected probe(s).
Delete is used to delete the selected probe(s) in the Probes database.

Page 511

Calibration spheres database


The Calibration spheres database can be opened from any

Select the

button opening the unified Database.

tab:

All of the spheres are included in a single category, entitled Calibration spheres.
The Master sphere is displayed in bold in the list of the spheres.

The Calibration spheres database provides quick access to certain functions, using the context menus:
Context menu for the Calibration
spheres category

Context menu
for one or more spheres

Page 512

Select All: used to select all the calibration spheres in the list.
Invert Selection: used to reverse the selection, in other words to select all the spheres not highlighted in the
list.
Delete local spheres: used to delete the local calibration spheres (does not delete the Master sphere).
Rename: used to rename a calibration sphere (impossible on the Master sphere or on a multiple selection).
Delete: used to delete one or more calibration spheres.

Notes:

If the user wishes to delete the Master sphere, a confirmation message is displayed. Deleting
destroys the Master sphere and the local spheres, and the Master sphere definition window is
opened to recreate it.
In 23-parameter correction mode (geometrical compensation), a password is requested in order to be
able to delete the Master sphere. The same applies for the Move Master sphere option. In this
case, the user should memorize the new position of the Master sphere with the reference probe.

Properties: displays the properties of all the spheres used in the working session.

Page 513

Probe calibration with 23-parameter compensation


The purpose of this page is to explain probe calibration management on a CMM with software compensation
enabled.

Probe and Master sphere management


To work on a compensated CMM, a fixed Master sphere must be used, this is assumed not to move. If for
any reason it must be temporarily removed, the Master sphere must be replaced in exactly the same location
to be reused.
The initial probe calibration will determine the position of the Master sphere.

Important note: It is also absolutely necessary to Memorize the master sphere for correct use of
the CMM compensations.
It is sometimes necessary to use other sphere positions to calibrate certain specific probe orientations. In
this case, one or more reference spheres must be created using the Locate calibration sphere function. To
do this, a previously calibrated probe must be used. As many spheres as required may be calibrated.
Thus, a system of reference spheres may be created, composed of a Master sphere and one or more local
spheres.

Important note: The Move master sphere function must not be used on a local sphere.

If the Master sphere has been removed and cannot be returned to the same place, it must be memorized
again with the Memorize Master sphere function. Then, all the files for existing probes must be
re-calibrated, or at least reset (located) on the Master sphere, using the Locate probes function. All the local
spheres must be deleted and then located again.
For a TWIN machine, the Master sphere must be the same for both machines. Consequently, it is usually
place in the median plane of the two machines, as shown below. On a TWIN machine, it is recommended to
use a 3-sphere setup, as shown below. The Master sphere is the upper sphere and it thus useable by both
machines, the other two spheres are the respective local spheres of the two machines.

Page 514

Example: Using probe calibration and sphere creation functions


Memorize Master sphere
Calibrate probe A0.0_B0.0.
Use the X,Y,Z position values of the current probe to Memorize the Master sphere.
Calibrate all the probes that can be calibrated on the Master sphere.
Create a local sphere
Use the Locate calibration sphere to create a local sphere with, for example, probe A0.0_B0.0.

Important note: Do not use the Memorize/MoveMaster sphere function at this stage.
Then calibrate all the probes that cannot be calibrated on the Master sphere.
Checking the results
If, when measuring the Master sphere with a calibrated probe, the coordinates obtained are not close to
0,0,0, this means that probe calibration is not correct.
In this case, the Locate probe file operation must be repeated.
Use A0.0_B0.0 position to measure the Master sphere or the local sphere.

Important note: Specify the exact name of the sphere.

Page 515

CAD files
A CAD file contains all relevant data on a CAD model.
A CAD model is a mathematical model of the workpiece to be controlled (inspected). It is produced by
converting a CAD file created in a third party software program. It represents the workpiece with its nominal
dimensions and positions and may contain ISO tolerances.
The software has its own specific format, .su3. This type of file is, in fact, composed of three files with the
following extensions:
*.su3 CAD data + Wireframe rendering
*.sol3 Solid rendering, facets
*.log A text file report on the conversion operation.

*.gear CAD entity linked to gears


Notes:

The .su3 file is the main file and must be present for the CAD file to be opened.
If the .sol3 file is deleted, it is re-created when solid rendering mode is enabled.

Page 516

CAD Database
This function is used to view a list of the CAD files open.
The window is shown below. This is the CAD tab of the unified database. Features are shown in tree structure
format:

used to select (from the drop-down list) the type of entities that may be
selected by clicking in the 3D View:

Four types of entities may be selected from the drop-down list.


Surface: surface entities (planes, warped shapes, etc.)
3D Curve: curves in 3D (or 2D) space
Point: Point type CAD entities (X, Y, Z coordinates)

Page 517

Tolerance: ISO tolerances


Alignment: Alignment entity
Mesh: mesh entity
Click these buttons to scroll through the different entities when there are several possibilities
(superimposed entities).

Open CAD files are displayed in the Assembly category.The following are displayed in the tree structure: file
name (preceded by the key that allows open CAD files to be differentiated), surfaces, curves, points,
tolerances, alignments and, when appropriate, CAD file layers.

Example: In the following example, two CAD files have been opened.

The tree structure under the *.su3 file shows:


- surfaces
- curves
- points
- ISO tolerances
- alignments
- groups on CAD layers (notably the TOL group and groups 1 and 2).
The software can show geometrical entity types and tolerances by an icon preceding their name, as shown in
the following example:

used to save CAD display and color attributes in a program. This button is
only available when a program is being saved.

Page 518

used to display the pop-up (context) menu for the line selected in the
tree-structure. This menu can also be displayed by right-clicking one of the lines of the assembly tree
structure.
used to close the unified database.

Page 519

New CAD file


This function is used to create a new CAD file (blank file) in .su3 format. Such files can subsequently be
exported in IGES format (*.igs).
The window is shown below:

Select the destination folder in the tree structure.


A list of the existing CAD files is displayed in the window.

Enter the name of the new CAD file in this field.

Select file type (format) for the new CAD file.

used to specify the key used for the CAD file. The key is used to identify
the CAD file. By default, the first CAD file opened or created is assigned the letter A, the second the letter B,
and so on. Hence, when, for example, surface points are calculated, the surfaces used are assigned a
reference composed of the key followed by the number of the surface (this avoids having to use the full name
of the CAD file).

Page 520

Click this button to create the new CAD file.


Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

The new CAD file is displayed in the CAD database. It is composed of four empty layers (surfaces, curves,
points, tolerances and alignments):

CAD features may then be added by creating entities from measured (actual) or defined (nominal) features.
You may also insert one or more CAD files to obtain a single CAD file in .su3 format.

Page 521

Open CAD File, Open Previous CAD File


Open CAD File
This function is used to open one or more CAD files. The CAD files used by the software have the extension
*.su3 and are created by converting files created in a CAD program (see Import CAD Files).
The window is shown below:

Select the folder in which the CAD file(s) have been


saved.
A list of the existing CAD files is displayed in the window. By default, the type of CAD file to be opened is
.su3 (the software CAD file format).

Page 522

Note: CAD files converted using an earlier version of the software may be opened. In this case, select
*.su2 as file type for the file to be opened.

Select the CAD file to open from the list. It is then displayed highlighted.

The name of the selected CAD file is displayed in this field.


If several CAD files have been selected using the Ctrl key, their names are displayed as shown below:

The format of the selected CAD file is displayed in this field.

The key is used to identify the CAD file. It is shown in the Results
window, next to projection surface name. It is used to identify the CAD file used for projection, e.g. for surface
point projection.

Note: If several CAD files are opened at the same time, keys starting with the same letters are followed
by #file number. For example, if three files with A as key are opened, they will respectively have A#1; A#2;
A#3 as key.
If this box is checked, the CAD file will be opened in Read only mode. It cannot be
modified.
When a CAD file protected in this manner is opened, the following warning message is displayed:

allows a preview of CAD files to be obtained by clicking CAD file name. Only surface entities are
displayed. If the CAD file includes curves, points or tolerances, these are not displayed.

used to display the CAD file preview in wireframe or solid rendering mode. If the

Page 523

CAD file has never been rendered in solid mode, the software will not display the preview in solid rendering
mode.

used to display the CAD file with all its surfaces. If Faster is selected, the number
of surfaces to be displayed will be restricted to the first 200 surfaces in the CAD model.
The CAD file may be moved in the same way as in the graphic view. Left-click in the preview window to
recenter the image.

Click this button to open the selected CAD file.


Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

Open CAD File, Open Previous CAD File


This function is used to re-open a recently opened CAD file. A key is automatically assigned to the CAD file
when this command is used.
A list of the last 10 CAD files opened is displayed. The CAD files are numbered and listed from the most
recently opened to the oldest:

In program: These functions can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

For more information on an error occurring during program execution, see Error management.

Page 524

Import CAD Files


This function allows files created in a CAD program to be converted to .su3 format in order for them to be
used by the software.
The software allows the following file types to be converted:
*.vda
*.uni, *.per
*.ige, *.igs, *.iges
*.set
*.xmt, *.x_t, *.x_b
*.prt
*.dlv, *.mod, *.exp, *.model
*.catpart, *.cadproduct
*.idi
*.prt, *.asm

VDAFS files
UNISURF files
IGES files
SET files
PARASOLID files
UNIGRAPHICS files
CATIA files
CATIA V5 files
IDEAS files
Pro/Engineer files

*.step, *.stp

STEP files

The window is shown below:

Page 525

Select the folder in which the CAD file(s) to be converted


have been saved.

A list of files to be converted is displayed in the window.


Select the CAD file to be converted from the list. It is then displayed highlighted.

The name of the selected CAD file is

Page 526

displayed in this field.

This field is used to specify which file


types can be selected for conversion from among: VDA, UNISURF, IGES, SET, CATIA, etc.

Click this button or double-click the file name in the list to add the selected file to the list of
files to be converted.

Check this box to perform multiple conversion. All the files displayed in the list will
be added to the list of files to be converted.

The list of files to convert is displayed in this field.


Several files may thus be included.

used to remove the selected file from the list of files to be converted.

used to create CAD file containing only part of the original (source) CAD file. The following
window is then displayed:

Page 527

Two types of filters may be applied:


- The first allows the layers to be converted (or not converted) to be defined. This obviously means you must
know the names of the layers in the original CAD file (source file).
Specify the layer name to be used for filtering.
Click this button to add the selected layer to the list.
Click this button to remove the selected layer from the list.

Specify whether the layers in the list are to be converted or not by selecting the
corresponding option.

- The second type of filter allows a volume restriction to be specified by entering the volume limit coordinates
(in the CAD alignment) in the following fields:

Note: Make sure volume restrictions signs are correct. If the values entered are inconsistent, the
software displays the following error message:

Page 528

Click this button to apply the filter settings and return to the Import CAD files conversion
window.
Click this button to return to the conversion window without applying any changes made to the
filter settings.

The destination file access path is displayed in this


field.
If you check (select) this box, target
folder structure will be the same as the source folder structure.
Click this button to specify or modify the destination folder of the file(s) to be converted and their
names.
The following window is then displayed:

Page 529

Select the destination folder for the CAD files to be


converted.
A list of existing CAD files is displayed.
the key used for the CAD file may be renamed. The key is used to
identify the CAD file. By default, the first CAD file opened or created is assigned the letter A, the second the
letter B, and so on. Hence, when, for example, surface points are calculated, the surfaces used are
assigned a reference composed of the key followed by the number of the surface.

:
Note: If several CAD files are selected for simultaneous (multiple) conversion, folder name can be
modified. The name of the .su3 file will be the same as that of the original file (for example, DEMO.vda will be
converted to DEMO.su3). The keys used for the CAD files will all start with the same letters, followed by #file
number. For example, if three files with A as key are converted, the three resulting files will respectively have
A#1; A#2; A#3 as keys.

The name of the selected CAD file is shown in this field.


File type (.su3) is displayed in this field.

Page 530

Click this button to apply the target (destination) file settings and return to the Import CAD files
conversion window.
Click this button to return to the conversion window without applying any changes made.

Click this button when all the conversion settings have been selected. The conversion is
performed and the CAD file is displayed on the screen.

If the CAD file has been previously converted in the selected folder, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to replace the exisitng file. The window is closed and the modification
made immediately.
Click this button to close the window without replacing the existing file.

If a CAD file in CATIA format ( *.dlv; *.mod; *.exp; *.model) is converted, the following window is displayed:

Source file path is shown here.

Select the CAD file to be converted.

Page 531

Select the CATIA coordinate


system to be used for the conversion. This coordinate system will be used as the coordinate system (CAD
alignment) of the software format CAD file.
Click this button to apply the CATIA conversion settings and return to the Import CAD files
conversion window.
Click this button to return to the conversion window without applying any changes made.

Note: The software recovers color data when converting CAD files from the IGES, CATIA,
UNIGRAPHICS, and PARASOLID formats, as shown in the examples below:

Page 532

Click this button to close the conversion window without applying any changes made.
Click this button to open this help page (Import CAD Files).

Notes:

If a Catia V5 CAD model containing geometrical tolerances were created in inches, it is necessary to
modify the import default settings in order to preserve units. In the menu Preferences > Advanced
Parameters, User tab :
LinearUnitOfNonSemanticOrGeometricTolerances=2 (the default value is 1).
CAD file assemblies from Catia V5 and ProE via toolkit can be imported directly. There are two
import modes: the import can either be directly performed as a single *.su3 file, or in several *.su3
files that comply with the structure of the original assembly.
To do this, the following variable must be modified via Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User
tab:
bSplittInGoFAssemblies = 0 (the default value is 1).

By default, the assembly is converted into several CAD files while conserving the structure:

Page 533

If the variable is modified, the assembly is fully converted to a single CAD file:

Page 534

Page 535

Close all CAD files


This function allows all open CAD files to be closed.
The files are then no longer displayed in either the CAD Database or in the software window.
However, they are not deleted and you can select Open to recall them.

In program: This function can be used in a program.


The following line is then displayed:

Page 536

Delete CAD files


This function is used to delete (irreversible) CAD files converted to the software format (.su3).
The window is shown below:

Select the folder in which the CAD file(s) to be deleted


have been saved.
A list of the existing CAD files is displayed in the window. By default, the type of CAD file to be opened is
.su3, which corresponds to the software CAD file format.

Select the CAD file to be deleted from the list. It is then displayed highlighted.

The name of the selected CAD file is displayed in this field.


If several CAD files have been selected using the Ctrl key, their names are displayed as shown below:

The format of the selected CAD file is displayed in this field.

Click this button to delete the selected CAD file(s).

Page 537

The following confirmation message is displayed:

Click this button to delete the CAD file (irreversible).


Click this button to close the confirmation message window without deleting the
selected CAD file(s) (to cancel the operation).

Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Page 538

Show Surfaces, Curves, Points, Tolerances,


Alignments, Meshes
These functions are used to show or hide surfaces, curves, points, tolerances, alignments and meshes in the
graphic view.
When one of these functions is selected, the corresponding button in the CAD menu is displayed depressed.
This is the case for the Show Surfaces and Show Points functions in the example below:

The graphic view is thus modified according to the display options selected. These options may be combined:

Example 1: Show Surfaces

Example 2: Show Curves and Show Points

Page 539

Example 3: Show Surfaces and Show Curves

Page 540

Example 4: Show Tolerances

Example 5: Show Alignments

Page 541

Display Normal Orientation


This function is accessible :
- from the CAD menu > Orientation mode,
- from the pop-up menu displayed on the CAD Database Assembly line.
It is used to display the direction of CAD normals in the open CAD file(s).
When this function is selected, CAD Database opens and the following window is displayed:

This window allows you to select the color that will be used to identify CAD surface orientation by applying
this color to the negative part of the CAD surface.

Page 542

CAD model displayed without CAD normal orientation display.

CAD model displayed with CAD normal orientation display.

Notes:

The CAD model must be displayed in solid rendering mode for surfaces with a negative normal to be
displayed. No colors are displayed in wireframe mode.
To disable this function, reselect it in the menu.

Invert Normal Orientation


When normal orientation display mode is enabled, the orientation of a CAD surface normal may be reversed
by clicking the surface while holding down the

key.

The direction of a CAD surface normal may also be applied to the entire CAD model by clicking a surface
while holding down the

and

keys.

If the CAD file cannot be modified (old file format or file in read-only mode), an error message indicates that

Page 543

the operation cannot be performed:

Page 544

Advanced Parameters
This function is used to set the text display for tolerances.
The window is shown below:

Click this button to modify the character font.


A list of Windows fonts is then displayed in the following window:

Select the Font, Style and Size of the text.


Click this button to apply the changes made and return to the Advanced Parameters window.
Click this button to return to the Advanced Parameters window without applying any changes
made.

Page 545

used to modify the left/right margins.

used to modify the top/bottom margins.

Example: Tolerance display

1
2
3

Left/Right margins
Top/Bottom margins
Font size

Tessellation
The window is shown below:

Page 546

Check (select) this box to conserve the default parameters.


Check this box to personalize tassellation of the CAD model. The window is displayed as
shown below:

Move the slider to the left or right for enhanced tessellation quality or
performance.
Check (select) this box to apply the changes to the open CAD models.

Click this button to apply the changes made and close the window.
Click this button to close the window without applying changes.
Click this button to apply the new parameters without closing the window. This allows you to
view the results in the graphic window and perform further adjustments if required without having to re-open
the Advanced Parameters window.

Page 547

Context (pop-up) menus


Context menus are displayed from the CAD Database:

By clicking this button.

- By right-clicking one of the lines in the tree structure.

The different context (pop-up) menus that may be displayed, depending on the line selected, are shown
below:

If Assembly is selected, this menu, containing the same functions as the general CAD menu is displayed:

Page 548

This menu is displayed when a CAD File is selected:

This menu is displayed when a category of entities is selected:

Page 549

This menu is displayed when an entity is selected:

This menu is displayed when an alignment entity is selected:

Page 550

This menu is displayed when a layer is selected:

This menu is displayed when a category of entities in a layer is selected:

Page 551

This menu is displayed when an entity in a layer is selected:

The pages describing the functions of the Assembly context menu are the same as those for the general
menu.
The functions available in the other context menus are described in the following pages, independently of the
context menu in which they appear.

Page 552

Close

This function is accessed from a CAD file line.


Unlike the Close all CAD files function in the general menu, it allows only the selected CAD file to be
closed.
Once closed, the CAD file is no longer displayed in either the CAD Database or in the software window.
However, it is not deleted and selecting the Open function results in it being re-displayed.

Page 553

Rename the key

This function is accessed from a CAD file line.


It allows the key for the selected CAD file to be renamed.
The key is used to identify the CAD file. By default, the first CAD file opened or created is assigned the letter
A, the second the letter B, and so on.
Hence, when, for example, surface points are calculated, the surfaces used are assigned a reference
composed of the key followed by the number of the surface.

Example:

Note: If the name selected to rename the key is already in use, the following message is displayed:

Page 554

Insert

This function is accessed from a CAD file line.


It allows one or more CAD files to be inserted in the selected file.
When this function is selected, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to open the Import CAD files (conversion) window.
The CAD files to be imported may then be converted to .su3 format so that they can be inserted in the
selected CAD file.
Click this button to close the message window without inserting a file.

Page 555

Transform

This function is accessed from the line corresponding to a CAD file or layer.
The window is shown below:

used to perform a Mirror transformation.


used to perform a Rotation transformation.
used to perform a Translation transformation.

A list of set transformations is displayed in the window.


used to remove the selected transformation from the list.
used to modify the selected transformation by accessing the corresponding window.
These buttons are used to change the order of the selected transformation in the list (move it up
or down).

Warning: The order of the transformations is important. The transformations are performed in the order
shown in the list.

Page 556

Specify the file to which the changes are to be


saved. By default, the software offers to name the new .su3 file with the same name as the original file
preceded by the prefix "M_".
used to save only the transformed image in the original file. The original image will
then be lost.
allows both images (the original image and the transformed image) to be saved in
the same file.

Click this button after configuring all the selected settings to perform the transformation
operation on the CAD model.
Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Page 557

Mirror

The Mirror function may be applied to a complete CAD model or to certain layers of a CAD model.
When the Mirror function is selected, the following window is displayed:

Select mirror axis, for example the X axis gives plane YoZ as mirror plane.
Click this button to confirm the selected axis.
Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Example: The right CAD model is the X axis mirror copy of the left CAD model, which remains
displayed as the Original file with copy option has been enabled:

Page 558

Rotation

The Rotation function may be applied to a complete CAD model or to certain layers of a CAD model.
When the Rotation function is selected, the following window is displayed:

Enter the coordinates of the center of rotation.

Define the angles of rotation around the relevant axis.


Click this button to perform the set rotation.
Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Example: In this example, the center of rotation is the origin of the alignment with coordinates X=0,
Y=0, Z=0. Rotation angle around the Z axis is 120.

Page 559

Page 560

Translation

The Translation function may be applied to a complete CAD model or to certain layers of a CAD model.
When the Translation function is selected, the following window is displayed:

Specify the translation values for the relevant alignment axes.


Click this button to perform the set translation.
Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Example: In this example, the translation is performed in the X axis with a negative value:

Page 561

Create entities

This function may be accessed from the line corresponding to a CAD file or group/layer.
It is used to create CAD entities to be added to the selected CAD file.
The different creation methods are described in the following pages.

Page 562

Create Entities From Features

When this option is selected, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to display the Create by features window shown below.
Click this button to close the message window without creating any entity.

Surfaces may be created from nominal or actual features. Click the radio
button corresponding to your desired choice.

Page 563

Circles and arcs may be designated as surfaces or curves. Click the radio
button corresponding to your desired choice.
The display obtained depends on the options selected, an example display is shown below:
- As surface:

The circle is defined

The CAD entity is created

The circle is solid rendered

- As curve: (the circle will remain in wireframe mode)

The circle is defined

The CAD entity is created

The circle is solid rendered

When surfaces are created using a cone or cylinder, the end surfaces may
be created. Check this box to do this.

Example:

Cone defined

Cone not closed (no end


surfaces) with solid rendering

Cone closed (with end


surfaces) with solid rendering

Use this button to select the features to be used to create surfaces.

Page 564

The Feature Database opens:

Select the features from which the surfaces are to be created.


Click this button to add the selected feature to the Create by features
window.
If you click this button, the Feature Database remains open, but
the

button is disabled.

Click this button to add the surface or curve created to the CAD File.
Click this button to close the window.

Note:
CAD entities may be created from all features except toruses.

Page 565

Create Entities From Sections

When this option is selected, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to display the Create Reference Surface from Section window shown
below.
Click this button to close the message window without creating any entity.

Select the section from which the entity is to be created.

Select the type of entity to be created.


To create a Surface entity, the section must be defined and measured. Otherwise, the following message is
displayed when creation is attempted:

Page 566

Click this button to close the message window and return to the Create Reference
Surface from Section window.

To create a Curve entity, the selected section must have been defined or measured. Select one of these two
options by selecting the corresponding radio button:

These buttons are not available when creating a Surface entity.

Enter the width of the surface to be created.

Click this button to add the surface or curve created to the CAD file or the current layer and
display it on screen.

Click this button to close the creation window.

Example: Creating a CAD curve from a section measured with the software
Step 1: Measure a section

Page 567

Step 2: Open a new CAD file/model or use an existing one.

Step 3: In the CAD Database, right-click the relevant CAD model and select Create Entities > From
Sections.

Step 4: In the CAD entity creation window, select the following options :

Page 568

The curve (*.su3 format) is created in the CAD file from the measured section. This curve is displayed in the
CAD Database and named SECT1:

Step 5: IGES export


The CAD model resulting from the add curves operation may then be exported in IGES format.

Step 6: Displaying the result obtained.


- Open a New Working Session.
- Open the CAD file created in the previous step.
The CAD file is displayed and is composed of the curve created by measuring a section:

Page 569

Note: When a CAD curve is created from a section, the section is automatically smoothed, even if the
Smooth sections option is not selected in the Display Options of the 3D View menu.

Page 570

Create Entities By Intersection

When this option is selected, the following window is displayed:

used to define the type of entities that can be selected by clicking the
CAD model.
Select one of the five types from the drop-down list:

.
used to move between entities when several may be selected (superimposed entities).
Click this button to obtain and, if required, modify the coordinates of the point clicked.
The following window is then displayed:

Page 571

When the coordinates of the point have been viewed and, if required, modified, click this
button to return to the intersection window.

used to select the CAD file in which the curves are to be created.
The drop-down list shows all CAD files currently open in the software:

When this button is clicked, the following window is displayed:

A new CAD file may then be created by entering a new name in the Filename field.

Select the layer on which the curves are to be created from the drop-down list.
If this box is checked, only the layer created will be displayed when the
curves are created. The other layers in the CAD file will be hidden.
If this box is checked, the calculation performed may be refined in certain

Page 572

specific cases. This box is not checked by default as calculation time is longer when this option is selected.

There are three ways of defining the cutting plane:


used to determine the origin of the cutting plane by clicking the CAD model:

used to select one of the planes of the active alignment or a measured plane to determine the
cutting plane:

from the drop-down list.


in the database.

Page 573

used to determine the orientation and dimensions of the cutting plane by three clicks in the
CAD model:

The progress bar in the upper part of the window allows the click sequence to be viewed.

Whatever the methiod used, the rotation, translation and plane limit values may be modified to obtain the

Page 574

cutting plane intersecting the CAD model as desired.

used to modify the rotation values:


- By entering them in the fields,
-

or by using the arrows to increase or decrease the values.

used to modify the translation values:


- By entering them in the fields,
-

or by using the arrows to increase or decrease the values.

The translation and rotation values may also be modified using these buttons.
Hold the button corresponding to the desired rotation or translation down while moving the mouse cursor up
(to increase the value) or down (to decrease the value).
Checking this box means the cutting plane is no longer displayed, but the preview of the result
of the intersection of the infinite plane with the CAD model is conserved:

Page 575

used to modify the plane limit values:


- By entering them in the fields,
-

or by using the arrows to increase or decrease the values.

These values may also be modified by holding this button down while moving the mouse cursor up (to
increase the value) or down (to decrease the value).
and

are used to capture the end limit positions of the probe as cutting plane limits.

When all the parameters have been entered, click this button to create the intersection.
Click this button to close the intersection window.

Example: Creating an Edge type entity

Page 576

Entity created and displayed with the rest of the CAD model:

Layer visible only:

Page 577

Page 578

Create Entities By Extension

The window is shown below:

Select the CAD file in which the


extension is to be created.

Select the group/layer in which the extension is to be created.

Enter the desired length of the extension. To create a surface 10 mm long by extension,
click two points on the same surface of the CAD model.
used to enter the desired offset.
Check (select) this box to center the surface created on each side of the edge of the selected
CAD surface.
Check (select) this box to define a portion on which the surface must be extended.

Examples:
Selecting two points to determine extension length:

Page 579

Extension length 10 mm:

10 mm extension centered on edge:

Page 580

10mm offset:

This mode allows the contour of a surface to be selected by clicking the CAD model.
Extension is then performed all around this surface.

Example: Extending the surface around a hole

Page 581

Using the selected CAD surface, the surface created by extension may be defined according to a
given angle or axis:
Enter the desired angle, if required.

Example: With an angle of 30

Select the desired axis, if required.

Example: The Z axis

Page 582

used to invert the surface created.


used to delete the last surface created.
used to close the Creation window.

Page 583

Create Entities From Mesh

When this function is selected, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to display the Create Reference Surface from Mesh window shown
below.
Click this button to close the message window without creating any entity.

Check this box to delete the mesh after having created the CAD entities.
Then, they no longer appear in the Points Cloud Database.

Page 584

The meshes constructed are displayed in the list.

Click this button to display the meshes available in the Points Cloud Database.

Used to delete a mesh from the selection.


Click on this button to create the CAD entities.

Example:
Points cloud

Mesh

CAD

Page 585

Page 586

Create Entities From Alignments

This function is used to create alignments in the digital definition from alignments created during the work
session.
When this function is selected, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to display the Create Reference Surface from Section window shown
below.
Click this button to close the message window without creating any entity.

Use this button to select the alignments to be used to create CAD entities.
The Alignment Database opens:

Page 587

Select the alignments from which the entities are to be created.


Click this button to add the selected alignment to the Create by
alignments window.
By clicking this button, the Alignment Database remains open,
but the

button is disabled.

CClick this button to add the selected alignment the the digital definition.
Click this button to close the window.

Page 588

New / Rename / Delete Layer

New Layer
This function is accessed from a CAD file line.
It is used to create a new layer of CAD entities. The new layer is immediately displayed in the CAD database
tree structure, as shown below:

Each layer is composed of four categories of entities: Surfaces, Curves, Points and Tolerances.

Rename Layer
This function allows the selected layer to be renamed.
The corresponding line may be edited. Enter the new name and click the Enter key to confirm.

Delete Layer

Page 589

This function allows the selected layer to be deleted from the CAD file.
The following message is displayed:

Click this button to delete the layer from the CAD file.
Click this button to cancel the operation and keep the layer in the CAD file.

Page 590

Edit information

This function is accessed from a CAD file line.


It is used to edit traceability information for the selected CAD file.
The window is shown below:

The data is divided into two classes:

System Data
System data cannot be modified by the user, it includes all current CAD file data and, when appropriate,
program data.

Example:
CAD_FILE : name and save path of the CAD file used in the work session.
CAD_DATE : date and time of the work session.
CAD_GMT : date and time of CAD file conversion according to the time zone.

User Data
User data is created and may be modified by the user. It must be in "variable=value" format, as shown above.
These variables may be used:

Page 591

- As information to be consulted
- As variables when learning and running a program

Click this button to save the data entered.


Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Page 592

Change color

This function may be accessed from all the context menus except that obtained by right-clicking the
Assembly line.
It is may be used to change the color of the CAD model, groups of surfaces, curves, points and tolerances,
CAD groups/layers and CAD entities.
The window is shown below:

allows one of the Basic colors available to be selected by clicking in the


desired box.

Page 593

allows the color to be personalized if the desired color is not available in the
Basic colors. Move the cursor until the desired hue is obtained.

used to lighten or darken the selected hue by moving the cursor.

the Personalized colors are displayed in these boxes.

preview allowing the selected color to be viewed.

these fields allow the parameters for the desired color to be entered.

to restore the default color settings.


used to apply the color to the selected CAD database line without closing the window.
used to apply the color to the selected CAD database line and close the window.

Page 594

closes the window without applying any changes made.


to add the color displayed in the preview to the Personalized colors.

The selected color will be applied differently depending on the context menu used to call up the function:
- CAD File: the selected color will be applied to all features in this CAD file.
- Surface, curve, point or tolerance category: the selected color will be applied to all entities (surfaces,
curves, points or tolerances) in the selected category.
- CAD Group/Layer: the selected color will be applied to all features in the group/layer.
- CAD Entity: the selected color will be applied to the selected entity.

Page 595

Save attributes

This function is accessed from a CAD file line.


It allows CAD file display and color attributes to be saved in the software .su3 file.
When the CAD file is next opened, the display and color attributes will then be the same as when the file was
last saved.

This button, accessed from the CAD Database, is used to save CAD file
display and color attributes in a program. This button is only available when a program is being saved.

Page 596

CAD Transparency

This function may be accessed from all the context menus except that obtained by right-clicking the
Assembly line and those associated to tolerance entities..
It allows the degree of transparency of the surfaces of a CAD model to be set.
The window is shown below:

This box must be checked (selected) for the transparency slider to be available.
When checked, the window is displayed as shown below:

Move the slider to the left for greater


transparency or to the right for less transparency.
Click this button to apply the changes and close the window.

Example: CAD model with modified transparency:

Page 597

Page 598

New layer by color

This function is used to create a new layer of CAD entities of the same color. This layer is immediately
displayed in the CAD Database tree structure.

When this function is called from an entity line (for example, SURFACE-0#10), a layer with the color of this
entity is created, including all entities of the same color, classified by type :

When this function is called from an entity type line (for example, Surfaces), as many layers are created as
there are different colors of entities within this type. Entities of the same color are displayed in each layer,
classified by type:

Page 599

When this function is called from a CAD file line (for example, A=Demo3.su3), as many layers are created
as there are different colors of entities of all types (Surfaces, Curves, Points, Tolerances, Alignments) in
the CAD Database. Entities of the same color are displayed in each layer, classified by type:

Page 600

Note: Creating layers by color does not modify the appearance of the CAD model in the 3D View.

Page 601

Visible / Hidden / Inactive / Visible only

These functions may be accessed from the line corresponding to a CAD file or layer.
They are used to change the display attributes of the selected CAD file or layer.

Visible
This function allows the CAD model or layer selected in the graphic view to be displayed.
When a layer is visible, its name is preceded by a lit lightbulb symbol in the CAD Database.

Inactive
This function can only be accessed from the line corresponding to a layer. It allows CAD entities in the layer
to be rendered inactive. Surface points, for example, will not be projected on such surfaces.
In the graphic view, inactive features are shown in the color selected for inactive CAD features (3D View >
Rendering > Colors).
When a CAD layer is inactive, its name is preceded by an unlit lightbulb symbol in the CAD
Database.

Hidden
This function allows the CAD model or layer selected in the graphic view to be hidden.
When a layer is hidden, its name is preceded by a crossed out lightbulb symbol in the CAD
Database.
When a CAD model is hidden, the corresponding icon in the CAD Database is crossed
out.

Visible only
This function can only be accessed from the line corresponding to a layer. It is used to display only the
selected layer in the graphic view.
The other layers and entities that are not on this layer are automatically hidden. Their corresponding icons in
the CAD database are crossed out.

Note: Keyboard shortcuts


Visible only + CTRL: displays the selected group only and render the other groups or entities inactive.

Page 602

Visible only + SHIFT + CTRL: displays the selected group and renders the other groups or entities visible.
Visible only + SHIFT: reverses the visibility (hidden only)

Page 603

Save As

This function is accessed from a CAD file line.


It allows the selected CAD file to be saved under a different name.
The window is shown below:

Select the folder in which the selected CAD file is to be


saved.
A list of existing CAD files is displayed in the window.
Enter the name of the new CAD file in
this field.

CAD file format is displayed in this


field.
Click this button to save the CAD file.
Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Page 604

Properties

This function may be accessed from all the context menus except that obtained by right-clicking the
Assembly line.
It is used to obtain information on the line selected in the CAD database.
The CAD file properties window is as shown below:

In the above example, CAD file properties include the number of CAD entities in the CAD file and the various
files used by the software to read it.

The geometrical entities properties window is as shown below:

Page 605

Delete

This function is used to delete an entity, surface contained in a layer, or entity contained in a layer from the
CAD file according to the line selected in the CAD database.
When this function is selected from the line corresponding to an entity, the following message is displayed:

When this function is selected from the line corresponding to an entity contained in a layer or surface
contained in a layer, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to delete the entity or surface.


Click this button to cancel the operation and keep the entity or surface.

Page 606

Cut / Copy / Paste / Paste highlighted entities

These functions may be accessed from the different context menus, except those obtained by right-clicking
the Assembly and CAD File lines.

Copy
This function is used to duplicate an entity or entity category in order to paste the copy in a group/layer.

Cut
This function is used to cut a group or part of a group/layer in order to move (paste) it to another group/layer.
The name of the group/layer on which the cut operation is being performed is shown by a
scissor symbol in the CAD database, until the paste operation is performed.

Paste
This function is used to place previously copied entities, entity categories or groups/layers in the desired
location in the CAD database tree structure.

Paste highlighted entities


This function allows entities displayed highlighted in the graphic view to be included in the selected
group/layer.
It is thus possible to directly select in the graphic view the entity or entities to be pasted. This avoids having
to search for their name and location in the database.

Note: to select several entities in the graphic view, hold the Ctrl key down.

Page 607

Invert normal

This function may be accessed from the line corresponding to an entity. It is used to invert the normal of axial
features. The surface is displayed highlighted in the 3D View and the normal of this entity is then shown.
When a cylinder, cone or line CAD entity is selected, the normal is displayed. It can then be inverted by
selecting the Invert normal function in the context menu.

Example: Inverting the normal of a cylinder

Page 608

Evaluate Surface Mapping

This function is accessed from an entity line or from an entity group.


It evaluates surface mapping of the entity selected.
The Surface Mapping window then opens.

Page 609

Define, Measure, Retrieve / Define, Measure, Retrieve like

These functions may be accessed from the line corresponding to an entity.


They are used to define, measure or retrieve the entities contained in the CAD file.

Define Feature
This function is used to define the selected entity using the data contained in the CAD file.
The entities defined are then immediately displayed in the Feature Database, classified according to the type
of feature to which they correspond.

Define and Measure a feature / Define and Retrieve a feature


This function is used to access the measure / retrieve function of the entity selected, directly after it has been
defined.
The Automatic measure / retrieve window corresponding to the type of feature is then displayed.

Note: When defining a Point feature, the definition normal assigned by the software may be modified.
Two keyboard shortcuts are available to do this:

+ Define, Define and Measure or Define and Retrieve is used to search for the
normal of the nearest surface in the point's CAD file.

+
+ Define, Define and Measure or Define and Retrieve is used to search for
the normal of the nearest surface in all open CAD files.

Define and Measure a feature as / Define and Retrieve a feature like


This function is used to define and measure / retrieve the selected entity by assimilating it to a feature.
If the selected feature is not sufficiently similar to the entity, the following message is displayed:

If the selected feature is sufficiently similar to the entity, the definition is created.

Page 610

Define and measure feature like


This function is used to define and measure the selected entity by assimilating it to a feature.
If the selected feature is not sufficiently similar to the entity, the following message is displayed:

If the selected feature is sufficiently similar to the entity, the definition is created and the Automatic measure
/ retrieve window corresponding to the type of feature is displayed.

Note: A cylinder/cone CAD entity can be defined, measured / retrieved as a circle.


Thus this circle is defined at the base of the entity with a normal along the cylinder/cone axis.

Page 611

Define Geometrical Alignment

This function is used to automatically create a geometrical alignment using an Alignment entity belonging to
the CAD model. This means the user does not have to manually enter translation and rotation values to
create a geometrical alignment.
The alignment created has the same name as the Alignment entity of the CAD model.

Alignment entity of the CAD model

Alignment created using this Alignment entity

The translations and rotations applied at creation of this alignment are expressed in the active alignment. If
several Alignment entities are simultaneously used to create several geometrical alignments in one
operation, all these alignments will be expressed in the active alignment when they are created.

Note: The geometrical alignment created is automatically enabled (activated).

In program mode: These functions can be used in a program.


The following lines are then added:

Page 612

Page 613

Features

Page 614

Define Feature

Page 615

Define and tolerance Feature

Define Feature
This function is used to enter the nominal dimensions, positions and orientations of a feature.
This function can be accessed:
- Via the menu Features > Define Feature

Via this icon in the Feature bar, then selecting the type of feature to be defined (circle, line, etc.).

The feature definition window (Defining Circle, etc.) displays the definition tab (nominal values)
shown in the following screenshot.

, as

This varies slightly according to the feature selected. For more information, see the pages describing how
each feature is defined.

Name

Page 616

shows the type of feature to be constructed, a circle in this example.

reminder that the window is in definition mode.


when the definition window is opened, the software offers a default feature name,
composed of feature type and an incremental number. For example, CIRC1 when the first circle feature is
defined. This name may be modified by the user. Enter the name of the feature to be created in this field, or
select an existing feature from the drop-down list.
This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database.

Note: The default name may be configured via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters >
Default feature name.

Family
The feature may be assigned a family by entering family name in this field or
selecting an existing family from the drop-down list. If the name entered does not correspond to an existing
family, the family is created.

Alignment
by default, feature alignment is the CAD alignment.
Uncheck (deselect) this box to select a different alignment from the drop-down list:

Note: For this checkbox to be always checked when a definition window is opened, whatever the active
alignment, enable the CADALIGN advanced parameter in the CELEMENT section, USER tab.
CADALIGN = 0 by default, the alignment offered is the active alignment.
CADALIGN = 1 the alignment offered is always the CAD alignment.

Important note: When a distance is evaluated, if an alignment other than the CAD alignment is
selected, the distance is projected in the selected alignment.

Coordinate system
select the desired type of coordinates from: Cartesian, Spherical, Cylindrical X,
Cylindrical Y, or Cylindrical Z.

Page 617

Cartesian coordinates

Spherical coordinates
A and I are expressed in the selected units (e.g.
degrees)

Cylindrical coordinates, X, Y, or Z
Cylindrical Z in this example.

check this box to copy the nominal values of the feature to the actual values.

Dimension
Feature dimensions are: diameter for a circle, height and diameter for a
cylinder, length and width for a rectangle, etc.

Center or Base coordinates

Enter the values for the center of the feature in the corresponding fields.
This may also be done by selecting a feature with the same center:
By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.
allows, for example, a circle to be offset along its normal to include a thickness. Clicking the button

Page 618

displays the following window:

Enter thickness. The position of the center is then re-calculated to include the thickness.
Offset direction is given by the normal: if thickness > 0, offset is in the direction of the feature normal, if
thickness < 0, offset is in reverse direction to the normal.

Before offset according to the normal

After offset according to the normal

Normal

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.
This may also be done by selecting a feature with the same orientation:
By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.
used to reverse the orientation, once a feature has been selected.

Measurement path
used to select measurement path from Inner, Outer or Automatic.
The measurement path selected may affect feature compensation direction at measurement.

Example: Measuring a circle

Page 619

Inner path

Outer path

CAD Nominal
These arrows are used to change projection surface (if using a CAD file based definition).

When you have completed all the fields, click this button to define the feature (and to continue
defining other features if required).
This button is only available if there is a calibrated probe. It is used to define a feature and gives
direct access to the automatic measurement window.
closes the window without applying any changes made. In this case, the feature is not defined.

Notes:

A feature may be defined by clicking the CAD model of the workpiece. The center coordinates,
normal vector and dimension(s) are displayed in the definition window. Then, simply click
.

If a field is not completed, the feature will only be partially defined. It will be displayed in the Feature
Database, but will not have a graphic representation.

When defining a feature by clicking the CAD, the selected CAD entity may not match the type of the
feature (e.g. when defining a circle feature by clicking an ellipse entity).
Then the form fault of the curve selected to define the feature is tested. If this is greater than the
maximum form fault, a warning message is displayed:

Page 620

The maximum form fault value can be configured via le menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, USER
tab, CMTDEFINITIONPAGE section:
FWARNINGFORMFAULT = 0.5 by default.
When the form fault cannot be calculated, the following message is displayed:

It may also be displayed when using arrows to switch from a solution to another.

Tolerancing position
Position tolerances may be applied to a feature.
This function is accessed from the definition window, opened to display the

tab:.

Page 621

A higher and lower tolerance may be applied to each of the feature center coordinates, displayed in the
corresponding fields.
If one of the boxes is unchecked (deselected), the tolerances for this coordinate will not
be applied.
All the tolerance values may be modified, as may the default values (via the Set-Up Default Parameters
menu option). If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the
user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance:

Tolerancing dimensions
Dimensional tolerances may be applied to a feature.

Page 622

This function is accessed from the definition window, opened to display the

tab:.

Higher and lower tolerances may be applied to feature dimensions.


If this box is unchecked, the tolerances for this dimension will not be applied.
Tolerance values may be modified, either by entering the values in the corresponding fields, or by selecting
the tolerance from the drop-down list. The default values offered may be modified via the Set-Up Default
Parameters menu option. If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed
informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance:
Select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. The list contains the applicable ISO
tolerance for shafts or bores. For example, H7 corresponds to a bore (hole) and h7 to a shaft.

Note: A personalized list of tolerances may be created. To do this, open the "usertol.dat" file located in
the software installation folder. Tolerances may then be added to the tolerances already contained in this file
or the existing tolerances deleted or modified. The new tolerances are then available in the drop-down list.

Example: Adding a tolerance for diameters varying from 0.013 to 0.750mm.


[ToleranceName] (0.013<->0.750)
0.125

-100

400.0

Page 623

0.250

-100

500.0

0.500

-100

600.0

0.750

-100

800.0

For example, if the diameter is between 0.125mm and 0.250mm, the tolerance applied is -0.1/+0.5.

Dynamic Link to CAD


This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with the defined feature.
It is accessed via the definition window, opened to display the

tab:

If this box is checked, the link between the feature definition and the CAD file is fully
dynamic.
Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at
file conversion to *.su3 format.
This function can be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Page 624

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 625

Define Point

Page 626

Define Point

To define a (geometrical) Point feature, select Point via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
in the Feature Bar in definition mode

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Point features are:

Enter the coordinates of the point in the X, Y, and Z fields (if Cartesian coordinates are
being used)

Page 627

The

button is used to display the following dialog box:

Option X is available if the Y and Z coordinates are entered. The X coordinate is calculated by
intersection between the (X) line of dimension (Y,Z) and the CAO model. The same applies to options
Y and Z by rotation.

Option XY is available if the Z coordinate is entered. Then the X and Y coordinates are calculated by
intersection between the XY plane of dimension Z and all curves of the CAO model (the first curve
detected is used).

Option XYZ is available if the X, Y and Z coordinates are entered. Then the coordinates are updated
by projection of the (X,Y,Z) point onto the CAO model.

Then enter the values I, J, K for the normal vector.

In program: If you are using a DMIS program, the following procedure must be used to create an
egdept entity:
Check this box, then enter:

the coordinates of the point,

its normal vector,

and the orientation of the corresponding surface.

Page 628

Note: When the box

is checked:

A left click on the CAD defines a point on an edge.

A left click on the CAD, with the

key held pressed, defines a point that will not be on an edge.

Page 629

Tolerance

Position Tolerance
To assign position tolerance values to a Point feature, select Point via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

.
:

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the point have been entered in the
definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 630

Dimension Tolerance
To assign dimension tolerance values to a Point feature, select Point via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

.
:

The dimensional tolerance of a geometrical point is applied to the Normal Deviation (ND).

Enter the upper and lower ND tolerance values in these fields.


This box is automatically checked when tolerances values are entered in order to apply them.
Uncheck (deselect) the box if you do not want to apply the tolerances.
Select the axis in which Normal Deviation will be calculated from the drop-down
list:
- Auto: distance between the nominal and actual points according to the surface normal:

Page 631

- X, Y or Z Axis: distance between the nominal point and actual point according to the axis selected in the
active alignment:

Page 632

- 3D: distance between the nominal point and real actual point (space):

Page 633

Notes:

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that
they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select
the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 634

Define Line

Page 635

Define Line

To define a Line feature, select Line via the menu Features > Define or click
definition mode

in the Feature Bar in

The definition window has two tabs, each corresponding to a method for defining a line.

Method A

The fields common to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Line features are:

Page 636

Enter the coordinates of the start point in the X, Y, and Z fields (if Cartesian coordinates are
being used)

Enter the coordinates for the end point of the line.

Enter the coordinates of the normal to the projection plane.


If the coordinates of the normal are entered, the latter is displayed in the 3D View:

Method B

Page 637

Manual Definition

Enter the coordinates for the start point of the line.

Enter the direction of the line.

Enter the length of the line. These coordinates may need not be entered. This value may

Page 638

need not be entered.

Enter the coordinates of the normal to the projection plane. These coordinates may need not
be entered.
If the coordinates of the normal are entered, the latter is displayed in the 3D View:

Defition by clicking in 3D View


The line can be completely defined by a single click on the CAD in the 3D View, the projection plane being
the plane on which clicking is performed.
The line can also be defined by specific points:
Hold the
key depressed and click once on the CAD to fill in the start point and the normal to the
projection plane, and a second time to fill in the end point.

Page 639

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 640

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 641

Define Circle

Page 642

Define Circle

To define a Circle feature, select Circle via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Circle features are:

Enter the diameter of the circle

Page 643

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Definition of a circle by clicking a cone or cylinder.


A circle can be defined using the angular properties of a cone or using an offset with respect to a cylinder.
After opening the circle definition window, keep the
key depressed and click one of the two 3D
features concerned. The circle is calculated according to the selected position:

A positive or negative offset can be added by clicking the


button. If the reference feature is a cone, the
diameter and middle of the circle are calculated again; if it is a cylinder, only the middle is calculated again:

Page 644

Page 645

Tolerance

Position Tolerance
To assign position tolerance values to a Circle feature, select Circle via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

.
:

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the circle have been entered in the
definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 646

Dimension Tolerance
To assign dimension tolerance values to a Circle feature, select Circle via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

.
:

The dimensional tolerance for a circle is applied to the diameter. The diameter entered in
the definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the diameter.
or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.
This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to
apply the tolerances.

Page 647

Notes:

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that
they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select
the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 648

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 649

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 650

Define Arc

Page 651

Define Arc

To define an Arc feature, select Arc via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
Bar in definition mode

in the Feature

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Arc features are:

Enter arc diameter.

Page 652

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Enter the coordinates for the start point of the arc:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Enter the coordinates for the end point of the arc.

Page 653

Tolerance

Position Tolerance
To assign position tolerance values to an Arc feature, select Arc via the menu Features > Define Feature
or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the arc have been entered in the
definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 654

Dimension Tolerance
To assign dimension tolerance values to an Arc feature, select Arc via the menu Features > Define Feature
or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

The dimensional tolerance for an arc is applied to the diameter. The diameter entered in
the definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the diameter
or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.
This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to
apply the tolerances.

Page 655

Notes:

If an incorrect sign or value is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the
user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up
Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 656

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 657

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 658

Define Plane

Page 659

Define Plane

To define a Plane feature, select Plane via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

The definition window has two tabs, each corresponding to a method for defining a plane.

Method A

Page 660

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Plane features are:

Enter the coordinates of a geometrical point on the plane in the X, Y, and Z fields (if
Cartesian coordinates are being used)

Then enter the values I, J, K for the normal vector.

Boundary

The plane may be bounded by entering the lengths to be projected on each axis in the
corresponding fields.
For a plane with a Z normal, for example, the projected lengths to be entered are on the X and Y axes.

Page 661

Method B

The feature may be defined by a single click on the CAD model. The software then searches for the
selected entity and calculates all the points composing this feature, thus giving a perfect description of plane
bounding. The coordinates of the points are displayed in the window:

Page 662

to select a feature from those available in the drop-down list.


to select a feature using the Browse Database function.

to delete the selected point.


to move to the previous or next point in the list.

A point may be added to the list by entering its coordinates in the corresponding
fields and clicking the

button.

The points clicked in the CAD model bound the defined plane.
At each click, the coordinates of the point are displayed in the window:

Page 663

to select a feature from those available in the drop-down list.


to select a feature using the Browse Database function.

to delete the selected point.


to move to the previous or next point in the list.

A point may be added to the list by entering its coordinates in the corresponding
fields and clicking the

button.

This function enables you to define a plane using the contour of a previously measured (or even
uniquely defined) plane. If a defined and measured plane is used (nominal and actual values), the theoretical
values (nominals) of the plane are retrieved.
Select a plane from those available:
By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 664

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Boundary point coordinates are displayed as shown below:

Note: The coordinates retrieved by this method are grayed out (shaded), as are the three coordinate
fields allowing points to be added to the list. To modify or add points,

mode must be selected.

Page 665

Defining a compound (composed) plane

When using CAD models on which the planes to be measured are composed of several surfaces that are
distant from each other, you can define and measure a single, identical plane.
When plane definition is performed by clicking a CAD model, a single surface is selected:

This may be composed of several CAD surfaces.


To define this type of plane, hold down the

key and click the other surfaces composing the plane:

Page 666

In the last tab in the Defining Plane window, the CAD surfaces contained in the compound plane are then all
used in Dynamic Link to CAD mode, if this function is enabled.

Page 667

When the plane has been defined, all the surfaces composing it will be taken into account to create its
automatic measurement trajectory:

Page 668

Page 669

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 670

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 671

Define Sphere

Page 672

Define Sphere

To define a Sphere feature, select Sphere via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Sphere features are:

Enter sphere diameter.

Page 673

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Page 674

Tolerance

Position Tolerance
To assign position tolerance values to a Sphere feature, select Sphere via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

.
:

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the sphere have been entered in
the definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 675

Dimension Tolerance
To assign dimension tolerance values to a Sphere feature, select Sphere via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

.
:

The dimensional tolerance for a sphere is applied to the diameter. The diameter entered in
the definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field. The feature is then defined with the new
diameter.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the diameter
or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.
This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to
apply the tolerances.

Page 676

Notes:

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that
they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select
the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 677

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 678

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 679

Define Cylinder

Page 680

Define Cylinder

To define a Cylinder feature, select Cylinder via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
the Feature Bar in definition mode

in

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Cylinder features are:

Enter cylinder height. The origin of this distance is the base of the cylinder. If height is
positive, the orientation will be the same as that of the normal. If height is negative, the orientation will be the
opposite to that of the normal.
Enter the diameter of the cylinder

Page 681

Enter the three coordinates for the center of the base in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the approximate axis in the corresponding fields.

Page 682

Tolerance

Dimension Tolerance
To assign dimension tolerance values to a Cylinder feature, select Cylinder via the menu Features >
Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

.
:

The dimensional tolerance for a cylinder is applied to the diameter. The diameter entered in
the definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the diameter.
or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.
This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to
apply the tolerances.

Page 683

Notes:

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that
they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up
Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 684

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 685

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 686

Define Cone

Page 687

Define Cone

To define a Cone feature, select Cone via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Cone features are:

Enter cone angle.


Enter cone height. Height is measured using the base as origin. If height is positive, the
direction will be the same as that of the normal. If height is negative, the direction will be the opposite to that
of the normal.

Page 688

Enter the diameter of the base of the cone.

Enter the three coordinates for the center of the base in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the approximate axis in the corresponding fields.

Page 689

Tolerance

Dimension Tolerance
To assign dimension tolerance values to a Cone feature, select Cone via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

The dimensional tolerance for a cone is applied to the angle. The angle entered in the
definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the angle.
or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.
This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to
apply the tolerances.

Page 690

Notes:

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that
they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select
the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 691

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 692

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 693

Define Torus

Page 694

Define

To define a Torus feature, select Torus via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Torus features are:

Enter the A and B diameters of the torus.

Page 695

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal in the corresponding fields.

Page 696

Tolerance

Position Tolerance
To assign position tolerance values to a Torus feature, select Torus via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

.
:

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the torus have been entered in the
definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 697

Dimension Tolerance
To assign dimension tolerance values to a Torus feature, select Torus via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

.
:

and
The dimensional tolerance for a torus is applied to the diameters. The A
and B diameters entered in the definition tab are displayed here. They may be modified in these fields.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each diameter.
or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.
This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to
apply the tolerances.

Page 698

Notes:

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that
they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select
the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 699

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 700

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 701

Define Rectangle

Page 702

Define

To define a Rectangle feature, select Rectangle via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
the Feature Bar in definition mode

in

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

Page 703

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Rectangle features are:

et

Enter the length and width of the rectangle.

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the orientation vector in the corresponding fields.

Page 704

Tolerance

Position Tolerance
To assign position tolerance values to a Rectangle feature, select Rectangle via the menu Features >
Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

.
:

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the rectangle have been entered in
the definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 705

Dimension Tolerance
To assign position dimension values to a Rectangle feature, select Rectangle via the menu Features >
Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

.
:

and
The dimension tolerance of a rectangle is applied to the length
and/or width. Length and width are entered in the definition tab displayed here. They may be modified in these
fields.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each dimension.
or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.
This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to
apply the tolerances.

Page 706

Notes:

If an incorrect sign or value is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the
user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up
Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 707

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 708

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 709

Define Slot

Page 710

Define

To define a Slot feature, select Slot via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
Bar in definition mode

in the Feature

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

Page 711

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Slot features are:

et

Enter the length and width of the slot.

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the orientation vector in the corresponding fields.

Page 712

Tolerance

Position Tolerance
To assign position tolerance values to a Slot feature, select Slot via the menu Features > Define Feature
or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the slot have been entered in the
definition window, they are displayed here. These values may be modified.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 713

Dimension Tolerance
To assign dimension tolerance values to a Slot feature, select Slot via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

.
:

and
The dimension tolerance of a slot is applied to the length and/or
width. Length and width are entered in the definition tab displayed here. They may be modified in these fields.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each dimension.
or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.
This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to
apply the tolerances.

Page 714

Notes:

If an incorrect sign or value is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the
user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up
Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 715

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 716

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 717

Define Hexagon

Page 718

Define

To define a Hexagon feature, select Hexagon via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
the Feature Bar in definition mode

in

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Hexagon features are:

Enter the dimension of the hexagon.

Page 719

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the orientation vector in the corresponding fields.

Page 720

Tolerance

Position Tolerance
To assign position tolerance values to a Hexagon feature, select Hexagon via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

.
:

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the hexagon have been entered in
the definition window, they are displayed here. These values may be modified.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 721

Dimension Tolerance
To assign dimension tolerance values to a Hexagon feature, select Hexagon via the menu Features >
Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

.
:

The dimensional tolerance for a hexagon is applied to the dimension. The dimension
entered in the definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the dimension.
or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.
This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to
apply the tolerances.

Page 722

Notes:

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that
they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select
the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 723

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 724

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 725

Define Ellipse

Page 726

Define Ellipse

To define an Ellipse feature, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Ellipse features are:

Enter the A and B diameters of the ellipse.

Page 727

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the orientation vector in the corresponding fields.

Page 728

Tolerance

Position Tolerance
To assign position tolerance values to an Ellipse feature, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

.
:

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the ellipse have been entered in
the definition window, they are displayed here. These values may be modified.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 729

Dimension Tolerance
To assign dimension tolerance values to an Ellipse feature, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

.
:

and
The dimensional tolerance for an ellipse is applied to the diameters. The
diameters entered in the definition tab are displayed here. They may be modified in these fields.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each diameter.
or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.
This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to
apply the tolerances.

Page 730

Notes:

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that
they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select
the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 731

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature.
It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the
window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and
CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its
definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to
the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface.
However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the
desired surface.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 732

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not
then be found at import.

Page 733

Define Surface Point

Page 734

General

Page 735

Types of Surface Points

Surface points are features linked with the CAD surface of a CAD model, often used to determine the defects
of any types of workpieces.
Surface point type may be selected from the following drop-down list in the surface point definition and
measurement windows:

The software automatically offers different surface point names according to the type of projection selected:
Type of projection

Name

On a surface
On an edge with ball
On an edge with shaft
On a flush edge
On a gap
On a flange
On a curve
On a 3D curve
on a 3D curve without ball compensation
On a round edge (with ball and with
shaft)
No Trim
Scribe line

SRF
BRD
BRT
AFF
JEU
FLR
CRB
CRB
CRB
SRT
SSR
SCL

Surface
Surface type surface points are used to quantify a defect normal to the surface of the part.

Edge
Edge type surface points are used to quantify a defect, not normal to the surface, as is the case for Surface
type surface points, but at a tangent to the surface.

Flush
This mode is identical to Surface type surface point measurement. The name Flush is used as, generally,
measurement is performed on a workpiece other than that of the CAD model. This may be, for example,
measurement of a tool whereas only the CAD model of the workpiece produced by the tool is available. This
is performed in such manner as to obtain the value corresponding to the flushness between the workpiece
and tool.

Gap
Gap type surface point measurement is similar to an Edge type surface point measurement, in which
probing direction and, consequently, ball radius compensation, is performed in the other direction.

Page 736

Flange
Flange measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point at the edge of a piece of sheet
metal that is not folded at right angles, the angle between the edge of the metal sheet and the rest of the
workpiece being known (workpieces before swaging).

Curve
Curve type surface points have the same function as Edge type surface points. The difference being that the
measured points are projected onto a curve type CAD entity and not a surface type CAD entity.
3D Curve type surface points are used, among other things, to measure pipes. This is because these points
allow (via material thickness) pipe pitch line (neutral axis) to be checked.
It is also possible to use 3D curve without ball compensation type surface points which are identical to
the 3D curve but without taking into account the radius of the ball being used when measuring these points.

Round Edge
Round Edge measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point on the edge of a piece of
sheet metal that has been swaged.

No Trim
No Trim type surface points allow, in certain specific cases, workpieces presenting slight variations in
respect to hollow areas to be checked using the same CAD model.

Scribe line
Scribe line type surface points are used to give a lateral defect according to a dimension line (CAD curve).

Page 737

Selecting the definition surface

When a surface point is defined by clicking the CAD model, the definition window is displayed as shown
below:

Name of the CAD surface selected when defining the surface point.
This button is used to switch projection mode to automatic mode. In this case, the software attempts to
project the measured (actual) surface point according to its own projection criteria (see Re-evaluate Auto.
All Surface Points), independently of the previously selected surface.
These buttons in the definition window are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by
the click in the CAD model until the desired surface is reached. This is because when several surfaces are
superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may be on a surface other than the desired surface, as
shown below:

Page 738

The selected CAD entity is shown highlighted in the 3D View and in the CAD Database.

Page 739

Projection and Search Distance

Once the measurement has been made, the point may be projected onto different CAD entities (Surface or
Curve) using different types of projection. This choice is made in the surface feature measurement window:

Different types of projection are available from the drop-down list:

Standard (Surface, Edge or Curve)


Flush
Gap
Flange
Round Edge
Scribe line

In addition, the Edge and Round Edge projection modes may be used with a cylindrical probe (shaft)
measurement.

Search Distance
From a measurement point (ball center coordinate), the software searches for a theoretical (nominal) point on
the nearest surface(s) using a projection mode. If there are several solutions, the theoretical point offered by
default will be the point for which the deviation vector is the closest to the probing point approach vector.

Note: By default, the search distance is calculated from probe ball radius. Thus, if different ball
diameters are used, this does not affect the search distance. Search distance calculation mode may be
modified via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User tab. When the parameter
iSearchDistanceMode is set to 1, the search distance is calculated from probe ball center. When set to 2,
the search distance is calculated from probe ball radius as shown in the following diagram:

Page 740

P1: Measured (actual) workpiece


P2: Nominal workpiece
D1: Search distance calculated from ball center
D2 : Search distance calculated from ball radius

Any point outside the search area is excluded and, if no there is theoretical point in this area, the following
message is displayed:

The reasons for which deviation cannot be calculated may be:

Search distance is too small.


The current alignment in which the software gives the points does not match workpiece CAD
alignment (the first step in measurement is to create this current alignment).
Workpiece CAD alignment does not correspond to the workpiece (right-hand workpiece with left-hand
workpiece CAD alignment for example).

For further information, see Set up default parameters.

Page 741

Thickness and Offset

Thickness
The thickness of a surface point may be specified at definition, measurement or modification.
To know whether or not use of a material thickness is required, you need to know the position of the material
with respect to the CAD model and with respect to the probing direction of the surface points. There are three
possible cases:

Case 1:
Thickness must be a positive value as the
workpiece is encountered before the CAD model.

Case 2:
No thickness as the workpiece is encountered at
the same time as the CAD model.

Case 3:
Thickness must be a negative value as the CAD
model is encountered before the workpiece.

Offset

Page 742

An offset may be applied to an Edge type surface point. This offset represents a surplus or lack of material at
the edge of the surface and not according to the CAD surface normal, as is the case for thickness:

In addition, a thickness may be applied to the edge point reference feature (if automatic edge point
measurement mode is used), when the the reference feature is measured during this automatic
measurement. This thickness may be entered when the edge point is defined or in the edge point
measurement window before automatic measurement is enabled.

Warning: This thickness is not applied for edge point calculation. It allows the measurement path of
the edge point(s) to be generated according to the reference feature used:

Page 743

Using Reference Features

For Edge, Gap, Flange, Curve or Round Edge surface points, an additional field in the definition window is
used to specify the reference feature:

.
This reference feature allows any position/orientation error of the area probed to be taken into account.

Example: Measuring an edge point

Without reference feature:

If no reference is used, i.e. if AUTO is selected from the drop-down list, the measured pont is projected
perpendicular to the CAD surface.

With reference feature (measured plane):

However, if a reference feature is used (here, the plane), the measured point will first be projected onto the

Page 744

previously measured plane, then onto the CAD surface. This allows the position error of the measured
workpiece to be taken into account.

Page 745

Lock Nominal Surface Points

When a surface point is defined (nominal value) and then measured (actual value), its nominal position is
modified. This is because Mthe software automatically re-projects (re-evaluates) the measured point on the
most appropriate projection surface. See Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points
If you do not want surface point nominal position to be automatically modified, you must set the Lock
Surface Point property accordingly. This property is accessed from the Feature Database, by clicking
after selecting a surface point.
The following window is displayed:

If this box is checked, the nominal coordinates of the surface point are locked and will not
change during measurement.
ND will be calculated using the normal of the nominal point:

Page 746

In program: This property may be selected in a program, in a line defining a surface point.

If the Lock Surface Point property is not used, the measured surface point will be re-projected on the CAD
model and its nominal value thus modified. See the page Surface Point Results, ND, and Signs.

Page 747

Define and tolerance Surface Point

Define Feature
To define a Surface Point feature, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
in the Feature Bar in definition mode

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Surface Point features are:

Select the type of surface point to be defined from the drop-down list.

Manual Definition

Page 748

Enter the coordinates of the surface point in the X, Y, and Z fields. If only two of the three
coordinates are entered, the X, Y, or Z buttons may be used to obtain the missing coordinate from the other
two. Click the button for the empty field to have the software search for the best solution.

The

button is used to display the following dialog box:

Option X is available if the Y and Z coordinates are entered. The X coordinate is calculated by
intersection between the (X) line of dimension (Y,Z) and the CAO model. The same applies to options
Y and Z by rotation.

Option XY is available if the Z coordinate is entered. Then the X and Y coordinates are calculated by
intersection between the XY plane of dimension Z and all curves of the CAO model (the first curve
detected is used). For the surface point, the projection surface is the nearest CAO entity from the
intersection point.

Option XYZ is available if the X, Y and Z coordinates are entered. Then the coordinates are updated
by projection of the (X,Y,Z) point onto the CAO model.

Then enter the I, J, K values for the normal vector.

CAD Definition
A feature may be defined by a single click on the CAD model. The software then searches for the selected
entity.
The name of the projection surface is displayed in this field. By default, the software
offers the nearest surface.
A surface point can also be defined on a curve. To do so, press the
key and click the CAO model.
The software then searches for the nearest curve from the selected position. The associated surface and the
curve are then displayed highlighted:

Page 749

The normal of the surface point is determined by the highlighted surface.

used to switch surface point projection to AUTO mode. This authorizes the software to select the
projection surfaces to be used according to the priority criteria described in the Re-evaluate Auto. All
Surface Points function.

Thickness
Check this box to apply a thickness. The thickness may be selected from
the drop-down list or entered in the field. For more information, see the Thickness and Offset page.

Reference Feature (container)


For Edge, Gap, Flange, Curve or Round Edge surface points, there is an additional area allowing a
reference feature (container) to be determined:

Select the reference feature from the drop-down list or from the database
by clicking

.
An offset value may be entered for Edge or Curve surface points.

A gap value may be entered for Gap type surface points. In this case, the nominal gap
represents the nominal value of the ND and is never zero.
A flange angle value may be entered for Flange type surface points.
An edge radius value may be entered for Round Edge type surface points.

Page 750

Tolerance

Position Tolerance (Coordinates Tolerances)

To assign position tolerance values to a Surface Point feature, select Surface Point via the menu Features
> Define Featureor click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

For further details, see the Define (and tolerance) feature page.

Dimension Tolerance

To assign dimension tolerance values to a Surface Point feature, select Surface Point via the menu
Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

Page 751

The dimensional tolerance of a surface point is applied to the Normal Deviation (ND).
For further details, see the Define (and tolerance) feature page.

Page 752

Define Section

A section is a set of interconnected surface or geometrical points. A section allows the real profile of a
workpiece to be viewed.
Even if no CAD file is open, you can define, tolerance, and specify the projection plane for the points of a
section in order to measure it manually.

Page 753

Define Section

To define a Section feature, select Section via the menu Features > Define Feature or click
Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

The window has two tabs, each corresponding to a method for defining a section.

Method A

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define and tolerance Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Plane features are:
The cutting plane, displayed in red in the 3D View, is parallel to one of the predefined planes
in the definition alignment. Selected the desired predefined plane from the drop-down list.
This field is used to specify the offset distance of the cutting plane.

Page 754

Check this box for the angle of inclination of the section to be kept when the defined point is
clicked and enter the value of the angle in the adjacent field.
Click this button to modify the axis of rotation of the cutting plane.

Specify the limits of the cutting plane :

and

are used to capture current probe position to determine the limits of the section.

Select this box to determine the coordinates of the start point of the section in the corresponding
fields. You may also do this by clicking the desired point on the CAD model or by using the
buttons. If only two of the three coordinates are entered, these buttons may be used to obtain the missing
coordinate from the other two (only if using a CAD model). Click the button for the empty field for the software
to search for the best solution.
When a start point is selected, the cutting plane is displayed at the specified position in the 3D View and the
intersection between the cutting plane and the CAD model is displayed in red on the CAD model.
Select this box to determine the coordinates of the end point of the section in the same way as for
the start point.
Click this button to specify the direction of departure for the section (section start direction):

Page 755

With the button in the


position

With the button in the


position

select the type of point to be used to define the start and end points for section
definition from:
- Surface: the start point of section definition will directly be the point clicked on a CAD surface.
- Edge: the start point of section definition will be the edge point identified by clicking. If the
key
is held down while clicking, the edge point - that is to become the start point of the section - will be the
intersection of the edge with the cutting plane whose dimension is defined in "Cutting Plane".

Page 756

Note: In edge mode, increasing or decreasing the cutting plane dimension value using the arrows
allows the section start point to be moved along the edge (in as far as this is possible). To achieve this, the
cutting plane must not be at too great a tangent to the edge to be followed (an audio signal is emitted when
the following edge point cannot be found. The start point is then the previous point, simply moved along the
axis of the cutting plane. It is no longer located on the edge).

This option allows a new cutting plane to be determined each time a new section is defined. If this
option is unchecked, the cutting plane used is that used when defining the first section.

Example: Sections SECT1 and SECT2 are defined in the same cutting plane, XY, with the same
dimension in the Z axis, -5.000
In this case, uncheck the New box when defining section SECT2. The cutting plane will then automatically
be the same as that used for section SECT1.

Page 757

If this box is checked, the software defines the section using a new algorithm. This function is
commonly used for automobile bodywork CAD models. With the new algorithm, it is no longer the facets that
are used, but the CAD (mathematical) model that is directly used.

Page 758

Without Optimize

With Optimize

Notes:
In offline simulation mode, a form fault may be displayed. This is because, to reduce processing time, the
facets of the CAD model are used instead of the CAD surfaces when defining a section. This is also the case
for solid rendering.
The section and probing path points are defined on the facets. There is thus a slight difference between the
points to be probed and the CAD model.
This has no consequences on real measurements as the points probed on the workpiece are projected onto
the CAD surfaces to obtain the correctly calculated form fault (ND):

However, when offline measurements are made, probing is simulated on the workpiece but performed on the

Page 759

facets. However, the software projects the probing points onto the CAD surfaces. There is thus a form fault in
simulation mode:

Method B
This method is used to define a section from a 3D curve.

Page 760

The name of the selected curve is displayed in this field. A curve is selected by
clicking in the 3D View. The curve found closest to the location clicked is then added to the drop-down list
of Curves. Several curves may be selected by holding the
are successively added to the drop-down list.

key down while clicking. The curves clicked

Note: When a section is defined from curves, the order of the parts of the section corresponds to the
order of the curves in the drop-down list. This order (sequence) is important when measurement is performed.

used to delete the selected curve.


When this box is checked (selected), any change made (direction of the curve,
deletion, calculation mode of the normals, direction of the normals) is applied to all the curves. This box must
be checked (selected) before any changes are made. The change(s) will not be applied unless validated
(confirmed) by clicking the Close button.
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible curves indicated by the click in the CAD
model until the desired surface is reached.
used to reverse (invert) the direction of the selected curve.

Page 761

The normals may be calculated by several different methods:


Auto: only valid if the selected curve is flat enough. The calculated normals are then in the plane of the curve.
Reference: used to specify a reference plane or axis by selecting it from the adjacent drop-down list. If a
plane is selected, the calculated normals are in this plane. If an axis is selected, the calculated normals have
the same direction as this axis.
Surface: only valid when a CAD file is open. The calculated normals are the surface normals.
used to reverse the direction of the normals.

Without reversing the direction of the normals

With the direction of the normals reversed

Page 762

Tolerance

To assign dimension tolerance values to a Section feature, select Section via the menu Features > Define
Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in definition mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

.
:

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values in these fields.


This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to
apply the tolerances.

Notes:

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that
they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up
Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 763

Define Surface

Page 764

Define Surface

To define a Surface feature, select Surface in the Features > Define menu.
The advantage of a Surface feature is that it allows a path to be generated on the desired surface(s) and
measure it/them on the fly with an arm or laser tracker. Moreover, a single feature is created for an entire
surface (or set of surfaces), whatever the number of probing points measured.
The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

The fields common to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to define Surface features are:
Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface.

Click the 3D View or CAD Database to define the desired surface(s).

Page 765

Used to delete the selected surface(s) from the list.


Used to display the CAD Database.
Used to change the projection surface after clicking in the 3D View.
Used to change the order of surfaces in the list. This changes the probing strategy proposed during
measurement. This changes the probing strategy proposed during the automatic measurement.

Page 766

Tolerance

To assign dimensional tolerance values to a Surface feature, select Surface via the Features > Define
Feature menu.
In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

The dimensional tolerance of a surface is applied to the Min / Max.


For further details, see the Define (and tolerance) feature page.

Page 767

Measure Feature

Page 768

Measurement overview

Measuring a feature consists in probing points on the workpiece to be inspected. This requires a calibrated
probe to be active in the software. The type of feature (circle, line, plane, etc.) to be measured (probed) must
then be specified. Measurement can then be performed. To represent the feature as best possible, the points
probed must be uniformly distributed over the feature. The software then calculates the feature as best as
possible by passing via the probing points and using one of the measurement algorithms available. If the
feature was measured with more points than the minimum number required, the software calculates a form
fault that is the sum of the distances of the two points at the greatest distance from the calculated feature.

Example:
In the example of line D below, the form fault FF = d1+ d2.

Plane measurement tests (surfaces varying between 100x100 and 300x300 for cast and machined parts)
allow a figure for the number of points required to be as close as possible to the actual (real) form fault to be
ascertained (between two and three times the minimum number of points, i.e. between 6 and 9 points in this
example).

Note: A feature may be measured with probes of different diameter, provided they have all been
calibrated.

Page 769

Constraints

Measurement or construction constraints allow certain conditions to be imposed on feature calculation.

Examples:

When measuring a circle, its position may be calculated after setting its diameter (or vice versa).
When measuring a plane, its orientation may be set, perpendicular to another plane for example.

p : Probed Points
C1: Circle calculated with a diameter constraint of
40mm
C2: Circle calculated without constraint
C3: Circle calculated with a radius constraint of 12.5
mm

p: Probed Points
P1: Plane 1 measured
P2: Plane 2 measured without constraint
P3 : Plane 2 measured with a "perpendicular to"
constraint in relation to Plane 1

Click this button in a feature measurement or construction window, the following window is
displayed :

Page 770

Criterion
Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the feature in this field.
The criteria available are Least Square, Tchebychev and, depending on the features, Inscribed and
Circumscribed:
For

Least
Square

Inscribed

Circumscrib
Tchebychev
ed

Page 771

Inscribed Circle
Constructs the circle with the largest diameter passing at least by 3 points with all points outside. The points'
deviations in relation to the inscribed circle are positive or nil.

Least square circle

Inscribed circle

Circumscribed Circle
Constructs the circle with the smallest diameter passing at least by 3 points with all points inside. The points'
deviations in relation to the circumscribed circle are positive or nil.

Least square circle


Circumscribed circle

Dimension
Then select whether or not a dimension constraint is to be applied to the feature. If so, specify which
dimension(s), by checking the corresponding box(es).
Dim1 and Dim2, for example, respectively represent the large and small diameters of an ellipse.

Position

Page 772

When the feature has been defined, a position constraint, i.e. the coordinates of the center of the feature,
may be added.

Orientation
A final constraint may be applied, the orientation constraint, i.e. constrain the feature to be parallel,
perpendicular or angled (the angle is entered to give an inclination) to a reference feature selected from the
drop-down list.

Click this button to apply the properties and close the window.
Closes the window without applying any changes made.

Note:
The constraints available are:
Featur
Criterion
Dim1
Dim2
e
type
Least
Square
2D
Tchebychev
Least
Square
3D
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
X
Inscribed
Circumscrib
ed
Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
X
Inscribed
Circumscrib
ed
Least
Square
Tchebychev
X
Inscribed
Circumscrib
ed
Least
X
Square
Tchebychev

Position

Parallel to

Perpendicul
Angled at
ar to

X
X

X
X

Page 773

Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev

If constraints that are not available for the feature are selected, the following warning message is
displayed at feature evaluation:

For feature measurement, this message is displayed when the measurement is validated, after the
constraints have been selected.
Clicking

allows the constraints applied to be modified by clicking

again.

Page 774

Measure Feature

This function can be accessed:


- Via the menu Features > Measure Feature
-

Via this icon in the Feature bar, then selecting the type of feature to be defined (circle, line, etc.).

The feature measurement window is displayed as shown below, but varies slightly according to the feature
selected:

Page 775

Name
Shows the type of feature to be measured, a line in this example.
Reminder that the window is in measurement mode.
Enter the name of the feature to be measured in this field or select an existing feature from
the drop-down list.
This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database.

Notes:

The default name may be configured via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters > Default
feature name
Incrementation mode may be configured via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters >
Feature name incrementation in the measurement windows

Family

Page 776

The feature may be assigned a family by entering family name in the field or
selecting an existing family from the drop-down list.

Number of points
Minimum number of points to be probed for the software to be able to calculate the
feature. This number may differ according to feature type and may be modified: either on a one-off basis via
this field, or systematically for a type of feature in the Default Parameters.

Note: When a feature is measured, if the minimum number of points is not reached, the button allowing
you to confirm (accept) the measurement is not available.

Auto. Stop
Stops the measurement once the minimum number of points to be probed has been reached.
Allows the measurement to be automatically validated (accepted) after the last point has been probed.

Repeat
Used to measure the following feature immediately after validating (accepting) the current
measurement.

Tangent Outside Material


This option allows the measured feature to be translated (best fit to measured
points) so that it passes via the probed point at the greatest distance from the material (part).

Example: Cylinder measured with the Tangent Outside Material option

Page 777

: Probing points of the


measured cylinder
C1: Cylinder calculated with the
Least Square method
C2: Cylinder calculated with the
Tangent Outside Material
method

Example: Plane (or line) measured with the Tangent Outside Material option

: Probing points of the measured plane (or line)


P1: Plane (or line) calculated with the Least Square method
P2: Plane or line calculated with the Tangent Outside Material method

Auto projection plane


This checkbox allows a projection plane to be measured before measuring a 2D feature
(Line, Circle, Arc, Rectangle, Slot, Hexagon, Ellipse). The first probing points are to be taken on the
plane, the following points on the feature.
used to determine the number of points to be probed for the projection plane.
used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane.

Cyl. Probe

Page 778

Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First
calibrate the cylindrical probe. This method is often used to inspect bodywork parts.

Notes:
This option is only available for the line, circle, arc, rectangle, slot, hexagon, and ellipse features.
This type of probing is not compatible with the automatic measurement methods. Probing must be
manually performed.

Constraints
This button is used to apply position, orientation or dimensional constraints to the feature by
selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page..

Stop

Used to interrupt measurement and close the window.

Probed points counter

The counter is incremented as points are progressively probed. In program mode, it


decreases (counts down).

OK

To validate the measurement. The feature is then added to the Feature Database and the result of
the measurement performed is displayed in the Results window.

Delete

To delete the last point probed without canceling the measurement.

Page 779

Automatic measurement

Used to access automatic measurement if the feature has already been defined, or feature
definition if not.

Projection Plane

The projection plane determines the plane in which all probing points will be
projected for calculation of line, circle, arc, rectangle, slot, hexagon, or ellipse features.

Example: Measuring a circle

Several projection modes are available, varying according to the type of feature:
Plane (plane type features): the ball centers of the probing points are projected in the selected plane, the
circle is then calculated (in this plane) with ball radius compensation according to probing direction.

Page 780

1st Probing Point: This method is only available if a CAD file is open. When measuring the circle, the first
point is probed on the projection surface. The point thus probed determines the height of the projection plane
and the surface orientation (via the CAD file) determines its orientation.

Auto: the feature is not projected. The feature's points must be probed at the same height to avoid too great a
form fault.

Page 781

Nominal: if the feature has been defined, the measured feature will be projected on the nominal plane.

Approximate Axis

used to enter an approximate axis for cylinder and cone features. The
approximate axis allows calculation of the measured feature to be initialized. Several approximate axes are
available:
AUTO: the feature is not corrected. The first two points must be probed according to the generator
(distance/pitch length) of the cylinder or cone, then the following points probed according to circles at different
heights on the cylinder or cone to avoid too great a form fault.
NOMINAL: the direction of the defined (nominal) cylinder or cone will be used as approximate direction for
calculation of the measured (actual) cylinder or cone.
Axis (features equivalent to axes: line, plane, cylinder, cone): the orientation of the axis of the selected
feature (in the active alignment) will be used as approximate direction for calculation of the measured (actual)
cylinder or cone.

Page 782

Plane (plane type features): the orientation of the axis of the selected feature (in the active alignment) will be
used as approximate direction for calculation of the measured (actual) cylinder or cone.

Edge Probing Assistance / Thickness

provides probing assistance for measurement of 2D features (lines, circles,


etc.) and edge type surface points. The assistance is presented in two forms, that may be complementary:

Visual assistance: probe color changes: green when the probe is in the probing area, red when the
probe is outside the probing area.

Audio assistance: the tone changes as the probe moves: a high-pitched (sharp) sound is emitted
when the probe is in the probing area, a low-pitched (bass) sound when the probe is outside the
probing area.
Note:

For audio assistance (probing sound) to be enabled, the Enable Sound Effects function must have
been previously selected via the Preferences menu and Sound probing assistant enabled in the
menu 3D View > Manual Probing Assistance.
This function is only available if the selected projection feature is not Nominal, Auto or 1st Probing
.

Click this button to enable the function and enter the value of the depth to which the feature will be
probed. This defines an authorized probing area.
The button remains depressed while the function is enabled.

The Thickness field is available when the Cyl. Probe option is enabled. It
allows a material thickness (corresponding to an offset along the normal) to be applied to the feature.

Accept

Page 783

This button is available when a parameter field has been modified (family
entered or the minimum number of points changed, for example). If the button becomes available, it must be
clicked before the feature can be measured.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following lines are added:

For more information on an error occurring during program execution, see Error management.

Page 784

Automatic feature measurement

This function can be accessed:


- Via the menu Features > Measure Feature
-

Via this icon in the Feature bar, then selecting the type of feature to be defined (circle, line, etc.).

The measurement window is displayed, click

The automatic measurement window is displayed in this form, but varies depending on the feature and
method of measurement selected:

Probing Strategy

Page 785

Click the icon corresponding to the desired automatic measurement


method (probing strategy).

CAD clicks
These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD
model until the desired surface is reached, as shown in the following diagram:

used to invert the last point clicked normal.

used to delete the last point clicked on the CAD model.

Manages the probing depth as a function of the feature selected.

Page 786

A violet alignment is displayed in the 3D View window, used to position the measurement path. It is this
alignment that can be changed when selecting a feature in the Ref box.
If the selection is Auto, it is the alignment of the feature that will serve as the reference feature. Otherwise,
the path will be generated by the alignment of the feature selected.

Important note: This alignment will generate the measurement path only, no additional alignment is
created.
The scrolling list displays the planes that could serve as reference feature for the alignment.
The alignment is calculated as follows:

When the feature measured is a straight line:


the origin of the alignment corresponds to the projection of the base point of the straight line on the
plane;
the orientation of the alignment corresponds to that of the plane selected.
When the feature measured is a circle, an arc, a cylinder, a cone, a rectangle, an oblong, a hexagon
or an ellipse:
the origin of the alignment corresponds ot the intersection of the normal line of the feature with the
plane selected;
the orientation of the alignment corresponds to the normal line of the plane.

If it is impossible to calculate the alignment, the following message appears:

Example: The CIR2 circle is defined by a CAD click on the top plane. By selecting the PLN2 plane as
reference alignment for the depth, the path proposed is af follows:

Page 787

Probing Mode
Used to select probing mode from:
- Static: This allow probing points to be learned individually in the program lines. If the feature's nominal is
modified (diameter, for example), it is difficult to modify the measurement.
- Dynamic: This allows probing paths to be learned (instead of probing points). Thus, if the feature's nominal
is modified, the path is adapted to the new definition of the feature (smaller or larger diameter than during
learning).
- Contouring: this is identical to dynamic mode except the probing is performed in contouring (scanning)
mode, i.e. the probe is not retracted between each point probed. This is, of course, only possible if the probe
and CNC allow it (scanning probe and CNC that handles this type of probe).

Page 788

- Cont. no retraction: this is identical to contouring mode, except the probe does not leave the material/part,
even when probing path changes. This is, of course, only possible if the probe and CNC allow it (scanning
probe and CNC that handles this type of probe).

Page 789

Notes:

Choice of one of these modes is significant during learning of automatic measurement in program
mode.
With dynamic probing, neither an automatic projection plane nor probing relative to another feature
can be chosen.
With static probing for 2D features, a previously measured feature (plane, line or point) may be
selected in order to make a measurement relative to this feature. The advantage of relative
measurement is to offset the probing points (of the circle in the example) by the value of the deviation
between the nominal and actual (measured) values of the relative feature
:

allows the defined feature to be used as a model to create a path. If a feature is re-measured, the
path will be created according to the nominal and not the actual value.

For Point, Line and Plane features, you must specify whether probing direction is reversed
or not

with respect to the normal of the point.

Fore Circle, Arc, Sphere, Cylinder, Cone, Rectangle, Slot, Hexagon, Ellipse features, you
must specify if probing path is inside

or outside

the feature.

CNC Distances

The bottom part of the window shows the CNC distance parameters, i.e.
the Approach, Search and Retract distances. These may be configured independently.

Page 790

Checking this box allows two via points or clearance points to be inserted during
feature measurement: one located before the first probing point and the other after the last probing point. The
advantage of this is in program learning mode as it is then no longer necessary to manually define all the
approach and clearance points.

Adjusting CNC distances


Adjustment is only available for circles, cylinders, arcs and spheres.
When the window is opened, CNC distance adjustment is automatically offered by the software that checks
whether the distances may be the default distances or must be adapted.
This adjustment takes account of the dimensions of the feature and the dimensions of the probe:

If Default distance < (Nominal feature radius - Probe radius)


Then CNC distance = Default distance
If Default distance > (Nominal feature radius - Probe radius)
Then CNC distance = = (Nominal feature radius - Probe radius)

The values are then entered in the fields and may be modified if required.

This button allows the CNC distances to be adjusted so as to return to the center of the feature
between each probing point.
The adjustment is performed:
- on the search distance for tree type features.
- on the approach distance and retract distance for hole type features.

For inside measurements Approach and Retract are adjusted to the center of the circle. The fields
are grayed out and the values calculated.

For outside measurement Find is adjusted to the center of the circle. The field is grayed out and the
value calculated.

Page 791

Approach, find and retract distances are adjusted when executing the measuring line for dynamic or
continuous measurement learned in the program.
The three fields are grayed out while the program line is being modified and their values will be
calculated according to with the the specified feature.

Automatic measurement settings


An automatic measurement window is displayed as shown below:

Page 792

The following settings are memorized between measurements:

The following setting depends on probe position:

Page 793

The following setting depends on the feature to be measured, probing mode is dynamic if there is a link with
the geometry.

used to launch automatic measurement. At the end of the measurement, the window is
automatically validated.
closes the window without applying any changes made.

Notes:

If the automatic measurement to be performed is measurement of a defined (nominal) feature, check


that the CNC can reach the probing area without any risk of collision.
This window also allows access to automatic measurement customization.

In program: When an automatic measurement is learned in a program, the following lines are added:

Measurement in Static mode: the coordinates of the probing points are stored

Measurement in Dynamic mode: the measurement paths are stored

Page 794

Measurement in Contouring mode: the contouring paths and dynamic path changes are stored

Measurement in Cont. no retraction mode: the contouring paths are stored

Page 795

Page 796

Additional information on automatic measurement in dynamic mode

Dynamic probing mode is selected in the Automatic Measurement window.


Changes in the dimensions and/or height of a feature (a cylinder, for example) and its position are applied for
automatic measurement in dynamic mode.

Example: The following diagrams show the types of modifications that can be performed on the
nominal values and that will be applied to automatic measurement in dynamic mode when paths are
generated. The nominal values of the cylinder have been modified in diameter, height, and position.

Page 797

Each path may be re-calculated according to the feature nominals. For the cylinder, the last path may be
re-calculated so that it is located at the same distance from the base of the cylinder as in Teach-in mode.
The same is true for the intermediate paths. The paths are distributed uniformly according to the new feature.
Teach-in mode

Execution with new nominal values

Page 798

During automatic measurement in dynamic mode, by default the measurements learned in program mode are
configured to re-calculate the positions of the paths according to the dimensions used when the feature was
defined. To disable this option, the dynamic line and dynamic circle measurement lines must be edited in
order to deselect the

box.

Measuring plane

Page 799

Automatic measurement in dynamic mode may also be used to adapt the probing path to the new form of
plane definition. The points are re-calculated in two ways:

Automatic linear measurement (density or step method)

Example: Definition of PLANE1 and automatic measurement path in dynamic mode during program
learning:

Modification of the definition of PLANE1:

or

Automatic circular measurement

The barycenter of the limits of the plane (in 3 or 4 points) is determined as is the smallest distance between
the barycenter and the sides of the plane. This distance corresponds to the outer diameter of the contouring
of circle (De). The inner diameter (Di) is determined by the following calculation, where: DiA, inner diameter
learned and DeA, outer diameter learned.

Dynamic via points

Page 800

An automatic measurement in dynamic mode allows not only the probing points but also the via points (or
lists of via points) to be adapted to the modifications made to the nominal values of a feature.

Notes:

This type of via points can only be created by learning automatic feature measurements in dynamic
and contouring mode (for scanning probes).
Program lines cannot be copied/pasted.
These via points may be calculated according to the measured (actual) part of the feature or the
nominal part.

The entry and exit via points of the dynamic automatic measurement are displayed in Dynamic via point
format and the five via points between each circle contouring have been transformed into a single line
Dynamic via point list.
The instruction lines Dynamic via point and Dynamic via point list may be edited by either by
double-clicking the line in the program, or via the automatic measurement window by clicking

Page 801

Dynamic via point

Dynamic via point list

This is used to select use of either the nominal or evaluated part of the feature to
re-calculate the position of the via point. The coordinates are re-calculated on the fly and displayed if a
dynamic via point is being edited.

Note: If modifications are made then another method of automatic measurement selected, the
modifications are lost.

Page 802

Contouring feature measurement

When measuring with a scanning probe, the software allows measurement to be performed in Contouring or
Cont. no retraction (contouring without retraction) mode, as shown in the following windows:

Contouring (continuous/scanning) measurement is used to rapidly measure features with a large number of
points.
In addition, selecting Cont. no retraction as probing mode allows a measurement to be made with no via
point between two measurement paths, as shown in the following example:

Page 803

The Deflection adaptative movement option of the Set-up CNC Parameters function allows the CNC to
activate search and thus compensate for any defects of the part measured when selected:

The search distance is the distance over which the CNC will search for probing after the nominal point to start
measurement in contouring mode.
However, when measuring features with holes, deflection adaptative movement must be de-selected to
disable search and thus avoid inadvertent probing. Contouring mode measurement is then performed relative
to the nominal feature. The CNC Settings are then displayed in the measurement windows as shown below:

Contouring measurement mode may be used for the following features: circle, arc, rectangle, line, cylinder,
cone, sphere, plane (methods 2 and 4), surface point (surface and edge type) and section (method 3).

For surface points, contouring probing mode is selected from the surface point measurement window by
checking (selecting) the

box before activating automatic measurement.

This measurement mode is only available for surface and edge type surface points:

Page 804

Note:
When measuring arcs or lines in continuous mode, the radius of the sensor ball is to be allowed for in
generating the trajectory in order to prevent any collisions in certain cases at the start or finish of a
measurement.

It is nevertheless possible to "completely" measure an arc or line by changing the value of the following
variable in:
Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User tab
FULL_MEASURE=1 (default value is 0).

Page 805

Page 806

Customizing automatic measurement

This function allows several specific parameters of an automatic measurement path previously selected in the
automatic measurement window to be modified.

To access automatic measurement customization, click this button in a feature's automatic


measurement window.

The window is shown below:

Fig. 1: Static

Fig. 2: Dynamic circle probing

Page 807

Fig. 2b: Dynamic line probing

Fig. 3: Line and circle scanning

Used to delete one or more previously selected points.

Used to insert via points in the list of existing points by specifying the coordinates of the point in the
CMM Positioning/Probing window displayed. It also allows another circle or line probing path to be inserted,
depending on the feature measured. All these options are available only in static mode.

Used to switch to static probing mode when dynamic mode is selected, however, a switch in the
reverse direction is not possible.
The CNC Distances cannot be modified in this window. They must have been modified beforehand.
Click this button to launch automatic measurement. At the end of the measurement, the
window is automatically validated.
closes the window without applying any changes made.

Page 808

Fig. 1 : If automatic circle measurement uses static probing mode, the customization window is displayed in
this form with a list of the probing points.
Each Via point or Probing Point can be edited and modified, either by double-clicking the relevant point, or
by selecting it and clicking

The CMM Positioning/Probing window is then displayed to allow the probing (or via) point and/or approach
vector coordinates to be modified:

Fig. 2: If automatic circle measurement uses dynamic probing mode, the customization window is displayed
in this form with a list of the probing points.
Fig. 2 b : For automatic measurement in dynamic probing mode of plane, cylinder, and cone features,
automatic measurement may be defined using circular paths (cf. the circle in Fig 2) or linear paths, as shown
in this window (Fig 2b) for a plane.
Each Via point can be edited and modified, either by double-clicking the relevant point, or by selecting it and
clicking

Page 809

A specific window for dynamic via points is then displayed, allowing these points to be modified:

Each Automatic circle probing and Automatic line probing command may be edited and modified, either
by double-clicking the relevant command line, or selecting it and clicking

Page 810

For more information on automatic feature measurement/probing in dynamic mode, see the page Additional
information on automatic measurement in dynamic mode.

Fig. 3: If automatic feature measurement uses Contouring (or Cont. no retraction) mode, the
customization window is presented in this form with a list of circle or line measurement (probing) paths, or a
combination of the two (as is the case for Cont. no retraction mode in the example in this document).
Each Via Point may be edited and modified, either by double-clicking the relevant point, or by selecting it
and clicking

. (Cf the section on Fig 2 and 2b, the specific window for dynamic via points).

Each Circle scanning and Line scanning command may be edited and modified, either by double-clicking
the relevant command line, or selecting it and clicking

Page 811

Note: If modifications are made then another method of automatic measurement selected, the
modifications are lost.

Page 812

Measure Point

Page 813

Manual measurement

To measure a (geometrical) Point feature, select Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Point features are:

Probing projection
When the Allow Probing Projection function box is checked in the menu Features > Set default
parameters, Geometrical point tab, the measurement window is displayed as follows:

Page 814

If this box is checked, the probing point is automatically projected on the projection feature selected. This projection
will only work on planes.

Tangent Outside Material


Checking this box allows the measured point to be translated (best fit to measured
points) so that it passes via the probed point at the greatest distance from the material (part). This is only
true if Compensation Feature is set to AUTO.
For further details, see the Measure feature page.

Compensation Feature
used to enter a reference feature for best-fit calculation of the measured feature.
Several compensation modes are available:
Auto: By probing a single point, probing direction determines the compensation direction.
To use a compensation plane, at least 3 points must be probed. The software constructs a plane passing
through the ball centers to calculate the compensation on the last point probed according to the normal of the
plane. This may be useful when the surface probed is not absolutely flat. In this mode, the Tangent Outside
Material function may be used.

Page 815

Space Point: This method uses a compensation plane. Three points minimum must be probed. The software
constructs a plane passing through the ball centers to calculate the compensation on the last point probed
according to the normal of the plane. This may be useful when the surface probed is not absolutely flat. In
this mode, the Tangent Outside Material function may be used.

Note: In manual mode, this mode is equivalent to automatic compensation mode.

Page 816

Angle point: used to measure a point that is at the intersection of two planes. The measurement method is
as follows:

It is necessary to measure at lest 6 points distributed over two planes (half of the points for plane 1
(P1), and the other half for plane 2 (P2)). There must be an even number of points selected.
Then the software calculates D2, the intersection line of the two planes.
The normal of plane P2 is then projected on plane 1. The software then calculates the resulting line
D1 passing through the barycenter B of P1.
The angle point Pt is then defined by the intersection of the two lines D1 and D2.

Corner point: used to measure a point that is at the intersection of three planes. The measurement method
is as follows:

It is necessary to measure at lest 9 points distributed over three planes P1, P2 et P3. The number of
points to be selected must be a multiple of 3.
The software calculates D, the intersection line of plane P1 with plane P2.
The angle point Pt is then defined by the intersection of the line D and plane P3.

Page 817

For more information on space, corner and angle points, see the related section.

Ball Center: There is no compensation.

This type of point may be directly sent to another computer connected via a serial link. Click the
button.

Nominal: This is compensation according to the nominal point's normal.

Point (point type features): Compensation is in the direction of the axis passing through the point and the ball
center. Application: measurement of a geometrical point on a sphere. The center of the sphere may be used
as compensation feature.

Page 818

Line (line type features): Compensation is in the direction of the axis perpendicular to the line and passing
through the ball center. Application: measurement of a geometrical point on a cylinder. Cylinder axis may be
used as compensation feature.

Plane (plane type features): Compensation is in the direction of the normal of the selected plane and passing
through the ball center. Any compensation is performed using probe ball radius. Application: measurement of
a geometrical point on a plane. The plane or any other plane parallel to it may be used as compensation
feature.

Page 819

Automatic measurement

To measure a (geometrical) Point feature automatically, select Point via the menu Features > Measure
Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Point features are described below.
Several automatic measurement methods are available:

Preset automatic measurement


Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model
Automatic measurement using the grid method
Automatic measurement using the U V method
Automatic measurement using the perimeter method
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 820

If the geometrical point has been defined, the window is displayed as shown below:

Preset automatic measurement

This method is used to automatically measure a point by generating a measurement (probing) path according
to the nominal feature or the previous measurement.

Page 821

Example:

Note: If the compensation mode selected for the geometrical point is Auto, the automatic

Page 822

measurement window is slightly different:

The number of points to be measured (3 minimum) and radius may be selected.


The points allowing Auto compensation will be probed around the nominal geometrical point (displayed in
green) with, in the example, a radius of 5:

If the point has not been defined and a CAD model is open, the window is displayed
as shown below:

Page 823

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model

This method is only available if a CAD file is open.


The window is shown below:

Page 824

Check (select) this box to create the nominal part of the measured point.
Click the geometrical point to be measured on the CAD model:

Page 825

Calculation mode: Space point, corner point and angle point

The Space point, Angle point and Corner point calculation modes are used to measure particular
geometrical points.
Measurement can be manual, automatic or semi-automatic.

Semi-automatic mode
The following icon is used to access the semi-automatic mode:
. It is displayed in the manual measure
window of the point, when the calculation mode selected is one of the three modes detailed in this section.

Space point

The space point is calculated by measuring at least 3 points on the surface.


The semi-automatic mode of the space point is used to probe only one point on the selected surface. The
other points will be automatically measured.

Important note: It is required to configure the measurement before the first manual probing. To do this,
click

The following window is displayed:

Page 826

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are
described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section.
Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate.
Then manually measure a point on the selected surface.
Automatic measurement is performed by taking into account all parameters previously defined.

Angle point

Page 827

The point on angle is calculated by measuring at least three points on each of the two surfaces forming an
angle of around 90.
The semi-automatic mode is used to probe only one point on the first surface and another one on the second
surface to obtain an angle point. The other points will be automatically measured.

Important note: It is required to configure the measurement before the first manual probing. To do this,
click

The following window is displayed:

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are
described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section.
Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate.
Then manually probe a first point on surface 1 and a second one on surface 2.
Automatic measurement is performed by taking into account all parameters previously defined.

Note: The point measured is an edge-type geometrical point.

Corner point

Page 828

The corner point is calculated by measuring at least three points on each of the three surfaces forming a
corner of a workpiece.
The semi-automatic mode is used to probe only one point on each relevant surface. The other points will be
automatically measured.

Important note: It is required to configure the measurement before the first manual probing. To do this,
click

The following window is displayed:

Page 829

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are
described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section.
Specify an offset value between the edge of the surface and the center of the circle path.
This offset is performed on the three relevant surfaces.
The angles are defined with respect to the x-axis of the active alignement.
Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate.
Then manually probe a first point on surface 1 and a second one on surface 2 and a third one on surface 3.
Automatic measurement is performed by taking into account all parameters previously defined.

Automatic mode

Click

Space point

to change the measurement parameters.

The following window is displayed:

Page 830

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are
described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section.
Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate.

Note: The point selected on the CAD surface is the last point to be measured during the automatic
measurement path. This is the compensated one.

Page 831

Click

Angle point

to change the measurement parameters.

The following window is displayed:


Defined point

Point not defined

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are
described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section.
Check this option to specify the coordinates of the start point of the path. Click the desired point
on the CAD model.

Page 832

Check this option to specify the coordinates of the end point of the path. Click the desired point
on the CAD model.

Click this button to select the direction of the measurement path. The direction of the red arrow
indicating the direction of the measurement path will then be reversed.
Enter the number of points in this field.
or

Enter measurement step value in this field.

Specify an offset value between the edge of the surface and the center of the circle path.
This offset is performed on the two relevant surfaces.
Specify the round edge value if required.
This button is used to select the direction of the measurement path.
This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals.

Page 833

Click this button to validate the settings entered. The corresponding measurement/probing
paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be calculated).
Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate.

Click

Corner point

to change the measurement parameters.

The following window is displayed:

Page 834

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are
described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section.

Select the surfaces to be used to define the corner point.


Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate.

Page 835

Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode


The parameters that are common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic
measurement are as follows:
Indicate the total number of points used for automatic mode.

Note: In semi-automatic mode, the point that is manually probed on each surface is the last point to be
measured on the automatic measurement path of each of the surfaces.
Indicate the radius of the generated circle.
Specify the starting angle of the circle.
Specify the total angle of the circle.
The angles are defined with respect to the x-axis of the active alignement.

Page 836

Measure Line

Page 837

Manual measurement

To measure a Line feature, select Line via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
Feature bar in measurement mode

in the

The following window is displayed:

With Cyl. Probe

Without Cyl. Probe

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Line features are:

Tangent Outside Material


This option allows the measured line to be translated (best fit to measured points)
so that it passes via the probed point at the greatest distance from the material (part).
For further details, see the Measure feature page.

Page 838

Cyl. Probe
Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First
calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Constraints
This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before
validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Page 839

Automatic measurement

To measure a Line feature automatically, select Line via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Line features are described below.

Two methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Preset automatic measurement
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 840

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by
selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically.
The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select projection of the probing points on the CAD model, surface, or edge.

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the line to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 841

Preset automatic measurement


This method is used to automatically measure a feature by generating a measurement (probing) path
according to the nominal feature or the previous measurement and the projection feature.

Page 842

used to enter or select the desired probing depth relative to the projection plane.
used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is
that required to calculate the feature.

Example:

Page 843

Measure Circle

Page 844

Manual measurement

To measure a Circle feature, select Circle via the menu Features > Measure or click
bar in measurement mode

in the Feature

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Circle features are:

Cyl. Probe
Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First
calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Page 845

Constraints
This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before
validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Page 846

Automatic measurement

To measure a Circle feature automatically, select Circle via the menu Features > Measure or click
in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed, click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Circle features are described below.

Three methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Preset automatic measurement
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 847

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open.
It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is
generated automatically.
The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select projection of the probing points on the CAD model, surface, or edge.

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the circle to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 848

Preset automatic measurement

Page 849

used to enter or select the desired probing depth.


used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is
that required to calculate the feature.
and
are used to adjust the circular path according to
obstacles. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for
example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

The default path offered to measure the circle does


not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part.

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the


measurement path of the circle can be set to avoid
the groove.

Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before


measuring the desired feature.
A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection
feature.
used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane.
used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the
edges of the feature to be measured.
used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Page 850

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the
list of previously measured features.

Example:

Page 851

Measure Arc

Page 852

Manual measurement

To measure an Arc feature, select Arc via the menu Features > Measure or click
in measurement mode

in the Feature bar

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Arc features are:

Cyl. Probe
Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First
calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Page 853

Constraints
This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before
validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page..

Page 854

Automatic measurement

To measure an Arc feature automatically, select Arc via the menu Features > Measure or click
the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

The measurement window is displayed, click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Arc features are described below.

Three methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Preset automatic measurement
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 855

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open.
It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is
generated automatically.
The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select the probing points directly on the selected surface or edge.


On the CAD model, left-click the points of the arc to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 856

Preset automatic measurement


This window is used to configure automatic measurement of a feature: it varies slightly according to the type
of feature selected. Several preset automatic measurement methods may be available for the same type of
feature.

Page 857

used to enter or select the desired probing depth.


used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is
that required to calculate the feature.
used to invert the probing direction of the points on the arc.
Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before
measuring the desired feature.
A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection
feature.

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the
list of previously measured features.
used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane.
used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the
edges of the feature to be measured.
used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Example:

Page 858

Measure Plane

Page 859

Manual measurement

To measure a Plane feature, select Plane via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
Feature bar in measurement mode

in the

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Plane features are:

Tangent Outside Material


Checking this box allows the measured plane to be translated (best fit to measured
points) so that it passes via the probed point at the greatest distance from the material (part).
For further details, see the Measure feature page.

Page 860

Constraints
This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before
validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Note : Gasket Scan

This icon appears in case of the use of a continuous probe (SP25, SP80, SP600). It gives access to
the Gasket Scan function.

Page 861

Automatic measurement

To measure a Plane feature automatically, select Plane via the menu Features > Measure Feature or
click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Plane features are described below.

Several methods of automatic measurement (probing strategies) are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Preset automatic measurement using lines
Preset automatic measurement using the CAD model
Circular preset automatic measurement
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 862

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by
selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically.
The window is shown below:

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the plane to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 863

Preset automatic measurement using lines


This method is used to automatically measure a plane using linear measurement (probing) paths distributed
over the plane.

Note: The fields that may be edited and the fields grayed out (unavailable) differ according to whether
the Nbr pnts or Step boxes are checked.
The window is shown below:

Page 864

Number of points method

Step method

used to enter the number of points to be uniformly probed on the plane


used to determine the step (in millimeters) of the points distributed on the largest side of
the plane to be measured.
used to determine the step (in millimeters) of the points distributed on the other side of
the plane.
used to offset the automatic edge path of the feature.
used to set the maximum number of points to be distributed on the plane.
used to set point measurement (probing) step.

Example :

Page 865

Preset automatic measurement using the CAD model


This method is used to automatically measure a plane wile taking account of the possible probing surface.
This is particularly useful for surfaces with holes.

Note: The fields that may be edited and the fields grayed out (unavailable) differ according to whether
the Step or Density boxes are checked.
The window is shown below:

Page 866

Number of points method

Density method

used to determine the step (in millimeters) of the points distributed on the largest side of
the plane to be measured.
used to determine the step (in millimeters) of the points distributed on the other side of
the plane.
used to offset the automatic edge path of the feature.
2

used to enter the number of points to be probed per cm on the plane.


used to give the rotation value (in degrees) of the automatic measurement path.
used to select the step method.
used to select the density method.

Example : Measurement path with a 30 rotation and 3 mm offset. The plane has been defined by
clicking the CAD model, the automatic measurement path therefore avoids the holes:

Page 867

Circular preset automatic measurement


This method is used to automatically measure a plane by taking its possible probing surface into account,
whether the surface is circular or not.
The window is shown below:

Page 868

For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example.
This is done via the following fields:
and
are used to adjust the circular path depending on
the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area,
to avoid a hole for example.
and

used to set the internal and external diameters of

the measurement path.


used to determine the number of circular paths.
used to determine the number of points per path.
used to set an offset value (in millimeters) on the X axis of the active alignment.
used to set an offset value (in millimeters) on the Y axis of the active alignment.
This checkbox is used to eliminate measurement points located in holes in the CAD model.

Page 869

Example:

Page 870

Measure Sphere

Page 871

Manual measurement

To measure a Sphere feature, select Sphere via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Sphere features are:

Constraints
This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before
validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Page 872

Automatic measurement

To measure a Sphere feature automatically, select Sphere via the menu Features > Measure Feature or
click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Sphere features are described below.

Several methods of automatic measurement (probing strategies) are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Preset automatic measurement by meridian
Preset automatic measurement by cone distances
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 873

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open.
It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is
generated automatically.
The window is shown below:

Click the points of the sphere to be measured on the CAD model:

Page 874

Preset automatic measurement by meridian

Page 875

used to determine the horizontal and the vertical angles of the measurement path.
Useful when the probe is not located above the zenith of the sphere:

Example:

Preset automatic measurement by cone distances

Page 876

used to determine the number of circular paths.


used to determine the number of points per path.
the number of probing points is automatically entered in this field and cannot be
modified.

used to determine the horizontal and the vertical angles of the measurement path.
Useful when the probe is not located above the zenith of the sphere:

Page 877

Example:

Page 878

Measure Cylinder

Page 879

Manual measurement

To measure a Cylinder feature, select Cylinder via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
in the Feature Bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Cylinder features are:

Tangent Outside Material


This option allows the diameter of the cylinder measured to be modified by taking
the compensated point at the greatest distance from the axis for the inner material and the closest point for
the outer material.
For further details, see the Measure feature page.

Page 880

Constraints
This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before
validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Approximate axis

If you select the AUTO option in the "Approx. Axis" field, then the order of
probing is important, since this direction is used to calculate the direction of the cylinder :

If you use a feature as approximate axis (for instance, the plane perpendicular to the cylinder axis), then the
order of probing is not important.

Page 881

Automatic measurement

To measure a Cylinder feature automatically, select Cylinder via the menu Features > Measure or click
in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Cylinder features are described below.

Several methods of automatic measurement (probing strategies) are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Circular automatic measurement (Circle probing)
Axial automatic measurement (Axis probing)
Helicoidal automatic measurement (Helix probing)
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 882

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open.
It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is
generated automatically.
The window is shown below:

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the cylinder to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 883

Automatic circular measurement (Circle probing)

Page 884

This method allows a cylinder to be automatically measured by generating several circle measurement
(circular probing) paths at different heights on the nominal cylinder.
used to determine the number of circular paths.
used to set the depth of probing at the start.
used to set the depth of probing at the end.
used to determine the number of points per path.
the number of probing points is automatically entered in this field and cannot be
modified.
For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example.
This is done via the following fields:
used to define the position of the first point to be probed on the feature. By
default, the position of this point is set according to current probe position (to minimize movements).
used to define the position of the last point to be probed.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the


The default path offered to measure the cylinder does
measurement path of the cylinder can be set to avoid
not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part.
the groove.

Example:

Page 885

Axial circular measurement (Axis probing)

Page 886

This method allows a cone to be automatically measured by generating several linear measurement (line
probing) paths distributed along the envelope of the nominal cone.
used to determine the number of axial paths.
used to set the depth of probing at the start.
used to set the depth of probing at the end.
used to determine the number of points per path.
the number of probing points is automatically entered in this field and cannot be
modified.
For axial paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example.
This is done via the following fields:
used to define the position of the first point to be probed on the feature. By
default, the position of this point is set according to current probe position (to minimize movements).
used to define the position of the last point to be probed.
For more information, see the example.

Example:

Helicoidal automatic measurement (Helix probing)

Page 887

This method is used to automatically measure a feature by generating a measurement (probing) path
according to the nominal feature or the previous measurement. The measurement/probing path is a helix
along the cylinder.
used to set the depth of probing at the start.
used to set the depth of probing at the end.
used to determine the number of probing points.
determines the fillet step (thread pitch) of the helicoidal path
or select a diameter from the drop-down list. The corresponding fillet step is then
automatically entered in the previous field.
to select the direction of the helicoidal path (left or right).

Example:

Page 888

Page 889

Measure Cone

Page 890

Manual measurement

To measure a Cone feature, select Cone via the menu Features > Measure or click
bar in measurement mode

in the Feature

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Cone features are:

Constraints
This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before
validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Page 891

Approximate axis

If you select the AUTO option in the "Approx. Axis" field, then the order of
probing is important. The first 3 points must be in a plane perpendicular to the axis, and then the next 3
points must be in another plane perpendicular to the axis. The line going through the two centers is used to
calculate the cone axis :

If you use a feature as approximate axis (for instance, the plane perpendicular to the cone axis), then the
order of probing is not important.

Page 892

Automatic measurement

To measure a Cone feature automatically, select Cone via the menu Features > Measure or click
the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

The measurement window is displayed, click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Cone features are described below.

Several methods of automatic measurement (probing strategies) are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Circular automatic measurement (Circle probing)
Axial automatic measurement (Axis probing)
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 893

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open.
It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is
generated automatically.
The window is shown below:

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the cone to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 894

Automatic circular measurement (Circle probing)

Page 895

This method allows a cone to be automatically measured by generating several circle measurement (circular
probing) paths at different heights on the nominal cone.
used to determine the number of circular paths.
used to set the depth of probing at the start.
used to set the depth of probing at the end.
used to determine the number of points per path.
the number of probing points is automatically entered in this field and cannot be
modified.
and
are used to adjust the circular path depending on
the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area,
to avoid a hole for example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

The default path offered to measure the cone does


not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part.

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the


measurement path of the cone can be set to avoid
the groove.

Example:

Page 896

Measure with one path


A cone may be measured with a single path. To do this, constraints must be used.
In the cone measurement window, click the Constraints button.
The parameters to be constrained are:

the dimension Dim1, equivalent to cone opening angle.


the orientation Parallel to one of the proposed planes.

Click Accept to confirm.


In the automatic measurement window, select the number of paths:

Page 897

Select a single path.

Note: When manually probing the cone in one path, simply probe the points along a circular path.

Example: Constrain the cone as above and measure it with one path:

Axial circular measurement (Axis probing)

Page 898

This method allows a cone to be automatically measured by generating several linear measurement (line
probing) paths distributed along the envelope of the nominal cone.
used to determine the number of axial paths.
used to set the depth of probing at the start.
used to set the depth of probing at the end.
used to determine the number of points per path.
the number of probing points is automatically entered in this field and cannot be
modified.
For axial paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example.
This is done via the following fields:
used to define the position of the first point to be probed on the feature. By
default, the position of this point is set according to current probe position (to minimize movements).
used to define the position of the last point to be probed.

Page 899

For more information, see the example.

Example:

Page 900

Measure Torus

Page 901

Manual measurement

To measure a Torus feature, select Torus via the menu Features > Measure or click
bar in measurement mode

in the Feature

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Torus features are:

Constraints
Used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating
measurement, by selecting the desired criteria.
For more information, see the Constraints page.

Page 902

Probing pattern
The 9 points must define three distinct circles on the torus :

Page 903

Automatic measurement

To measure a Torus feature automatically, select Torus via the menu Features > Measure Feature or
click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Torus features are described below.

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open.
It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is
generated automatically.

Page 904

The window is shown below:

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the torus to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 905

Page 906

Measure Rectangle

Page 907

Manual measurement

To measure a Rectangle feature, select Rectangle via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Rectangle features are:

Cyl. Probe
Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First
calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Constraints

Page 908

This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before
validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Projection plane
When a projection plane other than 1st Point is chosen, the first two points must be traced over the same
length:

Page 909

Automatic measurement

To measure a Rectangle feature automatically, select Rectangle via the menu Features > Measure
Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Rectangle features are described below.

Two methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Preset automatic measurement
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 910

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open.
It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is
generated automatically.
The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select projection of the probing points on the CAD model, surface, or edge.
On the CAD model, left-click the points of the rectangle to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 911

Preset automatic measurement

used to enter or select the desired probing depth.


used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is
that required to calculate the feature.

Page 912

and
are used to adjust the circular path depending on
the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area,
to avoid a hole for example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

The default path offered to measure the rectangle


does not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part.

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the


measurement path of the rectangle can be set to
avoid the groove.

Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before


measuring the desired feature.
A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection
feature.

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the
list of previously measured features.
used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane.
used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the
edges of the feature to be measured.
used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Example:

Page 913

Page 914

Measure Slot

Page 915

Manual measurement

To measure a Slot feature, select Slot via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
Feature bar in measurement mode

in the

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Slot features are:

Cyl. Probe
Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First
calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Page 916

Constraints
This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before
validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Projection plane
When a projection plane other than 1st Point is chosen, the points must be probed as follows:

Page 917

Automatic measurement

To measure a Slot feature automatically, select Slot via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Slot features are described below.

Two methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Preset automatic measurement
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 918

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open.
It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is
generated automatically.
The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select projection of the probing points on the CAD model, surface, or edge.
On the CAD model, left-click the points of the slot to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 919

Preset automatic measurement

Page 920

used to enter or select the desired probing depth.


used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is
that required to calculate the feature.
and
are used to adjust the circular path depending on
the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area,
to avoid a hole for example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the


The default path offered to measure the slot does not
measurement path of the slot can be set to avoid the
avoid the groove in the workpiece/part.
groove.

Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before


measuring the desired feature.
A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection
feature.

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the
list of previously measured features.
used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane.
used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the
edges of the feature to be measured.

Page 921

used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Example:

Page 922

Measure Hexagon

Page 923

Manual measurement

To measure a Hexagon feature, select Hexagon via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Hexagon features are:

Cyl. Probe
Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First
calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Page 924

Constraints
This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before
validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Projection plane
When a projection plane other than 1st Point is chosen, the first two points must be traced over the same
side:

Page 925

Automatic measurement

To measure a Hexagon feature automatically, select Hexagon via the menu Features > Measure Feature
or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Hexagon features are described below.

Two methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Preset automatic measurement
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 926

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open.
It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is
generated automatically.
The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select the probing points directly on the selected surface or edge.


On the CAD model, left-click the points of the hexagon to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 927

Preset automatic measurement

Page 928

used to enter or select the desired probing depth.


used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is
that required to calculate the feature.
and
are used to adjust the circular path depending on
the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area,
to avoid a hole for example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the


The default path offered to measure the hexagon does
measurement path of the hexagon can be set to avoid
not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part.
the groove.

Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before


measuring the desired feature.
A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection
feature.
used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane.
used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the
edges of the feature to be measured.
used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Page 929

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the
list of previously measured features.

Example:

Page 930

Measure Ellipse

Page 931

Manual measurement

To measure an Ellipse feature, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Ellipse features are:

Cyl. Probe
Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First
calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Page 932

Constraints
This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before
validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Projection plane
When a projection plane other than 1st Point is chosen, the first two points must be probed on the great axis
and the two following points on the small axis:

Page 933

Automatic measurement

To measure an Ellipse feature automatically, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Measure Feature or
click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Ellipse features are described below.

Three methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Preset automatic measurement
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 934

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


This method is only available if a CAD file is open.
It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is
generated automatically.
The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select the probing points directly on the selected surface or edge.


On the CAD model, left-click the points of the ellipse to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 935

Preset automatic measurement

Page 936

used to enter or select the desired probing depth.


used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is
that required to calculate the feature.
and
are used to adjust the circular path depending on
the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area,
to avoid a hole for example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

The default path offered to measure the ellipse does


not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part.

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the


measurement path of the ellipse can be set to avoid
the groove.

Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before


measuring the desired feature.
A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection
feature.
used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane.
used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the
edges of the feature to be measured.
used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the

Page 937

list of previously measured features.

Example:

Page 938

Measure Surface Point

Page 939

Overview

To measure surface points in the software, the following conditions must be met:

First, a CAD file (model) must be open. The CAD model is the nominal (mathematical) representation
of the workpiece/part to be checked. It allows the nominal coordinates for a measurement point to be
found automatically.

Secondly, there must be an active probe.

Lastly, the CAD file/model opened must be "matched" with the workpiece/part to be checked. To do
this, you must create an alignment for the workpiece, then associate it to the CAD alignment.

Page 940

Types of Surface Points

Surface points are features linked with the CAD surface of a CAD model, often used to determine the defects
of any types of workpieces.
Surface point type may be selected from the following drop-down list in the surface point definition and
measurement windows:

The software automatically offers different surface point names according to the type of projection selected:
Type of projection

Name

On a surface
On an edge with ball
On an edge with shaft
On a flush edge
On a gap
On a flange
On a curve
On a 3D curve
on a 3D curve without ball compensation
On a round edge (with ball and with
shaft)
No Trim
Scribe line

SRF
BRD
BRT
AFF
JEU
FLR
CRB
CRB
CRB
SRT
SSR
SCL

Surface
Surface type surface points are used to quantify a defect normal to the surface of the part.

Edge
Edge type surface points are used to quantify a defect, not normal to the surface, as is the case for Surface
type surface points, but at a tangent to the surface.

Flush
This mode is identical to Surface type surface point measurement. The name Flush is used as, generally,
measurement is performed on a workpiece other than that of the CAD model. This may be, for example,
measurement of a tool whereas only the CAD model of the workpiece produced by the tool is available. This
is performed in such manner as to obtain the value corresponding to the flushness between the workpiece
and tool.

Gap
Gap type surface point measurement is similar to an Edge type surface point measurement, in which
probing direction and, consequently, ball radius compensation, is performed in the other direction.

Page 941

Flange
Flange measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point at the edge of a piece of sheet
metal that is not folded at right angles, the angle between the edge of the metal sheet and the rest of the
workpiece being known (workpieces before swaging).

Curve
Curve type surface points have the same function as Edge type surface points. The difference being that the
measured points are projected onto a curve type CAD entity and not a surface type CAD entity.
3D Curve type surface points are used, among other things, to measure pipes. This is because these points
allow (via material thickness) pipe pitch line (neutral axis) to be checked.
It is also possible to use 3D curve without ball compensation type surface points which are identical to
the 3D curve but without taking into account the radius of the ball being used when measuring these points.

Round Edge
Round Edge measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point on the edge of a piece of
sheet metal that has been swaged.

No Trim
No Trim type surface points allow, in certain specific cases, workpieces presenting slight variations in
respect to hollow areas to be checked using the same CAD model.

Scribe line
Scribe line type surface points are used to give a lateral defect according to a dimension line (CAD curve).

Page 942

Projection and Search Distance

Once the measurement has been made, the point may be projected onto different CAD entities (Surface or
Curve) using different types of projection. This choice is made in the surface feature measurement window:

Different types of projection are available from the drop-down list:

Standard (Surface, Edge or Curve)


Flush
Gap
Flange
Round Edge
Scribe line

In addition, the Edge and Round Edge projection modes may be used with a cylindrical probe (shaft)
measurement.

Search Distance
From a measurement point (ball center coordinate), the software searches for a theoretical (nominal) point on
the nearest surface(s) using a projection mode. If there are several solutions, the theoretical point offered by
default will be the point for which the deviation vector is the closest to the probing point approach vector.

Note: By default, the search distance is calculated from probe ball radius. Thus, if different ball
diameters are used, this does not affect the search distance. Search distance calculation mode may be
modified via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User tab. When the parameter
iSearchDistanceMode is set to 1, the search distance is calculated from probe ball center. When set to 2,
the search distance is calculated from probe ball radius as shown in the following diagram:

Page 943

P1: Measured (actual) workpiece


P2: Nominal workpiece
D1: Search distance calculated from ball center
D2 : Search distance calculated from ball radius

Any point outside the search area is excluded and, if no there is theoretical point in this area, the following
message is displayed:

The reasons for which deviation cannot be calculated may be:

Search distance is too small.


The current alignment in which the software gives the points does not match workpiece CAD
alignment (the first step in measurement is to create this current alignment).
Workpiece CAD alignment does not correspond to the workpiece (right-hand workpiece with left-hand
workpiece CAD alignment for example).

For further information, see Set up default parameters.

Page 944

Thickness and Offset

Thickness
The thickness of a surface point may be specified at definition, measurement or modification.
To know whether or not use of a material thickness is required, you need to know the position of the material
with respect to the CAD model and with respect to the probing direction of the surface points. There are three
possible cases:

Case 1:
Thickness must be a positive value as the
workpiece is encountered before the CAD model.

Case 2:
No thickness as the workpiece is encountered at
the same time as the CAD model.

Case 3:
Thickness must be a negative value as the CAD
model is encountered before the workpiece.

Offset

Page 945

An offset may be applied to an Edge type surface point. This offset represents a surplus or lack of material at
the edge of the surface and not according to the CAD surface normal, as is the case for thickness:

In addition, a thickness may be applied to the edge point reference feature (if automatic edge point
measurement mode is used), when the the reference feature is measured during this automatic
measurement. This thickness may be entered when the edge point is defined or in the edge point
measurement window before automatic measurement is enabled.

Warning: This thickness is not applied for edge point calculation. It allows the measurement path of
the edge point(s) to be generated according to the reference feature used:

Page 946

Using Reference Features

For Edge, Gap, Flange, Curve or Round Edge surface points, an additional field in the definition window is
used to specify the reference feature:

.
This reference feature allows any position/orientation error of the area probed to be taken into account.

Example: Measuring an edge point

Without reference feature:

If no reference is used, i.e. if AUTO is selected from the drop-down list, the measured pont is projected
perpendicular to the CAD surface.

With reference feature (measured plane):

However, if a reference feature is used (here, the plane), the measured point will first be projected onto the

Page 947

previously measured plane, then onto the CAD surface. This allows the position error of the measured
workpiece to be taken into account.

Page 948

Lock Nominal Surface Points

When a surface point is defined (nominal value) and then measured (actual value), its nominal position is
modified. This is because Mthe software automatically re-projects (re-evaluates) the measured point on the
most appropriate projection surface. See Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points
If you do not want surface point nominal position to be automatically modified, you must set the Lock
Surface Point property accordingly. This property is accessed from the Feature Database, by clicking
after selecting a surface point.
The following window is displayed:

If this box is checked, the nominal coordinates of the surface point are locked and will not
change during measurement.
ND will be calculated using the normal of the nominal point:

Page 949

In program: This property may be selected in a program, in a line defining a surface point.

If the Lock Surface Point property is not used, the measured surface point will be re-projected on the CAD
model and its nominal value thus modified. See the page Surface Point Results, ND, and Signs.

Page 950

Surface Point Results, ND, and Signs

Surface Point Results


Surface point measurement results are displayed in the Results window:

The cartesian values and Normal Deviation (ND) of the point, in relation to the projection surface, are shown in
this window.
Additional information such as the normal vector of the projected point and name of the projection surface is
also displayed.
The thickness used is also shown for Surface type surface points or equivalent (No Trim and Flush type
points).
If the surface points are Edge type surface points or equivalent (edge/x, y or z, curve, curve/x, y or z), the
offset used is shown.
This button is used to re-project/re-evaluate the selected surface point according to the same projection
criteria as the Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points function.

Normal Deviation (ND) calculation


The vector representing the normal deviation is composed of the vectors representing the form faults in each
alignment axis, as shown below:

The software thus calculates ND deviation as follows:

After a previously defined surface point has been measured, its nominal coordinates are modified. The

Page 951

measured surface point is re-projected on the CAD model, thus modifying its nominal values, as shown in the
following diagram:

See also Lock Surface Points.

Normal Deviation (ND) Sign


Surface point result sign depends on the rule selected via the menu Features, Surface Point Sign Rule.
The following window is displayed:

See also:

Material Position Symbols and Invert Deviation.

Page 952

Measure Surface Type Surface Point

To measure a Surface Point feature, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or
click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for measurement of Surface type surface points are:

Type
Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Surface in this
example.

Thickness

Page 953

Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the
surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify
thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.

Example: Without thickness

Example: With thickness

From the probing point (ball center point), the software finds the point with the best fit to the CAD model by
projection, and its associated normal: this is the nominal point. The measured point is obtained by performing
a translation according to the previous normal, from ball center, by a value equal to ball radius (possibly with
thickness added).

Page 954

Search Distance
used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point.
The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Scanning
Used to measure surface points in scanning (continuous) mode. This is only possible with a compatible
probe (SP600, SP25, SP80).

Surface Point Probing Assistance


This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without
following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link
connecting this point to the probe is displayed in the 3D View and point name is displayed in the
measurement window.
This function may only be used in manual measurement mode and not in program mode.

Page 955

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select the "measurement by clicks with no previous definition" probing
strategy:

Note: The arrows

are used to access other automatic measurement methods.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.

This method is used to automatically measure one or more surface points by manually selecting each
probing point. The path is generated automatically.

Page 956

Click the surface point to be measured on the CAD model. By holding the
points may be selected during the same measuring phase:

key down, several surface

Page 957

Automatic measurement using the grid method

Click this button in the Surface Point or Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select the "grid" probing strategy.

Note: The arrows

are used to access other automatic measurement methods.

Different options are available depending on the tab selected:

First tab

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.

Page 958

Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates for the origin of the grid.

Enter the I, J, K values giving grid normal vector orientation.

Enter the values corresponding to grid length in each axis.

Used to set a number of points or a step on each axis by checking (selecting)


the corresponding box. The enter the desired number of points or desired step in the adjacent field.
This button is used to reverse the direction of axes 1 and 2.
The grid may be positioned by clicking the CAD model. To do this:
- Select an initial point on the CAD model to set the origin of the grid.
- Select a second point on the CAD model to set the length of the grid.
- Select a third point on the CAD model to define the limit of the rectangular area.

Page 959

Click this button to validate the grid parameters entered in this tab. The corresponding
measurement/probing paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be
calculated).

Second tab

Enter the offset value to be applied to the grid relative to the measured surface.
This button is used to reverse the direction of the measurement normals.
Check this box to use a clearance plane. Two via points (located in the grid plane) are
inserted between each pair of probing points This may be useful for complex warped surfaces as these paths
allow collisions with the workpiece to be avoided.

Page 960

With Clearance
Plane

Without
Clearance Plane

Check this box for a section to be created with the measured points.

Checking this box means that probed points near edges will not be included in
the measurement. The filtering is performed according to ball radius.

Page 961

With Remove points near edges

Without Remove points near edges

Click this button to validate the grid parameters entered in this tab. The corresponding
measurement/probing paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be
calculated).

Third tab

Page 962

This tab is used to refine the orientation of the grid axes and the intersection axis (projection on the surface).

Without
axis
modification

Page 963

With axis
modification

Click this button to validate the grid parameters entered in this tab. The corresponding
measurement/probing paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be
calculated).

Page 964

Automatic measurement using the U V strategy

Click this button in the Surface Point or Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select the "UV" probing strategy. This strategy uses the U and V vectors of
the CAD surfaces. These vectors are specific to the surfaces and cannot be modified.

Note: The arrows

are used to access other automatic measurement methods.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.

Select the surface on which the surface points are to be measured by clicking the CAD model. Several
surfaces may be selected by clicking them while holding the

key down.

Page 965

Enter the values for the start and end of the area to be measured according to the U
and V vectors of the surface(s). This value is shown as a percentage of the lengths of the total area selected.

End U = 0.55

End U = 0.95

Enter the number of points to be used for measurement for each vector.

Select the main direction of measurement by checking (selecting) the desired box.

Page 966

U is the
main axis

V is the
main axis

This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals.

Check this box to use a clearance plane. This may be particularly useful for complex
warped surfaces. Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates and the I, J, and K values specifying its position and
orientation in the relevant fields.

Check this box for a section to be created with the measured points.

Click this button to validate the settings entered. The corresponding measurement/probing
paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be calculated).

Page 967

Automatic measurement using the perimeter method

Click this button in the Surface Point or Point measurement window:

Then click this button to select the "Perimeter" probing strategy. This measurement method (probing
strategy) allows surface-type surface points to be measured according to the perimeter of the selected
surfaces.

Note: The arrows

are used to access other automatic measurement methods.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the start point of the path in the
corresponding fields. The desired point may also be clicked on the CAD model.

Page 968

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the end point of the path in the
corresponding fields. The desired point may also be clicked on the CAD model.

Note: A path using several CAD surfaces may be generated. To do this, select the surfaces to be used
by clicking them while holding the

key down.

Click this button to select the direction of the measurement path. The direction of the red start point

Page 969

arrow indicating the direction of the measurement path will then be reversed.

Used to set a number of points or a step by checking (selecting) the


corresponding box. The enter the desired number of points or desired step in the adjacent field.
Enter the desired offset. This offset corresponds to the distance between the edge of the
surface and the probing points.

With a 5 mm offset

With a 1 mm offset

This button is used to select the direction of the measurement path.

Page 970

This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals.


Check this box to use a clearance plane. This may be particularly useful for complex
warped surfaces. Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates and the I, J, and K values specifying its position and
orientation in the relevant fields.

Check this box for a section to be created with the measured points.
Click this button to validate the settings entered. The corresponding measurement/probing
paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be calculated).

Page 971

Automatic measurement by Step / Number of points

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select Step probing strategy, or


strategy.

Note: The arrows

to select Number of points probing

are used to access other automatic measurement methods.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.

Select the number of probing points from the drop-down list. Four measurement methods are
available, as for Automatic measurement by clikcing on the CAD model to measure edge type surface points.

Page 972

Enter measurement (probing) step value in this field.


or

enter the number of points in this field.

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the start point of the path. Click the desired
point on the CAD model.

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the end point of the path. Click the desired
point on the CAD model.

The coordinates of the point clicked are shown in these fields.

Note: A path using several CAD surfaces may be generated. To do this, select the surfaces to be used

Page 973

by clicking them while holding the

key down.

Click this button to select the direction of the measurement path. The direction of the red arrow
indicating the direction of the measurement path will then be reversed.
This button reverses the start point with the end point.
Check this box for a section to be created with the measured points.
This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals.
used to validate the parameters used and display the measurement paths. This may require
some processing time.

used to reset the window to its initial state.

Page 974

Measure No Trim Type Surface Point

To measure a No Trim type surface point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure
Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for measurement of No Trim type surface points are:

Type
Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, No Trim in this
example.
This function allows, in certain specific cases, workpieces (parts) with slightly different hollow areas to be
checked using the same CAD model.

Page 975

This type of surface point used to measure a surface-type surface point over a hollow area (groove, hole,
cone) before this hollow area is machined in order to check the position of certain points of a workpiece
currently being manufactured.
Use of No Trim type surface points allows, according to the surface, the inner boundaries to be ignored. The
surface points are then projected on the surface in question, wherever the points are taken on this surface.

Example: Measuring surface points

In the case of the open cone, the surface


point is projected onto the inner envelope
of the cone.
It is not possible to measure a surface
point located over the hole and project it
on the upper surface.
To measure such a point, it is not
necessary to recreate a CAD model.
Simply select the No Trim option for
surface point measurement.

Example: No Trim surface point measurement

By enabling No Trim surface point


measurement mode, it is now possible to
measure a point located over a hollow
area and project it on the upper face.

Page 976

Thickness
Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the
surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify
thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.

Surface Point Probing Assistance


This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without
following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is
displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement
window.

Page 977

Measure Flush Type Surface Point

To measure a Flush type surface point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or
click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for measurement of Flush type surface points are:

Type
Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Flush in this
example.
This mode is identical to Surface-type surface point measurement. Generally, the term "flush" is used when
measurement is performed on a workpiece (part) other than the CAD model. This may be, for example,
measurement of a tool whereas only the CAD model of the workpiece produced by the tool is available. The

Page 978

purpose of this measurement is to obtain the value corresponding to the flushness between the workpiece
and tool.

Thickness
Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the
surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify
thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.

Example: Without thickness

Example: With thickness

Surface Point Probing Assistance

Page 979

This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without
following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is
displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement
window.

Page 980

Measure Edge Type Surface Point

To measure an Edge point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used to measure Edge Point features are:

Type
Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Edge in this
example.

Page 981

Example: Measuring the edge of a sheet metal panel

From the probing point (ball center point), the software finds the nearest surface edge point by projection: this
is the nominal point. The "ball center" point is transferred to the defined (nominal) plane by the nominal point
and the surface normal to the nominal point. The measured (actual) point is simply offset in the direction of
the nominal point by the ball radius value (an offset may be included if required).

Example: Cut panel edge measurement (Edge /Z)


The workpiece (part) is assumed to be cut at a 90 angle when the measurement point is transferred to the
plane defined by the nominal point and the surface normal to the nominal point. If this is not the case,
Edge/X, Edge/Y, or Edge/Z projection mode must be used..
X /Y /Z edge projections are used for highly accurate measurement of a point on the edge of a sheet metal
panel that is not cut at a 90 angle. This projection mode is used when the panel is cut in the direction of one
of the alignment axes.

Thickness
Check this box to add a thickness to be applied to the reference feature of
the Edge point.

Search Distance

Page 982

used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point.
The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Offset
An Offset may be applied to an Edge type surface point by entering the desired offset value
in this field.

Scanning
Used to measure Edge points in scanning (continuous) mode. This is only possible with a compatible probe
(SP600, SP25, SP80).

Surface Point Probing Assistance


This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without
following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is
displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement
window.

Edge Probing Assistance

Edge Probing Assistance provides probing assistance with


measurement of 2D features (lines, circles, etc.) and edge type surface points.

Note: This function is only available if the feature selected for Edge Probing Assistance is not in Auto
mode.
For more information, see Measure Feature.

Page 983

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select the "Measurement by clicking the CAD model" probing strategy, that
may be used without prior definition. This method is used to automatically measure one or more edge type
surface points by manually selecting each probing point. The path is generated automatically.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.

Click the edge type surface point to be measured on the CAD model. By holding the
several points may be selected during the same measuring phase:

key down,

Page 984

Select the number of probing points from the drop-down list. Four measurement methods/probing
strategies are available according to the total number of points selected:

1 point
If 1 point is selected, the measurement is performed without measuring the reference feature.

2 points
If 2 points are selected, a surface point of the type "surface probed on the projection surface of the edge type
surface point" is used as reference feature for measurement. This allows automatic compensation of height,
relative measurement, for measurement of the edge type surface point:

Page 985

The name of the surface point used as reference feature is shown in this field.
When measurement has been performed, the first point probed is named SRF_EDG1 and is shown in the
feature database in the same way as EDG1.

3 points
If 3 points are selected, a line probed on the projection surface of the edge type surface point is used as
reference feature for measurement. This allows automatic compensation of height and orientation in one
axis, relative measurement, for measurement of the edge type surface point:

The name of the line used as reference feature is shown in this field.
Once measurement has been performed, the line used as reference for measurement of the edge type
surface point is named LIN_EDG1 and is shown in the feature database in the same way as EDG1. Similarly,

Page 986

the projection plane for LIN_EDG1, passing through the two surface type surface points that define the normal
to the CAD surface on which they are defined, is named PLN_LIN_EDG1.

4 points
If 4 points are selected, a plane probed on the projection surface of the edge type surface point is used as
reference feature. This allows automatic compensation of height and orientation in two axes, relative
measurement, for measurement of the edge type surface point:

The name of the plane used as reference feature is shown in this field.
When measurement has been performed, the plane probed is named PLN_EDG1 and is shown in the feature
database in the same way as EDG1.

For measurement with 2, 3 and 4 points, when several edge type surface points are probed in
the same measuring phase, the measurement frequency of the reference feature may be varied via this field.

Page 987

The reference
feature is measured
every 4 points

The reference
feature is measured
every 2 points

used to apply an offset between the measurements points of the reference feature and
also with respect to the edge of the CAD surface.

Page 988

With a 2 mm offset

With a 4 mm offset

used to modify probing depth:

Page 989

4 mm depth

8 mm depth

used to delete the last point clicked on the CAD model.

Page 990

Automatic measurement by Step / Number of points

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select Step probing strategy, or


strategy.

to select Number of points probing

Note: If an edge point was defined, only the measurement by number of surface points probing stragety
is available:

Page 991

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.

Select the number of probing points from the drop-down list. Four measurement methods (probing
strategies) are available, as for Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model.

Enter measurement (probing) step value in this field.


or

enter the number of points in this field.

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the start point of the path. Click the desired
point on the CAD model.

Page 992

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the end point of the path. Click the desired
point on the CAD model.

Note: A path using several CAD surfaces may be generated. To do this, select the surfaces to be used
by clicking them while holding the

key down.

Click this button to select the direction of the measurement path. The direction of the red arrow
indicating the direction of the measurement path will then be reversed.
This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals.
used to validate the parameters used and display the measurement paths. This may require
some processing time.

Page 993

used to reset the window to its initial state.

Page 994

Measure Gap Type Surface Point

To measure a Gap type surface point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or
click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for measurement of Gap type surface points are:

Type
Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Gap in this
example.
Gap measurement is an edge type measurement, in which ball radius compensation is performed in the
opposite direction.

Page 995

Nominal Gap
A gap value may be entered for Gap type surface points. In this case, the nominal
gap represents the nominal value of the ND and is never zero:

Surface Point Probing Assistance


This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without
following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is
displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement
window.

Edge Probing Assistance

Edge Probing Assistance provides probing assistance with


measurement of 2D features (lines, circles, etc.) and Flange type surface points.

Note: This function is only available if the feature selected for Edge Probing Assistance is not in Auto
mode.
For more information, see Measure Feature.

Page 996

Measure Flange Type Surface Point

To measure a Flange type surface point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature
or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for measurement of Flange type surface points are:

Type
Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Flange in this
example.
Flange measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point on the edge of a piece of sheet
metal that is not folded at right angles, the angle between the edge of the metal sheet and the rest of the
workpiece being known (workpieces before swaging).

Page 997

Thickness
Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the
surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify
thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.

Example: Without thickness

Example: With thickness

The role of the reference feature in measurement of a Flange type surface point

The reference feature plays a major role in the calculation, it is used to quantify the height deviation (i.e. a

Page 998

deviation normal to the surface). For this, a plane or surface-type surface point must be selected in the Ref
field:

DO NOT USE AN EDGE-TYPE surface point as the orientation of this type of point does not allow height
deviation to be characterized: the edge-type surface point characterizes tangent deviation.
The reference feature must be a plane or surface-type surface point feature. If the reference feature is a
surface point, height deviation can be accounted for. However, if the reference feature is a plane, it allows
both the height deviation and inclination deviation of the workpiece (part) relative to the CAD model to be
accounted for.
If there is no reference feature, height deviation is not accounted for and the ND calculation will be distorted,

whereas, if a reference feature is used, the ND is calculated correctly:

Page 999

If a surface-type surface point is used as reference feature, it may be assigned a thickness as follows:

Without thickness;

With thickness;

Flange Angle
An angle value may be entered for Flange type surface points.

Surface Point Probing Assistance


This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without
following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is
displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement
window.

Edge Probing Assistance

Page 1000

Edge Probing Assistance provides probing assistance with


measurement of 2D features (lines, circles, etc.) and Flange type surface points.

Note: This function is only available if the feature selected for Edge Probing Assistance is not in Auto
mode.
For more information, see Measure Feature.

Page 1001

Automatic measurement by number of points

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window. Automatic measurement is
only available if the Flange type surface point has already been defined.

Then click this button to select the measurement by number of surface points probing strategy:

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.

Select the number of probing points from the drop-down list. Four measurement
methods (probing strategies) are available, as for Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model.
used to apply an offset between the measurements points of the reference feature and
also with respect to the edge of the CAD surface.

Page 1002

used to modify probing depth.

Page 1003

Measure Curve

To measure a Curve or 3D Curve feature, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature
or click

in the Feature Bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for measurement of Curve or 3D Curve type surface points are:

Type
Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Curve in this
example.
Curve type surface points have the same function as Edge type surface points. The difference being that the
measured points are projected onto a curve type CAD entity and not a surface type CAD entity.

Page 1004

3D Curve type surface points are used, among other things, to measure pipes. This is because these points
allow (via material thickness) pipe pitch line (neutral axis) to be checked.
3D Curve without ball compensation type surface points are identical to 3D Curve type surface points
except that ball radius is not used when calculating the result. The last-named is therefore expressed relative
to the ball center.

Thickness
Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the
surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify
thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.

Search Distance
used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point.
The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Offset
An Offset may be applied to an Edge type surface point by entering the desired offset value
in this field.

Surface Point Probing Assistance


This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without
following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is
displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement
window.

Edge Probing Assistance

Edge Probing Assistance provides probing assistance with


measurement of 2D features (lines, circles, etc.) and Flange type surface points.

Note: This function is only available if the feature selected for Edge Probing Assistance is not in Auto
mode.
For more information, see Measure Feature.

Page 1005

Automatic measurement by number of points

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window. Automatic measurement is
only available if the Curve or 3D Curve type surface point has already been defined.

Then click this button to select the measurement by number of surface points probing strategy:

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.

Select the number of probing points from the drop-down list. Four measurement
methods (probing strategies) are available, as for Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model.
used to apply an offset between the measurements points of the reference feature and
also with respect to the edge of the CAD surface.

Page 1006

used to modify probing depth.

Page 1007

Measure Round Edge Type Surface Point

To measure a Round Edge type surface point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure
Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used to measure Round Edge features are:

Type
Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Round Edge in
this example.

Round Edge measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point on the edge of a piece of

Page 1008

sheet metal that has been swaged.

Search Distance
used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point.
The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Surface Point Probing Assistance


This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without
following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is
displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement
window.

Round edge radius (Radius)


Enter the nominal round edge radius value in this field.

Example: With a ball probe

Example: With a cylindrical probe

Page 1009

The role of the reference feature in measurement of a Round Edge type surface
point
The reference feature plays a major role in the calculation, it is used to quantify the height deviation (i.e. a
deviation normal to the surface). For this, a plane or surface-type surface point must be selected in the Ref
field:

DO NOT USE AN EDGE-TYPE surface point as the orientation of this type of point does not allow height
deviation to be characterized: the edge-type surface point characterizes tangent deviation.
The reference feature must be a plane or surface-type surface point feature. If the reference feature is a
surface point, height deviation can be accounted for. However, if the reference feature is a plane, it allows
both the height deviation and inclination deviation of the workpiece (part) relative to the CAD model to be
accounted for.
If the reference feature is a surface point, it cannot be used if it has a thickness. This is because the
measured point is offset by the thickness and thus does not allow the correct height deviation to be entered.

The reference feature


may be:
- A plane
- A surface point

Page 1010

The reference feature


may be:
- A plane
- A surface point
WITH NO thickness:
For operation in
standard mode*
- A surface point
WITH a thickness: For
operation in a specific
mode**

* Standard mode: thickness is applied to the measured value (default operation).


In the USER.INI file:
[XLIB]
bApplyThicknessToNominal=0
** Specific mode: thickness is applied to the nominal value.
In the USER.INI file:
[XLIB]
bApplyThicknessToNominal =1

Page 1011

Measure Scribe line Type Surface Point

To measure a Scribe line point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for measurement of Scribe line type surface points are:

Type
Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Scribe line in
this example.
Measuring a surface point in Scribe line mode consists in checking a defect equivalent to the defect checked
by a surface point in edge mode (but there is no real edge). However, probing direction is the same as that of
a surface type surface point.

Page 1012

Example:

A scribe line point is calculated by:


- probing a point in the groove of a workpiece/part,
- searching for the curve closest to ball center,
- searching for the surface the closest to the curve,
- projecting ball center on the surface found,
- calculating the nominal deviation (ND) between the center ball point and the curve.

Search Distance
used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point.
The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Surface Point Probing Assistance


This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without
following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is
displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement
window.
This function may only be used in manual measurement mode and not in program mode.

Page 1013

Measure Section

To measure a Section feature, select Section via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

The following window is displayed:

With CAD model

Without CAD model

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The fields specific to Section measurement mode are:

Name
This field is used to assign a name to the surface points belonging to the section to be created. An
incremental default name is offered according to the type of surface point selected in the following field.

Probing Assistance

Page 1014

Click this button to enable the function and enter the authorized width of the probing band.
The button is depressed when the function is enabled.
The assistance is presented in two forms, that may be complementary:

Visual assistance: probe color changes: green when the probe is in the probing area, red when the
probe is outside the probing area. For more information details, see Measure Feature.
Audio assistance: the tone changes as the probe moves: a low-pitched (bass) sound is emitted
when the probe is in the probing area, a high-pitched (sharp) sound when the probe is outside the
probing area.
Notes:

For audio assistance (probing sound) to be enabled, the Enable Sound Effects function must have
been previously selected via the Preferences menu and Sound probing assistant enabled in the
menu 3D View > Manual Probing Assistance.
This function is not available for measurement of a section that has not been defined.

The points must be probed in the probing band defined in the assistance:

The section passes through all the calculated surface points.


The probing operations must be as regular as possible.
In this case, it is advisable to probe the points in logical order so that the section remains readable.

Page 1015

Section measurement with a CAD model


Select the type of point to be used to measure the section from the drop-down list.
Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the
surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify
thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.
used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point.
The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Section measurement without a CAD model


Every three probing operations, the software calculates the barycenter, compensated and corrected using the
plane of the three probing operations, and changes this into a geometrical point:

After the first three probing operations have been performed, the software calculates a point for each each
additional probing operation performed (using the last two probing operations for the previous mini-plane).
The points are then calculated as follows:

Page 1016

The section passes through all the calculated points.


In this case, it is not advisable to measure parts with major surface variations.
The probing operations must be as regular as possible.

Page 1017

Automatic measurement of a section with a CAD

To measure a Section feature, select Section via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click
the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

The measurement window is displayed. Click

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Section features are described below.

Several automatic measurement (probing) strategies are available:

Automatic measurement by number of points


Automatic measurement by steps (Step probing)
Automatic measurement by chordal error
Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 1018

The following fields are common to all three measurement strategies:

Offsets used to enter an offset at each angular point:


between the start of the nominal section and the first (start) probing point on the section.
between the first and last points of each intermediate (middle) section part.
between the end of the nominal section and the last (end) point on the section.

Automatic measurement by number of points

Page 1019

Enter the desired number of probing points (for example, 11 points):

This strategy is linked with the step strategy. This is due to the fact that, for a curve of given length, the
number of points depends on the step and vice versa.

Automatic measurement by steps

Page 1020

Enter constant step value between probing points (for example, 5.1mm between each
point):

If step value is null, the points that were used to define the section are used for measurement.
This strategy is linked with the number of points strategy. This is due to the fact that, for a curve of given
length, the step depends on the number of points and vice versa.

Automatic measurement by chordal error

Page 1021

This strategy allows the number of points probed on the parts of the workpiece with a strong curvature to be
increased: the greater the curvature, the greater the number of points that will be probed in this area.
Enter the chordal error value from which the number of probing points must be
increased. The chordal error is the deviation between the last probing point and the line passing through the
previous two probing points. If this calculated deviation is lower than the chordal error value entered in this
field, scanning step is increased. If, on the contrary, this deviation is higher then the value entered, scanning
step is decreased.
Chordal error is greater than the probed deviation: search step is increased:

Calculated deviation = 0.08 mm

Page 1022

Chordal error is less than the probed deviation: search step is reduced:

Calculated deviation = 0.08 mm

Enter the maximum step value between two measurement points. The smaller the
chordal error, the greater the number of points in non-linear areas. For a given chordal error, the number of
points increases when the section is of curved shape.

Example: Chordal error = 0.25 mm

Example: Chordal error = 0.1 mm

Page 1023

Note: Automatic measurement of a previously measured section.


The window will be displayed as shown below for automatic measurement of a previously measured section:

Only the CNC distances and direction of the probing normal (sign) can be modified to make the new
measurement.
Check this box to reverse the probing normal.

Page 1024

Measure Surface

Page 1025

Manual measurement

To measure a Surface feature, select Surface in the Features > Measure Feature menu.

Note: To access the measurement window, the Surface feature must have been defined beforehand.
The following window is displayed:

The fields common to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The specific fields used for manual measurement of Surface features are:
If this field is selected, no additional point is created when the surface is measured.
When this option is selected, the Surface feature is evaluated from the surface point measurement.
When this option is selected, the Surface feature is evaluated from the geometric point
measurement.
If this box is checked, the nominal coordinates of the surface point are locked and will not
change during measurement. For more information, see the Lock Surface Point page.
Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface. If the
surface to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify

Page 1026

thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.


All surface points follow the behavior described in the following examples:

Example: Without thickness

Example: With thickness

From the probing point (ball center point), the software finds the point with the best fit to the CAD model by
projection, and its associated normal: this is the nominal point. The measured point is obtained by performing
a translation according to the previous normal, from ball center, by a value equal to ball radius (possibly with
thickness added).

Page 1027

If this method is selected, the measurement is performed without probing point positioning
constraint. Simply probe freely the points on the surface(s) to be measured.
If this method is selected, the points to be manually measured are automatically
distributed. This distribution is generated via automatic measurement paths.
When this box is checked, click the automatic measurement button and select the desired trajectories
generation mode:

CAD click method


UV method

When the trajectories are generated, it is possible to probe the points.


This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position. When this
button is enabled, the numbers assigned to the probing points are maintained in the order of the trajectory,
whatever the measurement order of the points.

If this method is selected, the measurement is performed in automatic mode.


must be clicked to select the measurement method.
When the surface has been measured, the extreme points are displayed in the 3D View. They are
represented by two lines having the direction of the measured points and a length proportional to their form
fault.

Page 1028

Automatic measurement

To measure a Surface feature automatically, select Surface in the Features > Measure menu.

The measurement window is displayed. Click

, then

The fields common to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.
The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Surface features are described below.

Several automatic measurement (probing) strategies are available:

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model


Automatic measurement using the UV method
Customizing automatic measurement.

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model

Page 1029

The window is shown below:

Click the points used to measure the surface on the CAD model by holding the

key pressed:

Page 1030

Note: When the surface has been measured, the extreme points are displayed in the 3D View.

Page 1031

Automatic measurement using the U V method

Click this button in the Surface measurement window.

Then click this button to select the "UV" probing strategy. This strategy uses the U and V vectors of
the surfaces selected during the definition process. These vectors are specific to the surfaces and cannot be
modified.

The fields common to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature
measurement page.

First tab

Enter the values for the start and end of the area to be measured according

Page 1032

to the U and V vectors of the surface(s). This value is shown as a percentage of the lengths of the total area
selected.

End U = 0.55

End U = 0.95

Enter the number of points to be used for measurement for each vector.

Select the main direction of measurement by checking (selecting) the desired box.

Page 1033

U is the
main axis

V is the
main axis

This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals.

Surface names are listed here. Measurement parameters are applied to all
surfaces with none or all are selected. To assign different parameters to different surfaces, it is required to
select them one by one and set the measurement according to each surface.

Click this button to validate the settings entered. The corresponding measurement/probing
paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be calculated).

Page 1034

Second tab

The second tab is used to configure a clearance plane. This may be particularly useful for complex warped
surfaces. Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates and the I, J, and K values specifying its position and orientation in
the relevant fields.

Page 1035

Scanning

Scanning allows a section to be created by automatically searching for CNC points. Scanning uses ball
center points or compensated points depending on the mode selected.
To make a measurement by scanning, select Scanning via the Features > Measure Feature > Section by
scanning.
The following window is displayed:

To measure using Linear scanning, measure the first two points in manual mode.
To measure using Alternate scanning, measure the first three points in manual mode.

Note: Alternate scanning is not available for measuring with a continuous probe. If the compensated
mode is selected, the geometric points will be compensated automatically during measurement.

Page 1036

Then click this button to access the automatic measurement window:

For point to point measuring:

For continuous measuring:

Page 1037

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page.
The fields specific to Scanning measurement mode are:

Compensation Strategy

Click this button to use the linear strategy without compensation, or this button
linear strategy with compensation.

to use the

Cutting Plane
Select the number of lines to be scanned and their offset (this may have a sign).

Select section cutting plane from the drop-down list. The cutting plane, displayed in red in
the 3D View, is parallel to one of the predefined planes in the active alignment.
This field is used to specify the distance on the axis not belonging to the plane:

Page 1038

Min and Max values may be entered to set cutting plane size. Thus, measurement and calculation will not
go beyond the limits of the plane.
The

and

buttons are used to capture the end limit positions of the probe as cutting plane limits.

Scanning stops when the cutting plane is exceeded or the first point scanned is returned to.

Scanning settings for point to point type measuring

Page 1039

used to enter initial scanning step value.


used to enter search step value, due to variations in workpiece (part) shape or if
scanning does not find the material/part.
used to enter the step to be used if material continuity is found to be good.
used to enter chordal error value. This allows the software to increase or decrease
step value. The chordal error is the deviation between the last probing point and the line passing through the
previous two probing points. If this calculated deviation is lower than the chordal error value entered in this
field, scanning step is increased. If, on the contrary, this deviation is higher then the value entered, scanning
step is decreased.
Chordal error is greater than the probed deviation: search step is increased:

Calculated deviation = 0.08 mm

Chordal error is less than the probed deviation: search step is reduced:

Calculated deviation = 0.08 mm

used to configure CNC speed.


used to configure search distance (that also corresponds to retraction at the moment
of probing).

Page 1040

Scanning settings for continuous type measuring


The common fields to both types of measurement (point to point and continuous) are described in the
Scanning settings for continuous type measuring section.
sets up the stop tolerance for a closed section measurement. In the example, the
tolerance is represented by a sphere 10,000 in diameter centered on the first probing point.

Linear Scanning
Measure the first two points manually to give scanning direction, then switch to automatic mode:

If the number of lines is 1, the Offset field is grayed out. The points calculated will be center-ball points and
measurement will be performed as shown below:

If the number of lines is greater than 1, the scanning window is displayed as follows:

Page 1041

The Offset field can be edited. The software then displays the cutting planes
corresponding to the number of lines selected before starting scanning. Positive or negative offset of the
planes is performed with respect to the normal of the nominal cutting plane and according to the orientation of
the active alignment:

Page 1042

Scanning is then performed as follows:

Note: If a scanning probe is used (SP600, SP25, SP80), scanning operates in slightly different manner.
The points probed are automatically compensated.

If this button is clicked, the software uses the same type of path as before but the points are
calculated differently.
The points are calculated by triangulation between the different probing points. The probing points are then
compensated and corrected using the plane formed by triangulation:

Page 1043

Alternate Scanning
To perform alternate scanning, probe the first three points in manual mode, as shown in the diagram below,
then switch to automatic mode:

The following window is displayed:

Page 1044

In this case, the Lines and Offset fields are disabled as alternate scanning is performed on a single line.
This field is used to enter a value for the width of the alternate scanning measurement
band:

Every three probing operations, the software calculates the barycenter, compensated and corrected using the

Page 1045

plane of the three probing operations, and changes this into a geometrical point:

After the first three probing operations have been performed, the software calculates a point for each each
additional probing operation performed (using the last two probing operations for the previous mini-plane).
The section passes through all the calculated points.

Page 1046

Construct Feature

Page 1047

Construct Feature

This function is used to create a feature from existing nominal and/or actual features using one of the
following methods:

It may be accessed:
- Via the menu Features > Construct Feature
-

Via this icon in the Feature bar, then selecting the type of feature to be constructed (circle, line, etc.)

.
The feature construction window is displayed as shown below, but varies slightly according to the feature
selected:

Name

Page 1048

shows the type of feature to be constructed, a line in this example.


reminder that the window is in construction mode.
Enter the name for feature to be constructed in this field or select an existing feature from
the drop-down list.
This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database.

Note: The default name may be modified via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters >
Default feature name.

Family
The feature may be assigned a family by entering family name in this field or
selecting an existing family from the drop-down list. If the name entered does not correspond to an existing
family, the family is created.

Construction Type
The different types of construction available are:
Best fit through features: Features are selected from the Feature Database to calculate a feature
passing through these points by best fit .
construction of the feature by intersection of two features, selected from the drop-down lists or from
the Feature Database.
construction of the feature by projection of one feature onto another feature, by selecting them from
the drop-down lists or from the Features Database.
construction of the median feature between two features, selected from the drop-down lists or from
the Feature Database.
construction of the feature parallel to another feature and passing through a third feature (the
distance from this latter feature may be specified), by selecting the features from the drop-down lists or from
the Feature Database.
construction of the feature perpendicular to another feature and passing through a third feature, by
selecting the features from the drop-down lists or from the Feature Database.
construction of the feature symmetrical to another feature, by selecting them from the drop-down
lists or from the Features Database.

Page 1049

construction of the feature by offset using two or three points.


construction of the feature from new criteria, by selecting feature calculation method (Tchebychev
or Least Squares) and configuring the constraints to be applied to a previously measured feature.
construction of a point on the axis of a cone with a given diameter.
construction of a point by entering its coordinates, but not of its normal vector.
construction of a point from the CAD file, i.e. by projection of a geometrical point (or feature that can
be assimilated to a point) on a given CAD surface (or an edge, etc.).
construction of the extreme point of the selected feature according to the desired search direction.

Description
Brief description of the selected construction method.

Parameters

Construction parameter configuration: selected features, etc.


Note: When selecting features from the Feature Database, it is possible to choose between axis and
envelope for some features.
For example, for the intersection of a line and cylinder:
The cylinder may be considered to be a line
another line (the axis of the cylinder).
The cylinder may be considered as a cylinder
and the envelope of the cylinder.

. There will be one intersection point, between a line and


. There will be two intersection points, between a line

If there are two possible types of construction, the software offers one of them. The
to access the other one.

button may be used

This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database.


Multiple feature selection may be performed:
- by clicking the desired features and holding the key on the keyboard

depressed

- by selecting the desired features in the 3D View.

Page 1050

The part concerning the features of the window is then presented as follows :

To delete the selection list, right-click on the group:

Note: A bubble help is displayed on the group in order to recall the features concerned.

Example: Two features A2 and A2 are selected in the first field. Two features B1 and B2 are selected
in the second. In all, four features are created, as follows:

1st feature constructed: from A1 and B1


2nd feature constructed: from A1 and B2
3rd feature constructed: from A2 and B1
4th feature constructed: from A2 and B2

Click this button to construct the feature. The feature is added to the Feature Database
with nominal and/or actual values, depending on the features used to construct it.

Note: If construction cannot be performed (incomplete or incorrect data), this button is not available.

closes the window without applying any changes made.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1051

For more information on an error occurring during program execution, see Error management.

Page 1052

Constraints

Measurement or construction constraints allow certain conditions to be imposed on feature calculation.

Examples:

When measuring a circle, its position may be calculated after setting its diameter (or vice versa).
When measuring a plane, its orientation may be set, perpendicular to another plane for example.

p : Probed Points
C1: Circle calculated with a diameter constraint of
40mm
C2: Circle calculated without constraint
C3: Circle calculated with a radius constraint of 12.5
mm

p: Probed Points
P1: Plane 1 measured
P2: Plane 2 measured without constraint
P3 : Plane 2 measured with a "perpendicular to"
constraint in relation to Plane 1

Click this button in a feature measurement or construction window, the following window is
displayed :

Page 1053

Criterion
Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the feature in this field.
The criteria available are Least Square, Tchebychev and, depending on the features, Inscribed and
Circumscribed:
For

Least
Square

Inscribed

Circumscrib
Tchebychev
ed

Page 1054

Inscribed Circle
Constructs the circle with the largest diameter passing at least by 3 points with all points outside. The points'
deviations in relation to the inscribed circle are positive or nil.

Least square circle

Inscribed circle

Circumscribed Circle
Constructs the circle with the smallest diameter passing at least by 3 points with all points inside. The points'
deviations in relation to the circumscribed circle are positive or nil.

Least square circle


Circumscribed circle

Dimension
Then select whether or not a dimension constraint is to be applied to the feature. If so, specify which
dimension(s), by checking the corresponding box(es).
Dim1 and Dim2, for example, respectively represent the large and small diameters of an ellipse.

Position

Page 1055

When the feature has been defined, a position constraint, i.e. the coordinates of the center of the feature,
may be added.

Orientation
A final constraint may be applied, the orientation constraint, i.e. constrain the feature to be parallel,
perpendicular or angled (the angle is entered to give an inclination) to a reference feature selected from the
drop-down list.

Click this button to apply the properties and close the window.
Closes the window without applying any changes made.

Note:
The constraints available are:
Featur
Criterion
Dim1
Dim2
e
type
Least
Square
2D
Tchebychev
Least
Square
3D
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
X
Inscribed
Circumscrib
ed
Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
X
Inscribed
Circumscrib
ed
Least
Square
Tchebychev
X
Inscribed
Circumscrib
ed
Least
X
Square
Tchebychev

Position

Parallel to

Perpendicul
Angled at
ar to

X
X

X
X

Page 1056

Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev
Least
Square
Tchebychev

If constraints that are not available for the feature are selected, the following warning message is
displayed at feature evaluation:

For feature measurement, this message is displayed when the measurement is validated, after the
constraints have been selected.
Clicking

allows the constraints applied to be modified by clicking

again.

Page 1057

Construct Point

To construct a (geometrical) Point, select Point via the menu Features > Construct or click
Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Point features are:
- Construct by intersection
- Construct by projection onto,
- Construct median from
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construct Point, axis, cone
- Construct with 2 points and offset
- Construct from nominal coordinates
- Construct onto CAD
- Construct by Extrem Point
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:

Page 1058

Type of construction
Construct by intersection
Construct by projection onto
Construct median from
Construct symmetrical to
Construction of a point on the axis of a cone
Construct by offset
Construct from coordinates
Construct using CAD
Construct by extreme point

Access to multi selection


Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No

Page 1059

Construct by intersection

This function is used to construct a point by intersection between two features.


To obtain a point constructed by intersection, select compatible types of features.
The following table shows the maximum number of possible cases, with 1 for one solution, 2 for two
solutions, and X indicating that intersection between the two features is not possible.
Line / Cone (axis)
Cylinder (axis)

Plane

Circle

Cone

Cylinder

Sphere

Line / Cone and


Cylinder axis

Plane

Circle

Cone

Cylinder

Sphere

Select

type from the construction window:

Page 1060

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Intersection

Select the first intersection feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the second intersection feature.

Page 1061

The coordinates of the constructed point are displayed in these fields, that
cannot be modified.
When there are two possible solutions, this button may be used to switch between them.

Examples:
Legends for the following diagrams:
D, D1, D2: Lines
Co: Cone
Cyl: Cylinder
C, C1, C2: Circles
S: Sphere
P : Plane
Pt, Pt1, Pt2: Constructed points

Line / Line

Line / Cone (axis)


Cone (axis) / Line

Line / Cone (envelope)


Cone (envelope) / Line

Line / Circle
Circle / Line

Line / Cylinder (axis)


Cylinder (axis) / Line

Line / Cylinder (envelope)


Cylinder (envelope) / Line

Page 1062

Plane / Cylinder (axis)


Cylinder (axis) / Plane

Plane / Circle
Circle / Plane

Plane / Cone (axis)


Cone (axis) / Plane

Circle / Circle

Circle / Cone (axis)


Cone (axis) / Circle

Circle / Cone (envelope)


Cone (envelope) / Circle

Circle / Sphere
Sphere / Circle

Circle / Cylinder (axis)


Cylinder (axis) / Circle

Circle / Cylinder (envelope)


Cylinder (envelope) / Circle

Cone / Sphere
Sphere / Cone

Cone (axis) / Cylinder


Cylinder / Cone (axis)

Cone (envelope) / Cylinder

Page 1063

Sphere / Line

Sphere / Cylinder (axis)


Cylinder (axis) / Sphere

Page 1064

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a point by projecting a reference point onto a plane or line.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature to be projected:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1065

Select the projection feature (plane or line).

The coordinates of the constructed point are displayed in these fields, that
cannot be modified.

Projection of a point onto a plane

Pt1: Reference point


P: Plane
D: Line
Pt: Constructed point

Projection of a point onto a line

Page 1066

Construct median from

This function is used to construct a median point corresponding to the central position of two two points.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Median

Select the first point to be used for construction:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1067

Select the second point to be used for construction.

The coordinates of the corresponding point are displayed in these fields,


that cannot be modified.

Pt1 and Pt2: Reference points


Pt: Constructed point

Median point of two points

Page 1068

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a point symmetrical to a reference point and in relation to a point, line, or
plane.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1069

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

The coordinates of the corresponding point are displayed in these fields,


that cannot be modified.

Symmetrical point in relation to a point

p: Reference point
Ds: Line of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
Ps: Point of symmetry
Pt: Constructed point
Symmetrical point in relation to a line

Symmetrical point in relation to a plane

Page 1070

Construct Point, axis, cone

This function is used to create a point on the axis of a cone, at the level of the desired diameter.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Point / Cone Axis

Select the cone to be used for construction:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1071

Enter the diameter corresponding to the "level" at which the point is to be


constructed.

The coordinates of the corresponding point are displayed in these fields,


that cannot be modified.

Co: Reference cone


D: Diameter
Pt: Constructed point

Page 1072

Construct point with offset

This function is used to construct a point from a point and a plane or feature that can be assimilated to a
point or a line, by specifying a distance.
Select

mode in the construction window.

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Offset

Select the first point


by choosing it from the drop-down list,
or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1073

Select the second feature (planes and features that can be assimilated to a
point or line)
by choosing it from the drop-down list,
or by using the Browse Database function.

Enter the distance at which the point is to be constructed.

Warning: The order in which the points used for construction are selected conditions the result.

Offset through a point


When the second feature selected is a point:
The software calculates a line, D, between the two reference points, Pt1 and Pt2. Point Pt is constructed on
this line at the distance d entered, from point Pt2, in the direction Pt1-Pt2. The normal vector of point Pt is
orientated according to direction Pt2-Pt1, whatever the orientation of the reference points.

Pt1 and Pt2: Reference points


D: Line used for calculation
d: Distance
Pt: Constructed point

Point constructed with 2 points and


offset

Offset through an axis


When the second feature selected is a line, a cone or a cylinder:
The new constructed point is located at the specified distance d along the axis of the selected feature. The
normal vector of point Pt is oriented according to direction Pt-Pt1, whatever the orientation of the reference
points.

Page 1074

Pt1 and C1: Reference feature


d: Distance
Pt: Constructed point

Point constructed by offset

Offset through a plane


When the second feature selected is a plane:
The new point constructed is located at the specified distance, d, in the direction of the normal of the
selected plane. The normal vector of point Pt is oriented according to direction Pt-Pt1, whatever the
orientation of the reference points.

Pt1 and P: Reference features


n: Normal of the plane
d: Distance
Pt: Constructed point

Point constructed by offset through


a plane

Notes:

The line used for calculation is not created.


If the point constructed has already been defined, the orientation of the normal vector is conserved.
The calculated normal is not used.

Page 1075

Construct from nominal coordinates

This function is used to construct a geometrical point at specific coordinates in the the current (active)
alignment. This point will not have a normal.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Coordinates

Enter the coordinates of the point to be constructed in the corresponding fields.

Page 1076

Construct onto CAD

This function is used to construct a point by projecting a point, center, or axis onto an entity in the open CAD
file.
Select

type from the construction window:

Depending on whether the construction feature is a point or an axis, it will be projected onto the CAD model
(Fig.1), or constructed by intersection with the CAD model (Fig.2).

Fig.1: Projection onto the CAO model


(the construction feature is a point)

Fig.2: Intersection with the CAO model (the


construction feature is an axis)

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

CAD

Page 1077

Select the feature to be projected


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

In the case of projection onto the CAD model (Fig.1), several projection modes are
available. This is not the case for intersection with the CAD model (Fig. 2).

Select the desired CAD entity from the drop-down list or click the
button to perform an automatic search for the CAD entity. In this case, AUTO is displayed in the field instead
of the list of available CAD entities.
The software uses the search distance of a surface point to project the point. If there is no CAD entity in the
search sphere, the point cannot be constructed.

A material thickness may be added by entering it in this field.

Page 1078

Construct by Extreme Point

This function is used to construct a point by using the extreme probed point according to a direction of a
feature.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Extreme 1
Select the method to be used to search for the extreme point. Depending on the
choice made, other information may be required:
If one of these items is selected, no other information will be
requested. The software searches for the extreme point in the chosen
direction (X, Y or Z of the active alignment).

Page 1079

Specify the search direction for the extreme point by its vector:
.
Select the defined feature allowing extreme point search direction to
be specified in the field:

.
Select the measured feature allowing extreme point search direction to
be specified in the field:

.
Select the feature on which the extreme point is to be searched for:
By selecting it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Constructed point

The coordinates of the constructed point are displayed in these fields, that
cannot be modified.
Constructing an extreme point gives two solutions for the same selected direction. The point to
be constructed can thus be chosen from between two solutions (Min and Max).

Examples:
Legends for the following diagrams:
D: Direction
Cyl: Cylinder
Co: Cone
Min, Max: Constructed points

Page 1080

Construction of an extreme point on a cylinder


using the X axis of the alignment.

Construction of an extreme point on a cylinder


using a specified direction.

Construction of an extreme point on a cylinder


using the normal of a defined (nominal) or
measured (actual) feature.

Page 1081

Construct Line

To construct a Line feature, select Line via the menu Features > Construct, or click
Bar in construction mode

in the Feature

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Line features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct by intersection
- Construct by projection onto
- Construct median from
- Construct parallel to
- Construct perpendicular to
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construct by offset
- Construction from new criteria
- Construct by axis
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:

Page 1082

Type of construction
Best fit through features
Construct by intersection
Construct by projection onto
Construct median from
Construct parallel to
Construct perpendicular to
Construct symmetrical to
Construct by offset
Construction from new criteria
Construction by axis

Access to multi selection


No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes

Page 1083

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a line passing through measured and/or constructed points. The line is
projected onto a plane.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.
Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1084

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Projection Plane
used to select a reference plane:
By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

The different choices available are:

Page 1085

Auto: there is no projection. the line passing (best fit) between the points probed (line D1 in the example
below) is used
Nominal: if the line has been defined, the constructed feature will be projected on the nominal plane.
Plane: the points are projected onto the plane, the line is calculated (best fit) from among the projected
points (line D2 in the example below).

P1 and P2: Actual and/or nominal points


P1' and P2': Projection of P1 and P2 on P
P: Projection plane
D1: Line space between P1 and P2
D2: Line passing through P1' and P2'

Note: If a plane is selected as projection feature and the points used have been measured at ball
center, the following message is displayed (the message varies according to the axes concerned):

The type of ball compensation must be specified. This corresponds to ball radius according to the normal
passing through the ball center and perpendicular to the feature:
None: the points are projected onto the plane with no compensation.
Auto: the points are projected onto the plane with ball radius compensation in the direction of probing or
opposite to the direction of probing, in relation to the selected plane.
Outward: the points are projected onto the plane and compensated by ball radius in the direction of probing.
Inward: the points are projected onto the plane and compensated by ball radius in the opposite direction to
probing.

Page 1086

Page 1087

Construct by intersection

This function is used to construct a line by intersection between two planes.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Intersection

Select the first intersection feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1088

Select the second intersection feature.

P1 and P2: Reference planes


D: Constructed line

Intersection of two planes

Page 1089

Construction by projection onto

This function is used to construct a line by perpendicular projection of a previously measured (actual) or
defined (nominal) reference line onto a plane.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1090

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

D1: Reference line


P: Projection plane
D: Constructed line

Projection of a line onto a plane

Page 1091

Construct median from

This function is used to construct a line composed of all the points located at equal distance from the two
selected lines.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Median

Specify the first symmetry feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1092

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Specify the second symmetry feature.

D1 and D2: Reference lines


D: Constructed line

Median line of two lines

Note: The orientation of the constructed line depends on the order in which the reference lines are
selected.

D1 selected, then D2.


D has the same orientation as D1.

D2 selected, then D1.


D has the same orientation as D2.

Page 1093

Construct parallel to

This function is used ot construct a line with all points at equal distance from another line.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Parallel to

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1094

Select a second feature that the line to be constructed will pass through.

and/or a distance between the line to be constructed and the reference line.

Line parallel to a line passing through a plane

D1: Reference line


P: Projection plane
Pt: Via point
D2: Line from intermediate
calculation projection of D1 on
P
d: Distance
D: Constructed line
Line parallel to a line in a plane, at a distance d

Line parallel to a line passing through a point

Page 1095

Construct perpendicular to

This function is used to construct a line orientated at 90 in relation to a given feature.


Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Perpendicular to

Select the reference line or plane:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1096

Select the point that the line to be constructed will pass through.

Select the projection plane.

Line perpendicular to a line, passing through a point and


D1: Reference line
in a plane
P: Reference plane
Pt: Via point
D: Constructed line

Line perpendicular to a plane and passing through a point

Page 1097

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a line symmetrical to a reference line in relation to (against) another line, a
point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1098

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical line in relation to a point

D1: Reference line


Ps: Point of symmetry
Ds: Line of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
D: Constructed line
Symmetrical line in relation to a point

Symmetrical line in relation to a plane

Page 1099

Construct by offset

This function is used to construct an offset line from two features that can be assimilated to points, projected
onto a plane and passing through the first feature.
To calculate the offset, the direction of the plane must be known (represented here by Vp).
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Offset

Select the projection plane:

Page 1100

By choosing it from the drop-down list


Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the first point.

Select the second point.

Specify the direction (+ or -) and the value of the offset between the second point
and the plane.

Example: to create line D from P1, then P2, a positive or negative offset of P2 is required :

P1 and P2: Reference points


P: Projection plane
d > 0: Positive offset
d < 0: Negative offset
D: Constructed line

Select the projection plane, P in this example.

Select the first point, here P1.

Select the second point, here P2.


or
specify the direction, positive (+) or negative (-)
and the value of the offset between the second point and the plane, 10 in the example.

Page 1101

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a line by applying a constraint calculation method different to that used for
the measured (actual) line.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1102

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev
or Least Squares.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

: Probed points of the actual (measured) line


D1 : Reference line
D : Line calculated without constraints
D ' : Line calculated with "parallel to" constraint in relation to D1
D '' : Line calculated with "perpendicular to" constraint in relation to D1

Page 1103

Construct by axis

This function is used to construct a line using the axes of a feature: the large axis, the small axis or the
normal, that can be accessed depending on the type of feature.
Select

mode in the construction window:

The fields common to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Axis

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1104

Select the reference axis among the Large axis, the Small axis and the
Normal.

Note: The length of the line results from the axes of the reference feature. When this length cannot be
calculated (e.g. for normals), the default length of the line is 100mm.

RECT1: Reference feature


DRTE1: Constructed line

Line constructed using the small


axis of a rectangle

Table of possible cases

Axes available depending on the features:


Feature

Possible options

Rectangle

large small norm


axis axis al

Slot

large small norm


axis axis al

Ellipse

large small norm


axis axis al

Hexagon

large
axis

norm
al

Circle

norm
al

Arc

norm
al

Geometrical point

norm
al

Surface point

norm
al

Plane

norm
al

Page 1105

Construct Circle

To construct a Circle feature, select Circle via the menu Features > Construct, or click
Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Circle features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct by intersection
- Construct by projection onto
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construction from new criteria
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction
Best fit through features
Construct by inersection
Construct by projection onto

Access to milti selection


No
Yes
Yes

Page 1106

Construct symmetriucal to
Construction from new criteria

Yes
No

Page 1107

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a circle passing through measured and/or constructed features. The circle
is projected onto a plane.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Circle features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.
Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1108

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1109

Construct by intersection

This function is used to construct a circle by intersection between a plane and cylinder, sphere or cone or
between two spheres.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Circle features are:

Intersection

Select the first intersection feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1110

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the second intersection feature:

Intersection of a cylinder and a plane

Cyl: Reference cylinder


S: Reference sphere
Co: Reference cone
P: Intersection plane
C: Constructed circle

Intersection of a sphere and a plane

Intersection of a cone and a plane

In the case of intersection between a cylinder and a plane, the software calculates the point of intersection
between the axis of the cylinder and the plane. This point is used as the center of the constructed circle, for
which the diameter is that of the cylinder and normal that of the plane.
In the case of intersection between a cone and a plane, the software calculates the point of intersection
between the axis of the cone and the plane. This point is used as the center of the constructed circle, for
which the diameter is that of the cone and normal that of the plane.

Page 1111

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a circle by perpendicular projection of a previously measured reference
circle onto a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Circle features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1112

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

C1: Reference circle


P: Projection plane
C: Constructed circle

Projection of a circle onto a plane

Page 1113

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a circle symmetrical to a reference circle in relation to a point, line, or
plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Circle features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1114

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical circle in relation to a point

C1: Reference circle


Ps: Point of symmetry
Ds: Line of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
C: Constructed circle

Symmetrical circle in relation to a line

Symmetrical circle in relation to a plane

Page 1115

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a circle by applying new calculation constraints to a previously measured
reference circle.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Circle features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1116

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev
, Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1117

Construct Arc

To construct an Arc feature, select Arc via the menu Features > Construct, or click
Bar in construction mode

in the Feature

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Arc features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct by projection onto
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construction from new criteria
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction

Access to multi selection

Best fit through features

No

Construct by projection onto

Yes

Page 1118

Construct symmetrical to
Construction from new criteria

Yes
No

Page 1119

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct an arc passing through measured and/or constructed features.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Arc features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.
Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1120

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1121

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct an arc by perpendicular projection of a previously measured arc onto a
plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Arc features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1122

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

A1: Reference arc


P: Projection plane
A: Constructed Arc

Projection of an arc onto a plane

Page 1123

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct an arc symmetrical to a reference arc in relation to (against) a line, a point,
or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Arc features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1124

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical arc in relation to a point

A1: Reference arc


Ps: Point of symmetry
Ds: Line of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
A: Constructed Arc

Symmetrical arc in relation to a line

Symmetrical arc in relation to a plane

Page 1125

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct an arc by applying constraints to a previously measured reference arc.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Arc features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1126

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev
, Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1127

Construct Plane

To construct a Plane feature, select Plane via the menu Features > Construct, or click
Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Plane features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct median from
- Construct parallel to
- Construct perpendicular to
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construct by offset
- Construction from new criteria
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction
Bes fit through features

Access to multi selection


No

Page 1128

Construct median from


Construct parallel to
Construct perpendicular to
Construct symmetrical to
Construct by offset
Construction from new criteria

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No

Page 1129

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a plane passing through measured and/or constructed features.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.
Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1130

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order to change the orientation of the normal of the plane.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1131

Construct median from

This function is used to construct a plane corresponding to the central position of two other planes.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Median

Select the first reference plane:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1132

Select the second reference plane.

P1 and P2: Reference planes


P: Constructed plane

Median plane of two planes

Page 1133

Construct parallel to

This feature is used to construct a plane parallel to a reference plane and either passing through another
feature or at a given distance from the reference plane.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Parallel to

Select the reference plane:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1134

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the via point in the parallel plane.

enter a positive or negative offset between the reference plane and the plane to
be constructed.

Plane parallel to a plane at a distance of D

P1: Reference plane


Pt: Via point
D: Distance between the planes
P: Constructed plane

Plane parallel to a plane passing through a point

Page 1135

Construct perpendicular to

This function is used to construct a plane perpendicular to a reference plane or point and passing through a
point or line.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Perpendicular to

Select the reference plane:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1136

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the via point or line on the perpendicular plane.

Plane perpendicular to a plane passing through a line

P: Reference plane
Pt: Via point
D: Via line
P: Constructed plane

Plane perpendicular to a line passing through a point

Page 1137

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a plane symmetrical to a reference plane in relation to another plane, line,
or point.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference plane:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1138

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical plane in relation to a point

P1: Reference plane


Ds: Line of symmetry
Ps: Point of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
P: Constructed plane
Symmetrical plane in relation to a line

Symmetrical plane in relation to a plane

Page 1139

Construct by offset

This function is used to construct an offset plane from three features that can be assimilated to measured
points, and passing through the first feature.
The direction of the normal of the plane depends on probing direction (clockwise or counterclockwise). The
orthonormal direction rule is applied.
Offset may therefore be positive or negative according to the direction of the normal.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Offset

Page 1140

Select the first point:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the second point.

Specify the direction (+ or -) and the value of the offset between the first point
and the second point.

Select the third point.

Specify the direction (+ or -) and the value of the offset between the second and
third points.

Example:

Page 1141

For planes P1 and P2, the points are selected in the following order: Pt2, Pt3, Pt1. The two planes therefore
pass through point Pt2 (the first point selected).
A sphere is determined around points Pt3 and Pt1 with the absolute value of the distance entered as radius.

Page 1142

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a plane by applying constraints to a previously measured reference plane.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1143

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev
, Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1144

Construct Sphere

To construct a Sphere feature, select Sphere via the menu Features > Construct, or click
Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Sphere features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construction from new criteria
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction
Best fit through features
Construct symmetrical to
Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection


No
Yes
No

Page 1145

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a sphere passing through measured and/or constructed features.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Sphere features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.
Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1146

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1147

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a sphere symmetrical to a reference sphere in relation to a plane, line, or
point.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Sphere features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference sphere:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1148

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical sphere in relation to a point

S1: Reference sphere


Ps: Point of symmetry
Ds: Line of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
S: Constructed sphere
Symmetrical sphere in relation to a line

Symmetrical sphere in relation to a plane

Page 1149

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a sphere by applying new constraints to a previously measured reference
sphere.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Sphere features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1150

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev
, Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1151

Construct Cylinder

To construct a Cylinder feature, select Cylinder via the menu Features > Construct, or click
Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Cylinder features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construction from new criteria
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction
Best fit through features
Construct symmetrical to
Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection


No
Yes
No

Page 1152

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a cylinder passing through measured and/or constructed features.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Cylinder features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.
Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1153

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order to change cylinder axis orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1154

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a cylinder symmetrical to a reference cylinder in relation to (against) a line,
a point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Cylinder features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1155

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical cylinder in relation to a point

CY1: Reference cylinder


Ps: Point of symmetry
Ds: Line of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
CY: Symmetrical cylinder

Symmetrical cylinder in relation to a line

Symmetrical cylinder in relation to a plane

Page 1156

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a cylinder by applying constraints to a previously measured reference
cylinder.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Cylinder features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1157

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among:


Tchebychev, Least Square, Inscribed , or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1158

Construct Cone

To construct a Cone feature, select Cone via the menu Features > Construct, or click
Bar in construction mode

in the Feature

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Cone features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construction from new criteria
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction
Best fit through features
Construct symmetrical to
Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection


No
Yes
No

Page 1159

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a cone passing through measured and/or defined (actual or nominal)
features.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Cone features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database. Only
features that can be assimilated to points are displayed.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.

Page 1160

Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order to change cone axis orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1161

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a cone symmetrical to a reference cone in relation to (against) a point, a
line, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Cone features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1162

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical cone in relation to a point

CO1: Reference cone


Ps: Point of symmetry
Ds: Line of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
Co: Constructed cone

Symmetrical cone in relation to a line

Symmetrical cone in relation to a plane

Page 1163

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a cone by applying constraints to a previously measured reference cone.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Cone features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1164

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev
, Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1165

Construct Torus

To construct a Torus feature, select Torus via the menu Features > Construct, or click
Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Torus features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construction from new criteria
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction
Best fit through features
Construct symmetrical to
Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection


No
Yes
No

Page 1166

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a torus passing through measured and/or constructed features. The torus is
projected onto a plane.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Torus features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.
Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1167

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order to reverse the orientation of the normal of the torus.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1168

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a torus symmetrical to a reference torus in relation to a line, point, or plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Torus features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1169

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical torus in relation to a point

T1: Reference torus


Ps: Point of symmetry
Ds: Line of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
T: Constructed torus
Symmetrical torus in relation to a line

Symmetrical torus in relation to a plane

Page 1170

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a torus by applying constraints to a previously measured reference torus.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Torus features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1171

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev
, Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1172

Construct Rectangle

To construct a Rectangle feature, select Rectangle via the menu Features > Construct, or click
the Feature Bar in construction mode

in

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Rectangle features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct by projection onto
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construction from new criteria
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction
Best fit through features
Construct by projection onto
Construct symmetrical to
Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection


No
Yes
Yes
No

Page 1173

Page 1174

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a rectangle passing through measured and/or constructed features. The
rectangle is projected onto a plane.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Rectangle features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.
Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1175

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1176

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a rectangle by perpendicular projection of a previously measured reference
rectangle onto a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Rectangle features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1177

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

R1: Reference rectangle


P: Projection plane
R: Constructed rectangle

Projection of a rectangle onto a plane

Page 1178

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a rectangle symmetrical to a reference rectangle in relation to (against) a
line, a point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Rectangle features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1179

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical rectangle in relation to a point

R1: Reference rectangle


Ps: Point of symmetry
Ds: Line of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
R: Constructed rectangle
Symmetrical rectangle in relation to a line

Symmetrical rectangle in relation to a plane

Page 1180

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a rectangle by applying constraints to a previously measured reference
rectangle.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Rectangle features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1181

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev
, Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1182

Construct Slot

To construct a Slot feature, select Slot via the menu Features > Construct, or click
Bar in construction mode

in the Feature

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Slot features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct by projection onto
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construction from new criteria
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction
Best fit through features
Construct by projection onto
Construct symmetrical to
Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection


No
Yes
Yes
No

Page 1183

Page 1184

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a slot passing through measured and/or constructed features. The slot is
projected onto a plane.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Slot features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.
Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1185

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1186

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a slot by perpendicular projection of a previously measured reference slot
onto a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Slot features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1187

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

O1: Reference slot


P: Projection plane
O: Constructed slot

Slot projected onto a plane

Page 1188

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a slot symmetrical to a reference slot in relation to (against) a line, a point,
or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1189

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical slot in relation to a point

O1: Reference slot


Ps: Point of symmetry
Ds: Line of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
O: Constructed slot
Symmetrical slot in relation to a line

Symmetrical slot in relation to a plane

Page 1190

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a slot by applying constraints to a previously measured reference slot.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Slot features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list
Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1191

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev
, Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1192

Construct Hexagon

To construct a Hexagon feature, select Hexagon via the menu Features > Construct, or click
Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Hexagon features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct by projection onto
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construction from new criteria
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction
Best fit through features
Construct by projection onto
Construct symmetrical to

Access to multi selection


No
Yes
Yes

Page 1193

Construction from new criteria

No

Page 1194

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a hexagon passing through measured and/or constructed features.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Hexagon features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.
Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1195

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1196

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a hexagon by projection perpendicular to a previously measured reference
hexagon onto a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Hexagon features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1197

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

H1: Reference hexagon


P: Projection plane
H: Constructed hexagon

Projection of a hexagone onto a plan

Page 1198

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a hexagon symmetrical to a reference hexagon in relation to (against) a
line, a point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Hexagon features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1199

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical hexagon in relation to a point

Symmetrical hexagon in relation to a line

H1: Reference
hexagon
Ps: Point of
symmetry
Ds: Line of
symmetry
Pls: Plane of
symmetry
H: Constructed
hexagon

Symmetrical hexagon in relation to a plane

Page 1200

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a hexagon by applying new calculation constraints to a previously
measured reference hexagon.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Hexagon features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1201

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev
, Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1202

Construct Ellipse

To construct an Ellipse feature, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Construct, or click
Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Ellipse features are:
- Best fit through features
- Construct by intersection
- Construct by projection onto
- Construct symmetrical to
- Construction from new criteria
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction
Best fit through features
Construct by inersection
Construct by projection onto

Access to milti selection


No
Yes
Yes

Page 1203

Construct symmetrical to
Construction from new criteria

Yes
No

Page 1204

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct an ellipse passing through measured and/or constructed features.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Ellipse features are:

Select Features
Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.
Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1205

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*].
To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m
and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1206

Construct by intersection

This function is used to construct an ellipse by intersection between a plane, a cylinder, or a cone and a
plane, a cylinder, or a cone. The ellipse obtained is constructed by intersection by the axis of the cylinder or
cone with the plane. Feature diameter at the intersection is transferred to the larger diameter of the ellipse.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Ellipse features are:

Intersection

Select the first intersection feature.

Page 1207

Select the second intersection feature:

Intersection of a cone and a plane


Co Reference cone
Cyl: Reference cylinder
P: Intersection plane
E: Constructed ellipse

Intersection of a cylinder and a plane

Notes:

The intersection of a plane with a cone does not always give an ellipse; a parabola or hyperbola may
be obtained.
If the intersection plane is perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder or cone, the smaller diameter of
the ellipse will be equal to its larger diameter (it will be a circle).

Page 1208

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct an ellipse by perpendicular projection of a previously measured reference
ellipse or circle onto a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Ellipse features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1209

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

Projection of an ellipse onto a plane

E1: Reference ellipse


C: Reference circle
P: Projection plane
E: Constructed ellipse

Projection of a circle onto a plane

Page 1210

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct an ellipse symmetrical to a reference ellipse in relation to (against) a line, a
point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Ellipse features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1211

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical ellipse in relation to a point

E1: Reference ellipse


Ps: Point of symmetry
Ds: Line of symmetry
Pls: Plane of symmetry
E: Constructed ellipse
Symmetrical ellipse in relation to a line

Symmetrical ellipse in relation to a plane

Page 1212

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct an ellipse by applying new calculation constraints to a previously measured
reference ellipse.
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Ellipse features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature:


By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1213

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev
, Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1214

Construct Surface Point

To construct a Surface Point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Construct or click
the Feature Bar in construction mode

in

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The types of construction available for Surface Point features are:
- Construct by intersection
- Construct by projection onto
In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:
Type of construction
Construct by intersection
Construct by projection onto

Access to multi seslection


Yes
Yes

Page 1215

Construct by intersection

This function is used to construct a surface point by intersection of an axis or line with a surface in the CAD
model (CAD surface).
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Surface Point features are:

Intersection

Select the axis or line to be used for construction:


Select the surface to be used for construction.
Click this button for automatic projection of the surface point according to the priority criteria described

Page 1216

on the Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points page.

This field may be used to add a material thickness to the surface point created.

L: Reference line
S: CAD surface
SRF: Constructed point

Intersection of a line with a surface

Page 1217

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a surface point by projecting a reference point on a CAD surface:
Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The specific fields used to construct Surface Point features are:

Projection

Select the projection feature:

Select projection mode from the drop-down list.

Page 1218

Depending on the projection mode selected above, select the surface, edge,
curve, or direction to be used for construction.
Click this button for automatic re-evaluation of the surface point according to the priority criteria
described on the Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points page.

This field may be used to add a material thickness to the surface point created.

Pt: Reference point


S: CAD surface
SRF: Constructed point

Projection of a point onto a surface

Note: The software may not be able to find a solution, in this case, check that the search distance
used for projection is sufficient.

Page 1219

Construct Section

To construct a Section, select Section via the menu Features > Construct or click
in construction mode

in the Feature Bar

A section may be constructed using defined (nominal) points or measured (actual) points.
The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page.
The fields specific to Section features are:

Construction Type
A list of existing points that may be used for construction is shown in the top part of the window.
Select the desired points. Multiple selection may be performed:

Page 1220

- By clicking the desired points while holding the Shift key down (for adjacent points)
- By clicking the desired points while holding the Ctrl key down (for points that are not adjacent)
Click this button to confirm your selection. The selected points are then displayed in the bottom part of
the window as a list of points composing the section:

used to remove the selected point(s) from the list.


used to move the selected point up or down in the list.

Tolerances

The section may be toleranced by entering the Higher and Lower tolerance values in these
fields.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up Default
Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 1221

Evaluate Feature
Evaluating a feature consists in calculating the features corresponding to the dimensions of a plan: Distance,
Angle, Geometrical Tolerance, Text/Value, Alignment Information.

Page 1222

Evaluate Distance

Page 1223

Evaluate Distance

To evaluate a distance, select Evaluate > Distance via the Features menu or click
bar.

in the Feature

The window is shown below:

The common fields to all evaluation windows are described on the Define and tolerance Feature page.
The specific fields used to evaluate Distance features are:

Feature / Ref. Feature

and

Select the features between which

distance is to be evaluated from the drop-down list or from the Feature Database by clicking
also click the desired feature in the 3D View.

. You may

Check (select) this box to use the nominal part of the feature to evaluate the distance, and not its
actual part.

Page 1224

3D Distances / Projected Distances


There are several possible cases:

The features are defined and measured (nominals and actuals)

The 3D Distances and Projected Distances fields show the nominal values of the 3D and projected
distances, calculated from the nominal feature values. These values may, however, be modified.

Example:
PNT1

PNT2

Distance evaluated

Page 1225

The features are only measured

The 3D Distances and Projected Distances fields show the actual values of the 3D and projected distances,
calculated from the actual feature values. These values are also used as nominal values to evaluate the
distance. They may thus be modified by entering the nominal values of the distances.

Example:
POIN1

POIN2

Distance evaluated

Page 1226

One feature is defined and measured and one feature is only measured

The 3D Distances and Projected Distances fields show the actual values for the 3D and projected
distances, calculated from the nominal values for the defined and measured feature and actual values for the
feature that is only measured. These values may, however, be modified.

Example:
POIN1

POIN2

Distance evaluated

Page 1227

Click this button to exit the window without evaluating the distance.
Click this button to launch the distance calculation. The result of evaluating the distance
between the two features is then displayed in the Results window.

Note: When a surface point is measured, the nominal values are re-calculated and cannot be identical
to those in Teach-in mode.
For the software to use the new nominal values for evaluation, the values in the 3D Distances and Projected
Distances fields must be deleted and nothing noted in their place.

Example:

Surface point 1 during learning (Teach-in mode)

Surface point 2 during learning


(Teach-in mode)

Distance evaluation during


learning: the software
calculates the nominal values
according to the surface
points.

Surface point 1 during execution: the


nominal values are different.

Surface point 2 during execution:


the nominal values are different.

Page 1228

Distance evaluation during execution


without deleting the values in the
fields: the software conserves the
same nominal values as during
learning
Distance evaluation during
execution with the values in
the fields deleted: the
software re-calculates the
nominal values according to
those of the new surface
points.

Distance Point / Point

Pt1 : Reference feature


Pt2 : Feature to be checked
d1 : 3D Distance between P1 and P2
d2 : Projected Distances between Pt1 and
Pt2

Distance Point / Line

D : Reference feature
Pt1 : Feature to be checked
Pt1*: Orthogonal projection of Pt1 on D
d1 : 3D Distance between Pt1 and Pt1*
d2 : Projected Distances between Pt1 and
Pt1*

Distance Point / Plane

Page 1229

P : Reference feature
Pt1 : Feature to be checked
Pt1*: Orthogonal projection of Pt1 on P
d1 : 3D Distance between Pt1 and Pt1*
d2 : Projected Distances between Pt1
andPt1*

Distance Plane / Plane

Method 1 (by default)

P1 : Reference feature
P2 : Feature to check (measured or construct
by Bestfit)

* probing points of the feature to be checked


d1 : Maximum distance between P1 and P2
d2 : Minimum distance between P1 and P2

Method 2 (barycenter)

Another calculation method may be used for the distance between planes. This method consists in projecting
the barycenter of each plane perpendicularly and calculating the mean of the two distances.
To do this, open the Advanced Parameters window via the Preferences menu. In the Config tab, search
for Distance name in the OPT_CALCUL section and enter 1 as value.

P1 : Plane 1
P2 : Plane 2
A : barycenter of P1
B : barycenter of P2
d1 : Projection of point A on P2
d2 : Projection of point B on P1
Distance D = (d1+d2)/2

Note: The Plane / Plane distances are not symmetrical, i.e. the result for the distance between feature
1 and feature 2 is different to the result for the distance between feature 2 and feature 1.

Distance Line / Plane

Page 1230

The nominal part of the distance is calculated vectorially. The software calculates the distances between the
ends of the line and their projections on the reference plane. The value given for d1 (=d2) is then equal to the
mean of the two previously calculated distances.
The evaluated part of the distance is calculated from the group of points used to model the line.
The software calculates the distances between the points composing the line to be inspected and the
reference plane. The results obtained are then d1 = maximum distance and d2 = minimum distance (the
distances are signed).

P : Reference feature
D : Feature to be checked (measured or
construct by Bestfit)
d1 = Maximum distance between D1 and D2
d2 = Minimum distance between D1 and D2

Note: The software cannot calculate the Plane / Line distance

Distance Line / Line

D1 : Line 1
D2 : Line 2
A : center of the segment of D1
B : center of the segment of D2
d1 = Distance from point A to line D2
d2 = Distance from point B to line D1
Distance D = (d1+d2)/2

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

In a program, when the distance between two surface points is evaluated, the software conserves the nominal
values entered during learning, this may give an incorrect deviation result.

Page 1231

Tolerance

To assign dimensional tolerance values to a distance, select Evaluate > Distance via the Features menu
or click

in the Feature bar.

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

,
,
,
Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the distances (3D distances,
projected distances) to be toleranced.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these distances.

or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.

Notes:

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that

Page 1232

they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.
The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up
Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 1233

Evaluate Angle

Page 1234

Evaluate Angle

To evaluate an angle, select Evaluate > Angle via the Features menu or click

in the Feature bar.

The window is shown below:

The common fields to all evaluation windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.
The specific fields used to evaluate Angle features are:

Feature / Ref. Feature

and

Select the features between which

angle is to be evaluated from the drop-down list or from the Feature Database by clicking
also click the desired feature in the 3D View.

. You may

Check (select) this box to use the nominal part of the feature to evaluate the angle, and not its
actual part.

Page 1235

3D Angle / Projected Angles


The

button is used to display the complementary angle to the result displayed.

There are several possible cases:


The features are defined and measured (nominals and actuals)

The 3D Angle and Projected Angles fields show the nominal values of the 3D and projected angles,
calculated from the nominal feature values. These values may, however, be modified.

Example:
Plan1

Plan2

Angle evaluated

Page 1236

The features are only measured

The 3D Angle and Projected Angles fields show the actual values of the 3D and projected angles,
calculated from the actual feature values. These values are also used as nominal values to evaluate the angle.
They may thus be modified by entering the nominal values of the angles.

Example:
Plan1

Plan2

Page 1237

Angle evaluated

One feature is defined and measured and one feature is only measured

The 3D Angle and Projected Angles fields show the actual values for the 3D and projected angles,
calculated from the nominal values for the defined and measured feature and actual values for the feature that
is only measured.

Example:
Plan 1

Plan 2

Page 1238

Angle evaluated

Click this button to exit the window without evaluating angle.


Click this button to run the angle calculation. The result of evaluating the angle between the
two features is then displayed in the Results window.

The angles given by the software are calculated as follows:


3D Angles: Angle is always positive, irrespective of feature orientation.
Projected Angles: Feature orientation affects the sign of the angle.

Example 1: Projected Angles

Page 1239

- if D1 is a reference feature, angle a is negative,


- if D2 is a reference feature, angle a is positive.

D1: line 1
D2: line 2
d1 : projection of D1 in plane XY
d2: projection of D2 in plane XY
a: projected angle XoY between D1 and
D2

Example 2: Projected Angles


The orientation of one of the features is changed. D1 has the same orientation, but the orientation of D2 is
reversed.
- if D1 is a reference feature, angle a is positive,
- if D2 is a reference feature, angle a is negative.

D1: line 1
D2: line 2
d1 : projection of D1 in plane XY
d2: projection of D2 in plane XY
a: projected angle XoY between D1 and
D2

Angle between lines

Page 1240

D1: line 1
D2: line 2
d1 : projection of D1 in plane XY
d2: projection of D2 in plane XY
A: 3D angle between D1 and D2
a: projected angle XoY between D1 and D2

Angle between planes

Page 1241

P1: plane 1
P2: plane 2
P3: plane 3, perpendicular to P1 and P2
D1: line of intersection between P1 and P3
D2 : line of intersection between P2 and P3
A: 3D angle between P1 and P2

Angle between a line and plane

P: plane
D: line
d : line D projected in plane P
A: 3D angle between P and D

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1242

Page 1243

Tolerance

To assign dimensional tolerance values to an angle, select Evaluate > Angle via the Features menu or
click

in the Feature bar.

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

,
,
,
angles) to be toleranced.

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the angles (3D angle, projected

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these angles.

Notes:

If an incorrect sign or value is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the
user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.

Page 1244

The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up
Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 1245

Geometrical Tolerances

There are two different graphic interfaces for evaluating tolerances.


Standard mode

Advanced mode

Click on the image corresponding to your software configuration to access the adequate documentation.

Page 1246

Generalities

The principle of normalized tolerance is to tolerance separately each of the featureary surfaces (plane,
cylinder, cone, etc.) making up the part's surface.
This norm distinguishes three types of faults:
- size faul
- form fault
- position and orientation fault, along with run-out fault.
The dimensioning provides two means of giving tolerances to these faults: Dimension tolerance (represented
as a dimension on a layout) and geometrical tolerance (represented as a tolerance frame). The first method
defines a nominal (perfect) part shape, and the second defines the maximum deviations allowed for the actual
part as compared to the perfect part (compatible with the part's function).
For measurements made with 3D measuring machines, the notion of tolerance can be defined by the
following question: "At what distance from the nominal model does the spread of actual points qualify the part
as not being fit to fulfil its purpose?".

Types of tolerances
The norm defines the following orientation tolerances:

Form tolerances

Orientation tolerances

Position tolerances

Runout tolerances

Page 1247

Method of evaluation
Orientation tolerances and position tolerances are calculated using three different methods, depending on the
information available for the feature to be toleranced.

Method 1: cloud of points

The first method uses a cloud of points for the feature to be toleranced. Of course, this method is possible
only with measured features or with constructed features passing at these points. The cloud of points is
always relative to the feature to be toleranced. Its associated mathematical feature is used for the reference
feature.

Note: The cloud of points method is used especially for features where the cloud of points can serve as
a model for the basic geometrical information (line and plane for instance). In these cases, it is used to
calculate the feature (with one or more constraints). For other cases (cylinder or cone), the cloud of points is
used only to delimit the feature.

Example: parallelism between two lines

Method 2: nominal

The second method use the nominal data for the feature to be toleranced. This method limits the feature for
the tolerance calculation.

Method 3: vector length for the feature to be toleranced

The third method uses an operator-defined vector length for the feature to be toleranced. It is interresting to
choose this method when the tolerance must be evaluated on a defined length or in the case of a projected
tolerance. In the case of a plane, the length is taken on the greatest slope compared to the element of
reference.

Notes:

When possible, it is recommended to use the first and second methods, as they are closer to the

Page 1248

ISO 01 norm.
You should remark that depending on the method used, the results obtained can be very different.
These digital methods use mathematical constructions, vectorial calculation (especially the third
method) and constrained association (especially the first method). The constrained association
method takes into account the geometrical constraints of the tolerances (for example, the case of a
plane parallel to a line) and finds the best possible feature complying to a rule of least square.

In program : When this function is learned in a program, the following line appears:

Page 1249

Minimum material L

Refer to the ISO 2692 norm, amendment 1: Requirement for minimum material.
The requirement for minimum material, noted as a circled L, is quite like the maximum material. The
difference is that you consider the least state of material instead of the greatest state of material.
The deviation is minimum if the dimensions are at the minimum material and if the geometrical faults are
most unfavorable.

Notes:

If the dimensions of assembled parts differ from the minimum material, exceeding the specified
tolerance is acceptable without affecting the assembly. This is the central principle of the minimum
material requirement.
If a part has a dimension between the minimum and the maximum material, the specified tolerance
can be extended by the difference between the actual dimension and the minimum material
dimension. The symbol is noted along side the tolerance dimension having a value that takes into
account the limits of material for the features or features concerned.
For the actual control, even though it would be possible to make a physical template corresponding
to the virtual state of minimum material, it would be impossible to use. Only a computer procedure
can check that the virtual state has not been exceeded.

Example: perpendicularity tolerance for a plug:

The plug's axis must be within a cylindrical zone perpendicular to the reference plane A. The diameter of the
zone varies from 0.04 to 0.06, depending on whether the stamp's diameter is 15.98 (minimum material) or 16
(maximum material). The requirement for minimum material takes into account a condition for minimum
thickness of the plug.

Page 1250

Maximum material M

See norm NFE 04-455, ISO 2692


The assembly of features depends on the combined effect of the geometrical and size errors of the parts to
be jointed.
Slack is minimum if the sizes are the maximum material and if the geometrical errors are the most
disadvantageous.
Slack is maximum if the sizes are the minimum material and if the geometrical errors are small.

Notes:

If the sizes of assembled parts are far from the maximum material, then exceeding the specified
tolerance is acceptable without effecting the assembly. This is the principle for the maximum
material requirement.
If the size of a part is between the minimum and maximum material, then the specified tolerance can
be extended by the difference between the actual size and the size of maximum material. The
symbol is shown next to a tolerance whose value was selected taking into account the maximum
material limits for the feature(s) in question.
Example: perpendicularity tolerance for a stamp

The stamp's axis is located in a cylindrical zone perpendicular to the reference plane A. The diameter of the
zone ranges from 0.04 to 0.06 depending on whether the stamp's diameter is 16 (maximum material) or 15.98
(minimum material).
The size of the cylindrical feature must be controlled separately to make sure that the size limits are not
exceeded.

Page 1251

Stamp with maximum diameter (16,00),


in contact with the gage.

Stamp with minimum diameter (15,98),


in contact with the gage.

Effective perpendicularity tolerance: 0,04

Effective perpendicularity tolerance: 0,06

Page 1252

Evaluate Geometrical Tolerance

To evaluate a geometrical tolerance, select Evaluate from the Features menu or click
bar.

in the Feature

The Geometrical Tolerance window for a feature is displayed as shown below, but varies slightly according to
the feature selected:

Name
shows the type of feature to be evaluated, here an inclination tolerance.
When an evaluation window is opened, the software offers a default feature name,
composed of feature type and an incremental number. For example INCL1, when the first inclination tolerance
feature is defined. This name may be modified by the user. Enter the name of the feature to be created in this
field, or select an existing feature from the drop-down list.
This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database.

Page 1253

Note: The default name may be modified via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters >
Default feature name.

Family
The feature may be assigned a family by entering family name in this field or
selecting an existing family from the drop-down list.

Type
The type of geometrical tolerance to be evaluated is represented by a symbol that is also shown on the
drawing used by the metrologist.
This symbol and the tolerance frame in which it is shown are interactive. Thus, a tolerance may be
constructed directly from the drawing by clicking on certain parts of the frame.
The frame is divided into three zones, each with a different cursor:

Click the first zone of the frame to define the type of tolerance to be evaluated:

The second zone of the frame is used (depending on the tolerance selected) to apply a Cylindrical tolerance
zone, Projected tolerance zone, maximum material thickness (MMC), or minimum material thickness (LMC)
to the feature toleranced:

Page 1254

: This symbol means that the tolerance zone is circular or cylindrical or spherical. The tolerance value will
be equal to the diameter of the previous zones.
: The projected tolerance zone allows an orientation or position tolerance to be applied, not to the feature
toleranced itself, but to its extension outside the workpiece.
: The maximum material requirement is used to define "boundary surfaces" called by the "virtual state"
standard. The maximum material requirement, applied to the feature toleranced, allows the value of the
geometrical tolerance to be increased, if the feature to be toleranced is not in its maximum material state.
: The minimum material requirement is used to define "boundary surfaces" called by the "virtual state"
standard. The minimum material requirement, applied to the feature toleranced, allows the value of the
geometrical tolerance to be increased, if the feature to be toleranced is not in its minimum material state.

The last zone of the frame allows (depending on the tolerance) a maximum or a minimum material to be
applied to the reference feature. Similarly, it specifies the reference(s) of the tolerances. None for form
tolerances, a feature, for example, for the orientation tolerances, or even a complete reference system (A B
C) for a location:

Parameters
This section of the window varies according to the type of tolerance selected. For more information, refer to
the pages describing each type of geometrical tolerance.

When you have completed the fields, click this button to launch the evaluation calculation.
To close the window without applying any changes made.

Page 1255

Straightness tolerance

Straightness evaluates the form fault of a line. The software determines the straightness tolerance for a line
by calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the line using the least
squares method.

Note: Requesting the straightness of a line is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on
the line, and if these points are well distributed along the line.

Special case: straightness of an axis


To determine the straightness of a cone or cylinder axis, the feature is divided into many independent circles
at different heights and normal to the cone or cylinder axis and these circles are measured. A line is then
constructed through the centers of the measured circles and the straightness is requested for this
constructed line. Of course, the more circles and the better will be the straightness result.

The evaluation window of the straightness tolerance is as follows:

Page 1256

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the straightness tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.

enables to select the calculation criteria. For more details, please see the page
called Constraints on features.
Type in the value of the straightness tolerance indicated on the drawing.

Quote the case corresponding to the tolerance area desired. The tolerance
area depends on the tolerance type defined on the technical plan:

The tolerance area will equal the cylinder diameter in which you can find all points belonging
to the line.

or the tolerance area will be limited by two parallel and coplanar lines.
In that case, it is necessary to select a projection plane to calculate the straightness of a line.

Page 1257

Page 1258

Flatness tolerance

Flatness evaluates the form fault of a plane. The software determines the flatness tolerance for a plane by
calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the plane using the least
squares method.

Note: Requesting the flatness of a plane is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the
plane, and if these points are well distributed its surface.

The evaluation window of the flatness tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the flatness tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1259

by choosing it in the listbox,


or in the Features database.

enables to select the calculation criteria. For more details, please see the page
called Constraints on features.
Type in the value of the flatness tolerance indicated on the drawing.

The zone of tolerance is limited by two parallel planes which include the toleranced plane.

Page 1260

Roundness tolerance

Roundness is used to esteem the form fault of a circle. The software determines the roundness tolerance for
a circle by calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the circle using the
least squares method.

Notes:

Requesting the Roundness of a circle is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the
circle, and if these points are well distributed on the circumference.
Evaluating roundness of a circle in a cone is only meaningful if the cone was measured as a single
path and subject to the following constraints: cone angle (Dim1)and cone direction (Parallel to).

The evaluation window of the roundness tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the roundness tolerance are as follows:

Page 1261

allows to select the feature to refer:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.

enables to select the calculation criteria. For more details, please see the page
called Constraints on features.
Type in the value of the roundness tolerance indicated on the drawing.

The tolerance area is limited by two concentric and coplanar circles between which you can find all the
probed points:

Example: For a cone


The probed points are projected along the cone grade, onto the plane perpendicular to the cone axis and
passing through their barycenter. These projected points, all located on the same plane, are used to
calculated the tolerance.

Page 1262

Probing Points
Projected probing points
(used to calculate
roundness)
Projection plane

Page 1263

Cylindricity tolerance

Cylindricity is used to esteem the form fault of a cylinder.

Note: Requesting the Cylindricity of a cylinder is meaningful only if you have measured enough points
on the cylinder, and if these points are well distributed on the circumference and height.

The evaluation window of the cylindricity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the cylindricity tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:


by choosing it in the listbox,

Page 1264

or in the Features database.

enables to select the calculation criteria. For more details, please see the page
called Constraints on features.
Type in the value of the cylindricity tolerance indicated on the drawing.

The tolerance zone is limited by two coaxial cylinders which include the whole of the probed points:

Page 1265

Profile of line tolerance

The tolerance of a line profile is used to evaluate the form fault of a section. The software calculates the
distance between the two points farthest from the defined section (perpendicular distance). The form
tolerance is twice this distance divided into equal parts on each side of the defined section.

Note: Requesting the tolerance of a profile line is meaningful only if you have measured enough points
on the section, and if these points are well distributed over the section.

The evaluation window of the profile of line tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the profile of line tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1266

by choosing it in the listbox,


or in the Features database.
Type in the value of the profile of line tolerance indicated on the drawing.

The tolerance area equals the diameter of the circle whos radius is the maximum distance between the
measured section and the nominal section:

Page 1267

Profile of surface tolerance

The tolerance of a surface profile is used to evaluate the form fault of a cone, a sphere or any other form. The
software calculates the distance of the point farthest from surface measured using the least squares method
(perpendicular distance). The form tolerance is twice this distance divided into equal parts on each side of the
defined least square surface.

Note: Requesting the tolerance of the surface profile for a cone, a sphere or any other surface is
meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the surface, cone or sphere, and if these points are
well distributed over the feature.

The evaluation window of the profile of surface tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the profile of surface tolerance are as follows:

Page 1268

allows to select the feature to refer:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.

enables to select the calculation criteria. For more details, please see the page
called Constraints on features.
Type in the value profile of surface tolerance indicated on the drawing.

Surface profile tolerance applied to a cone and to a sphere:

Page 1269

The software calculates a sphere from the measured


points using the least squares method.
Among the probed points, the software selects the point
orthogonally farthest from the sphere surface.
It then calculates a sphere centered on the original sphere
and passing through this point.
The tolerance zone is equal to twice the difference
between the radii of two spheres.

The software calculates a cone from the measured points


using the least squares method.
Among the probed points, the software selects the point
orthogonally farthest from the sphere surface.
It then calculates a cone with the same angle and on the
same axis as the original cone and passing through this
point.
The tolerance zone is equal to twice the difference
between the radii of two cone bases.

For any other form


To establish the tolerance:
- surface points must be probed. These points are used to create a section,
- the alignment is optimized for these points. The verification of the projection of the points onto the correct
surface is taken into consideration,
- a section is created using the previously measured points,
- in the evaluation window, select the section that has been created as the toleranced feature.

Page 1270

Parallelism tolerance

There are several possible cases:


- a line relative to a reference line,
- a line relative to a reference surface,
- a surface relative to a reference surface,
- a surface relative to a reference line.

The evaluation window of the parallelism tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the parallelism tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1271

by choosing it in the listbox,


or in the Features database.
If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the parallelism tolerance indicated on the drawing.

For the features having an axis (line, cylinder, cone), it is possible to select
the Tolerance Zone type specified by the plane. To do that, check the box corresponding to the correct
tolerance zone.
For instance, in the case of
, a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular tolerance
according to the feature to be toleranced is calculated.
For parallelism between 2 features corresponding to lines (lines, cylinders, cones) the plane selected in the
list represents the lines projection plane and not tolerance zone plane.

Select the calculation method:


- Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to a length entered
by the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the
case of a projected tolerance:

Page 1272

- Cloud of points : This method uses points from the toleranced feature. These points are measured or
constructed from other points so as to delimit a tolerance zone parallel to the reference feature:

- Nominal : The method using a defined limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the nominal
dimension of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined:

Table of possible solutions for calculating parallelism

Page 1273

Page 1274

Perpendicularity

There are several possible cases:


- a line relative to a reference line,
- a line relative to a reference surface,
- a surface relative to a reference surface,
- a surface relative to a reference line.

The evaluation window of the perpendicularity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the perpendicularity tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1275

by choosing it in the listbox,


or in the Features database.
If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the perpendicularity tolerance indicated on the drawing.

For the features having an axis (line, cylinder, cone), check the box
corresponding to the correct tolerance zone. The type of zone is determined by the tolerance on the drawing.
For instance, in the case of
, one calculates a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular
tolerance according to the feature to be toleranced.

Select the calculation method:


- Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to a length entered
by the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the
case of a projected tolerance. For a plane, the length is taken on the greatest slope relative to the reference
feature.

Page 1276

- Cloud of points : The cloud of points method uses points from the toleranced feature. These points are
measured or constructed from other points so as to delimit a tolerance zone perpendicular to the reference
feature.

Page 1277

- Nominal : The method using a defined limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the nominal
size of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined.

Page 1278

Table of possible solutions for calculating perpendicularity

Page 1279

Page 1280

Angularity tolerance

There are several possible cases:


- a line relative to a reference line,
- a line relative to a reference surface,
- a surface relative to a reference surface,
- a surface relative to a reference line.

The evaluation window of the angularity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the angularity tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1281

by choosing it in the listbox,


or in the Features database.
If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the inclination angle. It can be signed in order to define
explicitly the tolerance zone, the calculation being the same as Angle calculation.
Type in the value of the angularity tolerance indicated on the drawing.

For the features having an axis (line, cylinder, cone), check the box
corresponding to the correct tolerance zone. The type of zone is determined by the tolerance on the drawing.
For instance, in the case of
, one calculates a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular
tolerance according to the feature to be toleranced.

Select the calculation method:


- Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to a length entered
by the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the
case of a projected tolerance. For a plane, the length is taken on the greatest slope relative to the reference
feature.

Page 1282

- Cloud of points : This method uses points from the toleranced feature. These points are measured or
constructed from other points so as to delimit a tolerance zone have a nominal angle i relative to the
reference feature.

- Nominal : The method using a nominal limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the
nominal dimension of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined.

Table of possible solutions for calculating angularity

Page 1283

Page 1284

True Position tolerance

There are several possible cases of position tolerance:


- for a point,
- for a line,
- for a median plane or a plane surface.
A position can be calculated either relative to a feature or to a an entire reference system.

The evaluation window of the true position tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the true position tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1285

by choosing it in the listbox,


or in the Features database.
If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.

Enter the value corresponding to the distance between the toleranced feature
and the reference feature.
Type in the value of the true position tolerance indicated on the drawing.
The type of zone is determined by the tolerance on the drawing. For instance, in the case of
, one calculates a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular tolerance according to the
feature to be toleranced.

Select the calculation method:


- Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance over to a length entered by
the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the case
of a projected tolerance. For example, for a cylinder, it is possible to enter a deviation over a Length of 35
mm Starting At 2 mm from zero of the reference point. The distance Starting At corresponds to the distance
starting from the feature base until the plane of the alignment of definition to which the normal is closest to
the orientation of the feature.

Page 1286

- Cloud of points : This method can be used only for the position of a line or a plane. The tolerance result is
the distance between the point farthest from the measured plane or line and its symmetrical point relative to
the nominal plane or line. This method is possible only if the features have been measured or constructed by
passing through the points.

- Nominal : The method using a defined limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the nominal
dimension of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined.

Table of possible solutions for calculating position tolerance

Page 1287

Page 1288

Page 1289

Multiple True Position tolerance

Multiple Location enables the positions of toleranced features with tolerances to be optimised, so as to
minimise the deviation of the feature with the greatest deviation.
The evaluation window of the multiple true position tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the multiple true position tolerance are as follows:
Type in the value of the multiple true position tolerance indicated on the
drawing.
Click on this button to select in the features database the different features
on which a tolerance has to be set.

Warning: All features have to be defined in the same alignment system.

Page 1290

enables to give a name to the alignment system which is the localization


evaluation result.

enables to set up the desired moves (translations and rotations) in order to


evaluate the localization.

It is possible, by quoting

or

to fix maximum or minimum material

onto the reference.

Results
After evaluating the multiple location, the software creates:

The resulting reference alignment obtained by optimizing the features' definition reference alignment.
The result of the multiple location.
The simple location of each of the features with tolerances.
A copy of all toleranced features expressed in the resulting reference alignment.
A reference alignment feature specifying the rotation and translation values of the created reference
alignment, with the multiple location calculation.

In the Results window, the "Multiple location" feature will consist in the following feature(s):

The value of the maximum deviation for the toleranced features


The value of the gain connected with the maximum material on the reference when it has been
selected.

Page 1291

Bidirectional multiple position tolerance

Bidirectional multiple position allows the positions of features with tolerances to be optimized to minimize the
deviation between the measured points and theoretical points while taking two directions into account.
When the bidirectional multiple position function is selected, the following window is displayed:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the bidirectionnal multiple position tolerance are as follows:

allows the name of the tolerance and its family to be specified.

shows the position symbol and allows a material maximum or minimum to


be set for the features with tolerances or for the reference. The material maximum/minimum may be
accessed by clicking the second and third boxes for the features when the features have been previously
selected, and clicking the last box for the reference.

Page 1292

allows the features to be assigned a tolerance to be selected.

Warning: The features must all be defined in the same alignment. A material maximum or minimum
may also be added to the features (by right-clicking the features). The T1 and T2 fields allow tolerance values
in both directions to be entered. These two directions are determined by the feature definition alignment.
Direction T1 is parallel to the X axis and direction T2 is parallel to the Y axis.
Lastly, this window allows the optimized alignment resulting from the tolerance evaluation to be named.
allows the tolerance zone to be expressed in polar coordinates. The orientation of
the tolerance zone is then radial:
Cartesian coordinate method

Measured point

Polar coordinate method

Defined point

In the above example, the measured point is within the tolerance in Cartesian coordinates, but outside the
tolerance in polar coordinates.

allows the desired moves (translations and rotations) to evaluate the


tolerance to be configured. As spherical position clauses are not supported, the three translations cannot be
selected simultaneously. It is possible to select, at maximum, 1 rotation and 2 translations.

allows a material maximum or minimum to be set on the reference and also

Page 1293

allows the reference to be selected.

Using the results:


Once bidirectional multiple position evaluation has been performed, the software creates:

The result obtained for the position by giving the max. deviation on the first direction (t1) and the max.
deviation on the second direction (t2). Max. deviations t1 and t2 do not necessarily originate from the
same feature. If a material maximum or minimum was selected for the reference, the result of this
multiple position also gives the material gain obtained on the reference.
The simple position of each feature with a tolerance.
A copy of each feature with a tolerance redefined in the result alignment.
The result alignment obtained by optimizing the definition alignment, along with alignment information
giving the translation and rotation values of this new alignment with respect to the previous alignment.

Page 1294

Composite Tolerance

There are two types of composite tolerance:

two standard multiple locations (positions),

or,

composite tolerance.

The two representations do not have the same significance (ASME Y14.5M-1994 standard).

The composite tolerance evaluation window is displayed as shown below:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerance evaluation windows are described on the Evaluate
Geometrical Tolerance page.

Page 1295

The fields specific to composite tolerance are:

represents the composite tolerance symbol and allows you to select it.

used, when features are selected, to set a maximum or minimum


thickness for the features to be toleranced.

used to open the Select Datums window.

allows the features to be assigned a tolerance to be selected.

Warning: The features must all be defined in the same alignment. A maximum or minimum material
thickness may also be added to the features (by right-clicking the features).

PLTZF (Paterm Locating Tolerance Zone Framework) used to define the


tolerance area of the first line. You may name it, enter the value of the tolerance area, and name the
alignment to be created.

FRTZF (Feature Relative Tolerance Zone Framework) used to define the


tolerance area of the second line. You may name it, enter the value of the tolerance area, and name the
alignment to be created.

The Select Datums window is shown below:

Page 1296

Shows composite tolerance type and the values of the tolerance area.

used to select a feature as datum (reference) for the first line. The feature is
automatically entered in the second line.
The feature on the second line may be deleted by using the corresponding trash can symbol. According to
the standard, the datum (reference) on the second line, if there is one, is necessarily the same as that on the
first line.
The selected feature may be deleted by using the trash can symbol for the first line. It will then be deleted
from both lines.
A maximum or minimum material thickness may be set for the second datum.

See also: Example 1, Example 2, Example 3, Example 4 and Example 5.

Page 1297

Example 1

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read?


In the box, there are two position symbols; this tolerance is therefore composed of two standard multiple
positions:

and

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?

Step 1

Page 1298

Define and measure the three datum (reference) planes, A, B and C.


Define and measure the 4 circles.

Warning: The 4 circles must be defined in the same alignment.

Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite tolerance, two single:

Select the 4 circles and add the maximum material thickness.

Step 3

Enter the PLTZF and FRTZF.


The PLTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Page 1299

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.8) and change
alignment name or keep the original name.
In this case, position is requested relative to the ABC alignment. Consequently there is no optimization.
The FRTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.2) and change
alignment name or keep the original name.
In this case, the position is requested relative to the AB alignment (with A a Z normal plane and B an X
normal plane). Consequently, the only degree of freedom that standard allows for calculation is translation in
Y.

Step 4

Enter the references (datums).


Open the Select Datums window:

Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- Datum A = plane A
- Datum B = plane B
- Datum C = plane C
In the first box, select the plane A feature.
In the second box, select the plane B feature.
In the third box, select the plane C feature. There is no datum in the second tolerance line, so the feature
must be deleted using the trash can at the bottom.

Page 1300

Step 5

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions.


PLTZF1: multiple position result, corresponding to the first line.
CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data
in the first line.
TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line.
FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line.
CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the
data in the second line.
TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1301

Example 2

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read?


In the box, there is one position symbol, this tolerance is therefore a composite tolerance.

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?

Step 1

Define and measure the three datum (reference) planes, A, B and C.


Define and measure the 4 circles.

Warning: The 4 circles must be defined in the same alignment.

Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite tolerance, one composite:

Page 1302

Select the 4 circles and add the maximum material thickness.

Step 3

Enter the PLTZF and FRTZF.


The PLTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.8) and change
alignment name or keep the original name.
In this case, position is requested relative to the ABC alignment. Consequently there is no optimization.

Page 1303

The FRTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.2) and change
alignment name or keep the original name.
In this case, the position is requested relative to the AB alignment (with A a Z normal plane and B an X
normal plane). Consequently, the only degrees of freedom allowed by the calculation standard are
translations in X and Y. In actual fact, given that it involves a composite tolerance, reference B sets
orientation only and not position.

Step 4

Enter the composite tolerance datums.


Open the Select Datums window:

Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- Datum A = plane A
- Datum B = plane B
- Datum C = plane C
In the first box, select the plane A feature.
In the second box, select the plane B feature.
In the third box, select the plane C feature. There is no datum in the second line of the tolerance, so the
feature must be deleted using the trash can at the bottom.

Step 5:

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

Page 1304

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions.


PLTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the first line.
CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data
in the first line.
TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line.
FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line.
CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the
data in the second line.
TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1305

Example 3

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read?


In the box, there are two position symbols; this tolerance is therefore composed of two standard multiple
positions:

and

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?

Step 1

Page 1306

Define and measure the three datum (reference) planes, A, B and C.


Define and measure the 4 circles.

Warning: The 4 circles must be defined in the same alignment.

Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite tolerance, two single:

Select the 4 circles and add the maximum material thickness.

Step 3

Enter the PLTZF and FRTZF.


The PLTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Page 1307

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.8) and change
alignment name or keep the original name.
In this case, position is requested relative to the ABC alignment. Consequently there is no optimization.
The FRTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.2) and change
alignment name or keep the original name.
In this case, the position is requested relative to the AB alignment (with A a Z normal plane and B an Z
normal circle). Consequently, the only degree of freedom that standard allows for calculation is translation in
Z.

Step 4

Enter the references (datums).


Open the Select Datums window:

Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- Datum A = plane A
- Datum B = plane B
- Datum C = plane C
In the first box, select the plane A feature.
In the second box, select the plane B feature.
In the third box, select the plane C feature. There is no datum in the second tolerance line, so the feature
must be deleted using the trash can at the bottom.

Page 1308

Step 5 :

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions.


PLTZF1: multiple position result, corresponding to the first line.
CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data
in the first line.
TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line.
FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line.
CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the
data in the second line.
TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1309

Example 4

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read?


In the box, there is one position symbol, this tolerance is therefore a composite tolerance.

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?

Step 1

Define and measure the 2 planes A and C (where C is a median plane) and the circle B.
Define and measure the 4 circles.

Warning: The 4 circles must be defined in the same alignment.

Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite tolerance, one composite:

Page 1310

Select the 4 circles and add the maximum material thickness.

Step 3

Enter the PLTZF and FRTZF.


The PLTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.8) and change
alignment name or keep the original name.
In this case, position is requested relative to the ABC alignment. Consequently there is no optimization.

Page 1311

The FRTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.2) and change
alignment name or keep the original name.
In this case, the position is requested relative to the AB alignment (with A a Z normal plane and B an Z
normal circle and C an X normal plane). Consequently, the only degrees of freedom allowed by the calculation
standard are translations in X and Y. In actual fact, given that it involves a composite tolerance, reference C
sets orientation only and not position.

Step 4

Enter the composite tolerance datums.


Open the Select Datums window:

Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- Datum A = plane A
- Datum B = circle B
- Datum C = plane C
In the first box, select the plane A feature.
In the second box, select the circle B feature.
In the third box, select the plane C feature.

Step 5:

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

Page 1312

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions.


PLTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the first line.
CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data
in the first line.
TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line.
FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line.
CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the
data in the second line.
TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1313

Example 5

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read?


In the box, there is one position symbol, this tolerance is therefore a composite tolerance.

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?

Step 1

Define and measure the 2 planes A and C (where C is a median plane) and the circle B.
Define and measure the 4 circles.

Warning: The 4 circles must be defined in the same alignment.

Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite tolerance, one composite:

Page 1314

Select the 4 circles and add the maximum material thickness.

Step 3

Enter the PLTZF and FRTZF.


The PLTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.8) and change
alignment name or keep the original name.
In this case, position is requested relative to the ABC alignment. Consequently there is no optimization.

Page 1315

The FRTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.2) and change
alignment name or keep the original name.
In this case, the position is requested relative to the A alignment (with A a Z normal plane). Consequently,
the only degrees of freedom allowed by the calculation standard are translations in X and Y and rotation
around Z.

Step 4

Enter the composite tolerance datums.


Open the Select Datums window:

Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- Datum A = plane A
- Datum B = circle B
- Datum C = plane C
In the first box, select the plane A feature.
In the second box, select the circle B feature.
In the third box, select the plane C feature.

Step 5:

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

Page 1316

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions.


PLTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the first line.
CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data
in the first line.
TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line.
FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line.
CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the
data in the second line.
TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1317

Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance

The software automatically distinguishes a concentricity from a coaxiality according to the features used for
the calculation.
If circle features are used, the software does concentricity tolerance automatically. Concentricity requires the
presence of coplanar features. The circular tolerance zone is delimited by a circle having its center at the
reference point.
If two axial features are selected, the software does a coaxial tolerance automatically.
The coaxial tolerance zone is delimited by a cylinder having its axis on the reference axis.

The evaluation window of the Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance are as follows:

Page 1318

allows to select the feature to refer:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.
If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance indicated on the


drawing.
The type of zone is determined by the tolerance on the drawing. For instance, in the case of
, one calculates a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular tolerance according to the
feature to be toleranced.

Select the calculation method:


- Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance over a length entered by
the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the case
of a projected tolerance. For example, for a cylinder you can enter a deviation over a Length of 35 mm
Starting At 5 mm from the base. The distance Starting At corresponds to the distance starting from the
feature base until the plane of the alignment of definition to which the normal is closest to the orientation of
the feature.

Page 1319

- Cloud of points : The method using a cloud of points as calculation feature is the method which is closest
to the norm. However, it can be used only for coaxial tolerance. The tolerance result is the distance between
the point farthest from the measured line and its symmetrical point relative to the reference line. This method
is possible only if the features have been measured or constructed by passing through the points

- Nominal : The method using a defined limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the nominal
dimension of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined.

Table of possible solutions for calculating Coaxiality / Concentricity

Page 1320

Page 1321

Symmetry tolerance

The evaluation window of the symmetry tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the symmetry tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.
If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

Page 1322

allows to select the reference feature:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the symmetry tolerance indicated on the drawing.


The type of zone is determined by the tolerance on the drawing. For instance, in the case of
, one calculates a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular tolerance according to the feature to be
toleranced.

Select the calculation method:


- Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance over a length entered by
the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the case
of a projected tolerance. For example, for a cylinder, it is possible to enter a deviation over a Length of 35
mm Starting At 2 mm from the base. The distance Starting At corresponds to the distance starting from the
feature base until the plane of the alignment of definition to which the normal is closest to the orientation of
the feature.

- Cloud of points : The method using a cloud of points as calculation feature is the method which is closest
to the norm. The tolerance result is the distance between the point farthest from the measured plane or line
and its symmetrical point relative to the median reference plane or line. This method is possible only if the
features have been measured or constructed by passing through the points

Page 1323

- Nominal : The method using a defined limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the nominal
dimension of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined.

Table of possible solutions for calculating symmetry

Page 1324

Page 1325

Single Runout tolerance (or circular)

In the window allowing runout tolerance to be calculated, the software shows the type of runout calculated by
means of radio buttons:

circular axial runout for a plane, a cone


circular radial runout for a circle, a cone
circular conical runout for a cone.

Page 1326

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.

Single axial runout tolerance (or circular axial)


A plane may be selected as a toleranced feature to evaluate circular axial runout tolerance.
Circular axial runout is used to evaluate the form fault of a plane, probed on a determined diameter.
It is meaningless to request the circular axial runout of plane unless the plane has been measured with
enough points and the points are correctly located. It is recommended to use the circular method, in which
the center must closely coincide with the reference axis.
The tolerance zone is limited by two planes distant from each other by the value of the tolerance t.

Circular runout

Feature Toleranced
Ref. Feature

Page 1327

Single runout tolerance (or circular radial)


Circular run-out evaluates the form fault of a circle centered on the reference axis.
Evaluating circular run-out is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the circle and if these
points are spread all around the circle.
The tolerance zone is delimited by two circles having a difference of radius equal to the tolerance and having
the reference axis as center.

Page 1328

Total Runout tolerance

There are three types of total run-out:


Axial runout enables the runout defect of a plane to be evaluated during its rotation around the reference
axis.
The tolerance zone is the distance between the two planes perpendicular to the reference axis and containing
the toleranced plane.
Radial runout enables the runout defect of a cylinder to be evaluated during its rotation around the reference
axis.
The tolerance zone is the difference in the radii of the two cylinders containing the toleranced cylinder and
coaxial with the reference axis.
Conical runout enables the runout defect of a cone to be evaluated during its rotation around the reference
axis.
The tolerance zone is the normal distance to the surface of the cone between two cones coaxial with the
reference axis.

The evaluation window of the total runout tolerance is as follows:

Page 1329

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the total runout tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.
If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature:


by choosing it in the listbox,
or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the total runout tolerance indicated on the drawing.

Table of possible solutions for calculating a total runout

Page 1330

Evaluate Geometrical Tolerance

To evaluate a geometrical tolerance, select Evaluate from the Features menu or click
bar.

in the Feature

The Geometrical Tolerance window for a feature is displayed as shown below, but varies slightly according to
the feature selected:

The tabs are named as follows in the remainder of the explanation:


General

Parameters

References

Standards

Degrees of freedom

Important note: The Parameters, References and/or Degrees of freedom tabs may be shown
shaded (grayed out) for certain tolerances.

Name

Page 1331

shows the type of feature to be evaluated, here an inclination tolerance.


When an evaluation window is opened, the software offers a default feature name,
composed of feature type and an incremental number. For example INCL1, when the first inclination tolerance
feature is defined. This name may be modified by the user. Enter the name of the feature to be created in this
field, or select an existing feature from the drop-down list.
This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database.

Note: The default name may be modified via the menu Settings > Advanced Parameters > Default
feature name.

Family
The feature may be assigned a family by entering family name in this field or
selecting an existing family from the drop-down list.

Title block

The tolerance title block is progressively constructed as the information is


entered in the window. Here, an inclination tolerance with a value of 0.100mm.

Example: Evaluation of a position tolerance of 0.150 mm with BACKPL and INCLCYL as reference
features:

Note: Click on the areas of the title block to open the corresponding tag:
Opening of the General tab.
Opening of the Parameters tab. When it becomes possible to apply a maximum or minimum of
material, the following window is displayed:

Page 1332

Opening of the References tab.

General Tab

Select the type of tolerances to be evaluated from the drop-down list.

Select the feature to be toleranced:


in the Feature Database.
in the CAD Database.
by clicking on the desired feature in the 3D View.

Note: The features to be toleranced, selected from the Feature Database are displayed in black,
those selected from the CAD Database are displayed in blue:

When displayed in blue, the features can be renamed by clicking on their name.
Use this button to delete the feature from the selection.

Enter the dimension of the tolerance zone (directly or by using the arrows).

Note: For profile or surface tolerances, new parameters are displayed in the tab.
Enter the offset value to be applied to the distribution of the tolerance.
Click this button to use the unilateral criterion.

Page 1333

Parameters Tab

Modifiers
: The maximum material requirement, applied to the feature toleranced, allows the value of the
geometrical tolerance to be increased, if the feature to be toleranced is not in its maximum material state..
: The minimum material requirement, applied to the feature toleranced, allows the value of the
geometrical tolerance to be increased, if the feature to be toleranced is not in its minimum material state..

Tolerance zone

Select the shape of the tolerance zone: cylindrical (axial), planar, spherical or
surface. For cylindrical and spherical zones, the tolerance value will be equal to the diameter. For a planar
zone, the tolerance value will be equal to the distance separating the two planes.
Select the direction of the tolerance zone by clicking on this button.

Example: Planar tolerance zone


Select a normal Z feature, for example, to define a tolerance zone delimited by 2 parallel planes at XY.

Page 1334

Example: Surface tolerance zone


Select a Z direction feature. The tolerance zone is then contained within a normal Z plane.

Projected tolerance zone


: The projected tolerance zone allows an orientation or position tolerance to be applied, not to the feature
toleranced itself, but to its extension outside the workpiece.
Enter the length of the projected tolerance zone:
Enter the position of the projected tolerance zone.

Examples: Positioning tolerance on a cylinder:

Page 1335

References Tab

Page 1336

Select the tolerance reference feature(s) using the icon of the database

Click this button to use the partial references of the selected feature instead of its full measurement.
The tolerance calculation takes into account the relevant plane and its partial references. Thus, the reference
features are not then measured for calculating the tolerance, only the reference entities are taken into
account. The partial references are geometric point type features. Then select the points in the Feature
database.

Important note: The geometrical points used as specified reference must be defined on the CAD
surface.

Example 1: Evaluation of a position tolerance with the partial references of planes A, B and C as
reference features.
The partial references are represented by the following symbol:

Page 1337

Example2: The specified references can also be located in offset planes to the reference plane. This is
the case for A3 in the following example.

Example 3: The specified references can also be located in warped surfaces.

Page 1338

See example of use.

Use this button to delete the reference feature(s) from the selection.

Standards Tab

Page 1339

Used to select between the calculation mode, the ASME standard or the
least square method.
The tolerances impacted by this selection are tolerances for which a reference system exists. When the
criterion selected is Standard, the calculation mode is as follows:

For the cylinder feature: Minimum Circumscribed if tree structure and Minimum Inscribed if hole.
For the plane feature (except median plane): Plane passing through the farthest 3 points.

This option is used to create additional results features when evaluating


certain tolerances (Multiple position, Composite, Line profile, Surface profile,
Coaxiality/Concentricity, Symmetry, Parallelism, Perpendicularity and Inclination) in addition to the
default features:

alignment information for the calibrated alignment


features with tolerances in the calibrated alignment
reference features in the calibrated alignment

Then, when the option is selected, the following features are created, in addition to the previous list of
features:

alignment information for the Nominal and Measured alignments if they are created during tolerance
best-fit.
single tolerances associated with each feature with tolerances during evaluation of a multiple position
tolerance.
multiple position tolerances and the features associated with FRTZF parts (first line of the title block)
and PLTZF parts (second line of the title block) during composite tolerance evaluation.
Note: The features created are not printable.

Page 1340

This field is filled in if the tolerance is defined by a CAD click. Uncheck


the Associate box to deactivate the link between the toleranced feature and the CAD that was seslected from
the Configuration > Units > Standard menu.
Indicate the standard used to evaluate the tolerance.

Degrees of Freedom Tab


This tab is only available when editing the position tolerance.

Important note: If the degrees of freedom are modified, the reference features are no longer complied
with.

Indicates the calibrated alignment.


Used to modify the calibrated alignment. The selection is made from the
drop-down list of calibrated alignments.
Check this box to access the degrees of freedom to be allowed. By default,
the permissible degrees of freedom are those allowed by the reference features.

Indicates the expression alignment.

Page 1341

Check the boxes corresponding to the axes to be constrained in


translation.

Check the boxes corresponding to the axes to be constrained in rotation.


The left-hand part of the window is used to constrain the positions, the right-hand part is used to constrain
optimizations between certain limits.

This button gives access to the tolerance evaluation options.


The following window is displayed:

No measurement or retrieval is executed. If the features have already been evaluated, the tolerance is
defined and evaluated, otherwise it is only defined.
Used to measure the features during tolerance evaluation. If the features have already been
measured, they are not measured again.
Used to extract the features during tolerance evaluation, if they were not already evaluated.
Check this box to re-evaluate the features that were already measured or retrieved. If the box is
not checked, these features are not modified.

Once all the fields have been completed, click this button to launch tolerance calculation.
Closes the window without applying any changes made.

Page 1342

Straightness tolerance

Straightness evaluates the form fault of a line. The software determines the straightness tolerance for a line
by calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the line calculated by
Tchebitchev.

Note: Requesting the straightness of a line is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on
the line, and if these points are well distributed along the line.

The evaluation window of the straightness tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.

In the tab

, the tolerance zone can be selected from among others:

Page 1343

Select the tolerance zone of the features as desired, axial or surface. The
tolerance zone depends on the tolerancing type requested on the dimensioning plane:

Note: When evaluating a straightness tolerance on a cylinder, generatrixes are virtually created from
the probing points. A calculation is then executed to recover the deviation of each generatrix with respect to
the nominal axis. The tolerance is then equal to the greatest deviation.

Page 1344

Flatness tolerance

Flatness evaluates the form fault of a plane. The software determines the flatness tolerance for a plane by
calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the plane using Tchebytchev.

Note: Requesting the flatness of a plane is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the
plane, and if these points are well distributed its surface.

The evaluation window of the flatness tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.

The zone of tolerance is limited by two parallel planes which include the toleranced plane.

Page 1345

Page 1346

Roundness tolerance

Roundness is used to esteem the form fault of a circle. The software determines the roundness tolerance for
a circle by calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the circle calculated
by Tchebitchev.

Notes:

Requesting the Roundness of a circle is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the
circle, and if these points are well distributed on the circumference.
Evaluating roundness of a circle in a cone is only meaningful if the cone was measured as a single
path and subject to the following constraints: cone angle (Dim1)and cone direction (Parallel to).

The evaluation window of the roundness tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.

Page 1347

The tolerance area is limited by two concentric and coplanar circles between which you can find all the
probed points:

Note: When evaluating a roundness tolerance on a cylinder, circles along the contour of the cylinder
are virtually created from probing points. A calcualtion is then executed to recover the deviation of each circle
with respect to the nominal axis. The tolerance is then equal to the greatest deviation.

Example: For a cone


The probed points are offset along the cone gradient, onto the plane perpendicular to the cone axis and
passing through their barycenter. These projected points, all located on the same plane, are used to
calculated the tolerance.

Probing Points
Projected probing points
(used to calculate
roundness)
Projection plane

Page 1348

Cylindricity tolerance

The cylindricity is used to evaluate the shape defect of a cylinder. The software determines the cylindricity
tolerance of a cylilnder by calculating the distance separating the two orthogonally farthest points to the
cylinder, calculated by Tchebitchev.

Note: Requesting the Cylindricity of a cylinder is meaningful only if you have measured enough points
on the cylinder, and if these points are well distributed on the circumference and height.

The evaluation window of the cylindricity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.

The tolerance zone is limited by two coaxial cylinders which include the whole of the probed points:

Page 1349

Page 1350

Profile of line tolerance

The tolerance of a line profile is used to evaluate the form fault of a section. The software calculates the
distance between the two points farthest from the defined section (perpendicular distance). The form
tolerance is twice this distance divided into equal parts on each side of the defined section.

Note: Requesting the tolerance of a profile line is meaningful only if you have measured enough points
on the section, and if these points are well distributed over the section.

The evaluation window of the profile of line tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
Check this box to create a composite tolerance. The title block preview
shows that it then is divided in two.
Click this button to use the unilateral criterion. The tolerance then becomes negative.

Page 1351

Enter the offset value to be applied to the distribution of the tolerance. This offset is applied
positively.

The tolerance area equals the diameter of the circle whos radius is the maximum distance between the
measured section and the nominal section:

Page 1352

Profile of surface tolerance

The tolerance of a surface profile is used to evaluate the form fault of a cone, a sphere or any other form. The
tolerance zone is the normal distance to the surface of the feature, the cone for example, between two cones
coaxial with the reference axis.

Note: Requesting the tolerance of the surface profile for a cone, a sphere or any other surface is
meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the surface, cone or sphere, and if these points are
well distributed over the feature.

The evaluation window of the profile of surface tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.

Selecting undefined features


When the features to be toleranced are not defined, Surface features are recognized.

Page 1353

There are two ways of selecting such surfaces: by clicking in the 3D View and via the CAD Database.
Each click on a CAD entity in the 3D View or each selection of a CAD entity in the database results in a
Surface feature being displayed in the list of features to be toleranced.
To assign several CAD surfaces in a single feature, hold the

key down while selecting them.

Example: To select two CAD entities in the 3D View:


For two Surface features

For a single Surface feature

A tooltip (bubble help) shows you to which features the surfaces belong:

To add surfaces, select the feature to be modified from the list, then:
- Hold

down and click the surface to be added in the 3D View or

- Hold

down and select the surfaces to be added in the Database.

Page 1354

Note: If no feature is selected in the list, the add surface operation is attributed to the last feature
added to the list.
To have the software recognize geometrical features (plane, cylinder, cone) instead of Surface features,
modify the SurfaceProfileTolerancedFeaturesMode parameter in the USER tab, ToleranceAnalyse
section.
SurfaceProfileTolerancedFeaturesMode = 1, default mode, the CAD entities are recognized as Surface
feature
SurfaceProfileTolerancedFeaturesMode = 0, CAD entities are recognized as geometrical features.

Check this box to create a composite tolerance. The title block preview
shows that it then is divided in two.
Click this button to use the unilateral criterion. The tolerance then becomes negative.

Enter the offset value to be applied to the distribution of the tolerance. This offset is applied
positively.

Page 1355

Surface profile tolerance applied to a cone and to a sphere:

The software calculates a sphere from the measured


points.
Among the probed points, the software selects the point
orthogonally farthest from the sphere surface.
It then calculates a sphere centered on the original sphere
and passing through this point.
The tolerance zone is equal to twice the difference
between the radii of two spheres.

Page 1356

The software calculates a cone from the measured points.


Among the probed points, the software selects the point
orthogonally farthest from the sphere surface.
It then calculates a cone with the same angle and on the
same axis as the original cone and passing through this
point.
The tolerance zone is equal to twice the difference
between the radii of two cone bases.

For any other form


To establish the tolerance:
- Surface points must be probed. These points are used to create a section,
- A section is created using the previously measured points,
- In the evaluation window, select the section that has been created as the toleranced feature.

Page 1357

Parallelism tolerance

The evaluation window of the parallelism tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The tolerance zones available in the second tab are cylindrical and flat surface.
The points of the feature to be toleranced, previously measured or constructed from points, are used to
delimit a tolerance zone parallel to the reference.

Page 1358

Table of possible solutions for calculating parallelism

Page 1359

Perpendicularity

The evaluation window of the perpendicularity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The tolerance zones available in the second tab are cylindrical and flat surface.
The points of the feature to be toleranced, previously measured or constructed from points, are used to
delimit a tolerance zone perpendicular to the feature.

Page 1360

Table of possible solutions for calculating perpendicularity

Page 1361

Page 1362

Angularity tolerance

The evaluation window of the angularity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The tolerance zones available in the second tab are cylindrical and flat surface.

The points of the feature to be toleranced, previously measured or constructed from points, are used to define
an inclined tolerance zone of a theoretical angle i with respect to the reference feature.

Page 1363

Table of possible solutions for calculating angularity

Page 1364

True Position tolerance

A position can be calculated either relative to a feature or to a an entire reference system.

The evaluation window of the true position tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.

Important note: For a line position tolerance

When the toleranced feature is a measured 2D feature, the tolerance zone to be applied is a planar
area.
When the toleranced feature is a line constructed by optimization, the tolerance zone to be applied is
a cylindrical zone.

Table of possible solutions for calculating position tolerance

Page 1365

Page 1366

Multiple True Position tolerance

Multiple Location enables the positions of toleranced features with tolerances to be optimised, so as to
minimise the deviation of the feature with the greatest deviation.
The evaluation window of the multiple true position tolerance is as follows. It can be accessed when several
features (of the same type) are selected from the Database.

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the multiple true position tolerance are as follows:
See Composite tolerance.
See Bidirectional tolerance.

Results
After evaluating the multiple location, the software creates:

The resulting reference alignment obtained by optimizing the features' definition reference alignment.

Page 1367

The result of the multiple location.


The simple location of each of the features with tolerances.
A copy of all toleranced features expressed in the resulting reference alignment.
A reference alignment feature specifying the rotation and translation values of the created reference
alignment, with the multiple location calculation.

In the Results window, the "Multiple location" feature will consist in the following feature(s):

The value of the maximum deviation for the toleranced features


The value of the gain associated to the maximum/minimum of material on the reference.

Page 1368

Bidirectional multiple position tolerance

Bidirectional multiple position allows the positions of features with tolerances to be optimized to minimize the
deviation between the measured points and theoretical points while taking two directions into account.
When the bidirectional multiple position function is selected, the following window is displayed:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.
The specific fields to the bidirectionnal multiple position tolerance are as follows:

The features must all be defined in the same alignment. A material maximum or minimum may also be added
to the features (by right-clicking the features). The T1 and T2 fields allow tolerance values in both directions to
be entered. These two directions are determined by the feature definition alignment. Direction T1 is parallel to
the X axis and direction T2 is parallel to the Y axis.
General tab
Check this box to create a bidirectional tolerance.

Page 1369

Assign the first value to the tolerance zone found on the first line and assign the second value
to the tolerance on the second line. The first value corresponds to T1, the second to T2.
The features must all be defined in the same alignment. It is also possible to add a maximum or minimum of
material to the features. The T1 and T2 fields allow entry of tolerance values in both directions. These two
directions are determined by the feature definition alignment. Direction T1 is parallel to the X axis and
direction T2 is parallel to the Y axis.
The tolerance zone is limited by a parallelipiped with section T1xT2 the axis of which is in the theoretically
exact position of the line considerd, provided the tolerance is prescribed within two planes perpendicular with
respect to each other.

Parameters tab

This tab allows the tolerance zone to be expressed in polar coordinates. The orientation of the tolerance zone
is then radial:

Cartesian coordinate method

Polar coordinate method

Page 1370

Measured point

Defined point

In the above example, the measured point is within the tolerance in Cartesian coordinates, but outside the
tolerance in polar coordinates.

References tab
This tab is used to determine the reference system of the tolerance.

Using the results:


Once bidirectional multiple position evaluation has been performed, the software creates:

The result obtained for the position by giving the max. deviation on the first direction (t1) and the max.
deviation on the second direction (t2). Max. deviations t1 and t2 do not necessarily originate from the
same feature. If a material maximum or minimum was selected for the reference, the result of this
multiple position also gives the material gain obtained on the reference.
The simple position of each feature with a tolerance.
A copy of each feature with a tolerance redefined in the result alignment.
The result alignment obtained by optimizing the definition alignment, along with alignment information
giving the translation and rotation values of this new alignment with respect to the previous alignment.

Page 1371

Composite Tolerance
Composite multiple position allows the positions of features with tolerances to be optimized to minimize the
deviation between the measured points and theoretical points while taking two reference systems into
account.
The composite tolerance evaluation window is displayed as shown below:

The fields common to all geometrical tolerance evaluation windows are described on the Evaluate
Geometrical Tolerance page.
The fields specific to composite tolerance are:
General tab
Check this box to create a composite tolerance.

Assign the first value to the tolerance zone found on the first line and assign the second value
to the tolerance on the second line.
References tab

Page 1372

When adding a reference, the window is then displayed as follows:

Check the boxes corresponding to the references to also assign them to


the second tolerance zone.

Note: During composite tolerance evaluation, another tolerance cannot be selected by clicking in the
3D View. The

arrow should then be clicked to display the scrolling list of available tolerances.

See also: Example given below.

Page 1373

Example

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read?


In the box, there is one position symbol, this tolerance is therefore a composite tolerance.

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?

Step 1

Define and measure the three datum (reference) planes, A, B and C.


Define and measure the 4 circles.

Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite position tolerance:

Page 1374

Select the 4 circles.

Step 3

Enter the tolerance values (t1 = 0.8 and t2=0.2) in the General tab and add a material maximum in the
Parameters tab (or by clicking in the title block).

Step 4

Enter the the composite tolerance datums.


Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- datum A = plane A
- datum B = plane B
- datum C = plane C
In the first box, select the plane A feature.
In the second box, select the plane B feature.
In the third box, select the plane C feature.
In the Repeated datums part, check the boxes corresponding to the features with datums A and B.

Page 1375

Step 5:

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions.


PLTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the first line.
CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data
in the first line.
TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line.
FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line.
CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the
data in the second line.

Page 1376

TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1377

Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance

The software automatically distinguishes a concentricity from a coaxiality according to the features used for
the calculation.
If circle features are used, the software does concentricity tolerance automatically. Concentricity requires the
presence of coplanar features. The circular or spherical tolerance zone is delimited by a circle or a sphere
having its center at the reference point.
If two axial features are selected, the software does a coaxial tolerance automatically.
The coaxial tolerance zone is delimited by a cylinder having its axis on the reference axis.

The evaluation window of the Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.

Page 1378

Table of possible solutions for calculating Coaxiality / Concentricity

Page 1379

Symmetry tolerance

The evaluation window of the symmetry tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a
geometrical tolerance page.

Page 1380

Table of possible solutions for calculating symmetry

Page 1381

Single (or Circular) Runout Tolerance

There are three types of runout: axial, radial and conical. Runout type is automatically selected according to
the feature to be toleranced:

circular axial runout for a plane.


circular radial runout for a circle.
circular conical runout for a cone.

The fields common to all geometrical tolerance evaluation windows are described on the Evaluate
Geometrical Tolerance page.

Single axial runout (or circular axial runout) tolerance


The circular radial runout is used to evaluate the defect of a circle, taken on a planar surface, rotating around
a reference a